Month: January 2024

We’re living in a fractal holographic light Matrix it doesn’t mean we’re not real?

We’re living in a fractal holographic light Matrix it doesn’t mean we’re not real? Click here for the video link please.

They Cracked The Code That Runs The Universe (MIND BLOWING!!!!)

Clarity Coaching – Transforming Lives
554K subscribers

137,233 views 21 Jan 2024 #billycarson #quantumphysics #multidimensional
Billy Carson is about to unveil the thousands of years old secret of our existence, one that mankind has been trying to decipher for millennia. This is not just surprising, but transformative as well, so sit tight and let’s dive in.

“IT’LL BEND YOUR REALITY!”
► Use Self hypnosis to reprogram your mind: https://bit.ly/2xo1QBU

©️ SOURCE CREDIT
This is the original video, “Our Universe Has 11 Dimensions, According to Quantum Physics | Billy Carson” –

• Our Universe Has 11 Dimensions, Accor…
Special thanks to Billy Carson –

/ @forbiddenknowledge1

#billycarson #quantumphysics #multidimensional

► ►Footage licensed through: Videoblocks & Filmpac
►Music from Audiojungle
Copyright disclaimer: We own commercial licenses for all the content used in this video. =====================================================
Our purpose, when making these videos, is to make quality financial educational videos and share these with our viewers.

1)This video has no negative impact on the original works (It would actually be positive for them)
2)This video is also used for teaching purposes.
3)It is transformative in nature.
4)I ONLY used bits and pieces of videos to get the point across where necessary.

If you are the legal content owner of any videos here and would like them removed please message me at manager.claritycoaching@gmail.com.

Higher dimensions

Search in video

Billy Carson is about to unveil the thousands of years old secret of our existence, one that
one that mankind has been trying to decipher for millennia. This is not just surprising, but transformative
as well, so sit tight and let’s dive in.

“We’re living in a multi-dimensional universe and there’s at least 11 Dimensions otherwise the universe would collapse. Each Dimension is a 90° angle right above the next one, compactified so they’re sitting right on top of us.


So within less than a plunck unit of space above you, there’s another dimension that actually exists with a
whole another Universe happening simultaneously while we’re sitting right here.
And from higher Dimensions they experience time differently. Time really doesn’t exist. The past present
and the future happen all at once. So somebody for example from The Fifth Dimension would look at us and they’d be able to see us, imagine us in this building here but imagine when I first walked in and imagine us in here and imagine me like in the bathroom or something.

They’d be able to see us in all the different rooms, the different rooms would represent different time frames of existence within this structure. So they can see the past present and future at the same time.
So is the idea that when you’re in a higher Dimension you can only you can see below lower Dimensions but
you can’t see Dimensions above you exactly unless you have the capability of matching; first you have
to obtain the frequency of higher Dimension and then match that frequency to be able to walk in.
So for example my hand is stopped now by this table why is it stopped. I’m not really touching the table,
there’s repulsion going on, electromagnetic repulsion between the electrons in my hands repelling the
electrons in the table, you don’t really touch anything.
Now if I can match the subatomic frequency of the atoms in this chunk of wood here in this table with my hand,
I would be able to pass my hand right through this table unscathed. Why because atoms are 99.999% empty space, nothing is really here, everything is only a light wave slowed down to a particular frequency and so if you can match frequencies you can merge with things you can walk through walls and all that kind of stuff.

The things that seem paranormal could be Advanced beings have tapped into some type of uh understanding of how to match different frequencies in our Dimension and appear Apparition apparitional or or or par are normal but in true reality they could just be taking a peak in.

And how did we come to the understanding that these higher dimensions exist like what is the most basic evidence that we have of this. Quantum physics uh proves it, so we look into the quantum world everything changed in standard physics is where we have where we are right now in the large side of physics but the smaller you go the more weird things get. We find that particles trans phase in and out of existence and they go to different dimensions.

We even know now that some of our synapses of our thoughts in our brain phase out of this Dimension and they go somewhere else and then they come back again and this has all been tracked and traced through the understanding of quantum mechanics and quantum physics and understanding that dimensions exist. The biggest way that we made a model of this is we figured out how to create something called quasi crystals. Now these quasi crystals are these multi-dimensional crystals we actually created an eighth dimensional quasi Crystal we created in a laboratory using different Technologies and then from that eighth dimensional quasi Crystal it casts a shadow of itself down to a fourth dimensional quasi Crystal which then cast down a shadow which creates a sphere. So we know that the the universe is most likely the shadow of a higher Dimension, we’re living in a light
Matrix which is actually a light Matrix which is a shadow of a high a much higher Dimension.

And so we know this because they created these crystals these quasi crystals and when they put different angles they cast Shadow sometimes. What do these crystals look like they look like um have you ever seen a adinkra codes I think I’ve heard you talk about this before no. They look like a Adinkra symbols mathematical symbols but in the third dimensional time space and so if you take them and throw pull them out into a three third dimensional time space they look like these um lines that are connected with these nodes like that this is a quasi Crystal yeah.

It’s an ordered structure but it’s not periodic if you put eighth dimensional quasi Crystal it’s a fractal it’s all about fra we live in a fractal holographic Universe the quasi crystal is a fundamental basis of the fractal holography that we’re living in we’re fully immersed in it so we can’t detect it but we’re living in a light Matrix and that’s what the Adinkra codes also prove.

Professor James Gates Jr University of Maryland former scientific adviser to President Obama he put together a team of the most incredible super Symmetry and theoretical physicists in the world like the top brains in the world on this and they started analysing what is The Ether of SpaceTime what is this soup that we’re living in that we’re inhabiting this universe what is it what is it made of what’s what’s powering it.

They discovered something called Adinkra codes which go back to the ancient Doan tribe from Mali Africa the original inhabitants of the land of Cam then moved to Mali later if they were throw thrown out or taken over at one point but they still kept this ancient knowledge in in in Mali about these adinkra codes and they would draw these patterns well he discovered that these patterns are actually mathematical codes.

And these are not just any mathematical code they’re actually the codes that describe the ether of Space/Time
itself. They’re error correcting codes the same exact codes that run our search engines and web browsers that we’re using right now to look at the image there’s coding behind that screen that runs this what we just did and guess what it’s the same code that runs the universe.
So we discovered that we’re living in a programmed light Matrix these are depicting the nature of reality and they actually are mathematical programming code they’re a special type of code though they’re error
correcting codes the same type that that Google browser is running on is the same thing that runs the universe.

What does this tell us and where do we take this like what is the obviously this is like foundational knowledge for us but like where do you see it going. Well if you understand that we’re living in a fractal holographic light Matrix it doesn’t mean we’re not real but it tells us wow this is the method of the creation now we’re getting closer to understanding what we really are.

We understand now that Consciousness isn’t made inside this Avatar body that the Avatar body doesn’t even exist that Consciousness is a stream of something, you know coming from somewhere else and it’s being picked up in this Matrix with this coding.

If you took all the humans on Earth there’s 8 billion humans on Earth if I took all 8 billion humans and remove the empty space between their atoms I can fit every human into a sugar cube one sugar cube can hold all eight
billion of us you see atoms are empty space if you take the empty space out you collapse it into one sugar cube all 8 billion can fit in one sugar cube so what does that mean wild what’s here.
There’s only one Consciousness it seems and it’s like a radio station that’s transmitting out a frequency
from a higher Dimension our Avatar bodies pick up that frequency you’re 99.1 I’m 99.2 he’s 99.3 but it’s still coming from the same source and so we’re all coming from the same Source it’s like the universe has found a way to live subjectively through multiple entities but not even through entities even through objects that we consider to be man-made because every atom we know now in quantum physics is also conscious.”

Imagine you’re reading a story, but instead of it being printed on the pages of a book, it exists in a space you can’t see or touch. This is a bit like the concept of a multi-dimensional universe that Billy Carson speaks about.
In our daily lives, we’re used to dealing with three dimensions: moving forwards and backwards, left and right,
up and down. But what if I told you there are more dimensions out there, ones that we can’t see or feel? This idea comes from a field in physics called string theory. Think of it like a guitar: when a string vibrates,
it makes a sound. In string theory, everything in our universe is made up of tiny, vibrating strings, and each vibration makes up the things we see around us, like stars, trees, and even ourselves. But for this theory to make sense, scientists believe there need to be more than just our three dimensions. In fact, they think there could be up to 11 different dimensions.

Now, why 11? It’s not just a random number. In the world of physics, the math works out perfectly when you include these 11 dimensions. These extra dimensions aren’t something we can touch or see, but they could be hiding in plain sight, folded into the universe in ways that are too small for us to notice. It’s like if you were a character in a book.
You might think your world is just the page you’re on, but there are so many more pages and chapters that you’re not aware of. This idea changes the way we think about everything around us. It’s like discovering there’s a whole new world hidden within our own, full of mysteries and wonders waiting to be explored.

  1. Dimensions and How They Fit Together

Let’s try to understand how these dimensions are connected to each other. Carson uses the idea of dimensions being at right angles to each other. In a world with only two dimensions, like a piece of paper, you have length and width. Now, add depth, and you’ve stepped into the three-dimensional world where we live.
But what about a fourth dimension? How does that fit in?
Thinking about another dimension beyond our three is tricky because it’s not something we can see or experience. But let’s use our imaginations. Imagine time as a sort of fourth dimension. We move through time just like we move through space, experiencing each moment one after the other.
Carson also talks about dimensions being “compactified.” This is a fancy way of saying they’re folded up so small that we can’t see them. Picture a very thin wire. From a distance, it looks like a simple line, one-dimensional. But if you look closer, you can see it has length, and if you could look even closer, you’d see it has thickness and even a tiny bit of width.

The extra dimensions in string theory are like this, but even smaller, so small that we don’t notice them in our daily lives. These hidden dimensions could be all around us, filled with things we can’t even begin to imagine.

It’s like if you lived in a two-dimensional world and suddenly discovered there’s a whole three-dimensional world above, below, and all around you. This idea opens up a universe of possibilities, where countless different realities might exist right next to ours, just out of sight.

  1. The Concept of Time in Higher Dimensions Imagine time as a river, flowing from the past to the future.
    This is how we usually understand time. But what if time was more like an ocean, where past, present, and future exist all at once? Billy Carson introduces us to this fascinating concept, suggesting that in higher dimensions, time doesn’t work the way we think it does.

In our three-dimensional world, we experience time linearly – one thing happens after another. But in higher dimensions, time could be experienced differently. It’s a bit like watching a parade from the street versus watching it from a tall building. From the street, you see the parade one float at a time as it passes by. But from the building, you can see the entire parade all at once. Carson talks about beings from a fifth
dimension who might see our three-dimensional world in a way we can’t imagine.

For them, looking at us might be like looking at a book where they can see every page at the same time.
They could see us in multiple places – our past, present, and future – simultaneously. This idea
challenges our usual understanding of time and suggests a universe where time is far more complex
and multidimensional than our everyday experience.

  1. Interactions Between Different Dimensions
    Now, how do these different dimensions interact with each other? Carson suggests that to ‘see’
    or interact with a higher dimension, one needs to match its frequency. This is like tuning into a radio station. Just as you need to be on the right frequency to hear a particular radio station,beings in one dimension need to tune into the frequency of another to interact with it.

In our everyday life, this is hard to grasp because everything we touch and see is in our three-dimensional world. But what if we could tune into these other dimensions? Carson suggests that the paranormal could be explained by beings who have figured out how to do this – to match the frequencies of different dimensions.

Think about atoms, which are mostly empty space. If we could somehow match the frequency of our atoms to the frequency of a wall’s atoms, we might be able to pass through it. This sounds like something out of a superhero movie, but in the realm of physics, it’s a theoretical possibility. It suggests that what we consider
solid and unmovable in our world could be more flexible and permeable than we ever imagined.

  1. Quantum Physics and Higher Dimensions Quantum physics might sound like a complex and distant concept, but think of it as the rulebook for how things work on a really, really small scale, much smaller than anything we can see.
    In Carson’s discussion,
    this microscopic world reveals the existence of higher dimensions. In quantum physics, particles do some pretty wild things – they can be in more than one place at the same time, and they can pop in and out of existence without warning.
    Now, imagine particles as tiny messengers traveling between dimensions. When quantum physicists observe these particles, they sometimes find them behaving in ways that don’t make sense in our three-dimensional world.

This is because these particles could be influenced by forces or laws from these higher dimensions. Just like a puppeteer’s strings can control a puppet’s movements from above, these higher dimensions could be influencing the particles we see in our world.

This idea shakes the very foundations of what we understand about our universe. It suggests that the universe is like a giant jigsaw puzzle, and quantum physics is showing us pieces from parts of the puzzle that we didn’t even know existed. It’s as if we’re getting a sneak peek into a hidden realm, opening doors to new worlds that operate under completely different rules than our own.

  1. The Human Brain, Quantum Mechanics, and Dimensional Phasing.
    The human brain is an amazing organ, but imagine if it had abilities beyond what we know.
    Carson uggests that our brain synapses – the tiny gaps between neurons where signals pass through – might
    actually be tapping into these higher dimensions. Think of your brain as a radio, not just picking
    up signals from our world, but also tuning into frequencies from these other dimensions. This might sound like science fiction, but in the world of quantum mechanics, it’s a possibility that scientists are beginning to explore. There’s evidence to suggest that these synapses are involved in processes that defy conventional physics, like being affected by quantum entanglement – a phenomenon where particles remain connected so that actions performed on one affect the other, no matter the distance between them. Carson’s idea here is that our thoughts might sometimes phase in and out of these higher dimensions.
    It’s like when you daydream and part of your mind wanders off to a different place. What if, in those moments,
    your mind is actually interacting with another dimension? This could explain moments of extraordinary inspiration or creativity – as if we’re tapping into a vast network of knowledge and experience that exists beyond our physical realm.
  2. The Universe as a Shadow of Higher Dimensions
    Imagine if our entire universe was just a shadow cast by a much more complex reality existing in higher dimensions. This idea, as Carson suggests, is like looking at the shadow of a tree and trying to imagine the tree itself. The shadow is a simpler, two-dimensional version of something much more intricate. In this analogy, our universe is the shadow, and the higher dimensions are the tree. The concept of a “light matrix” comes into play here.
    Think of it as a vast network or web of light, stretching out in all directions, far beyond what we can see or understand. This light matrix represents the higher dimensions, and our universe is a projection or a shadow of this much more complex structure. It’s as if we’re living in a 3D movie projected from a realm that’s far more advanced and multi-dimensional.

This perspective shifts our understanding of reality. Instead of seeing our universe as the entirety of existence, we can start to view it as just one level or aspect of something much larger and more intricate.
It suggests that what we experience as reality might just be a small slice of a much vaster, multidimensional cosmos.

  1. Quasicrystals and Dimensional Shadows
    Quasicrystals are a perfect example to illustrate this concept. These are structures that are incredibly ordered yet don’t repeat themselves like normal crystals.
    Think of it like a complex mosaic pattern that never exactly repeats. Scientists have created quasicrystals in the lab that are projections of higher-dimensional patterns.

When Carson talks about an eighth-dimensional quasicrystal casting a shadow to a lower dimension, he’s referring to how these complex structures can provide us insights into higher dimensions. It’s similar to how a three-dimensional object can cast a two-dimensional shadow. By studying these shadows, or quasicrystals, we can start to understand the shapes and patterns of the higher dimensions that we can’t directly perceive.

This is groundbreaking because it allows us to study and explore these higher dimensions indirectly. It’s like deciphering a secret code that tells us more about the universe and our place in it. These quasicrystals are not just physical structures;
they’re like windows into the higher dimensions of the universe, revealing a reality that
is much more complex and interconnected than what we see in our everyday lives.

  1. Adinkra Codes and the Ether of Spacetime Picture a world where every aspect of reality, from the movements of galaxies to the swirling of atoms, is governed by a hidden code. This is where the concept of Adinkra codes, as discussed by Carson, comes into play.
    Adinkra codes are like the universe’s programming language, complex mathematical symbols that describe the
    fabric of spacetime itself. They’re not just abstract concepts; these codes are thought to be the actual blueprint of reality. Adinkra codes find their roots in ancient African symbolism, but their modern interpretation in physics suggests something profound. They are seen as error-correcting codes, similar to those used in computer algorithms to ensure data isn’t lost or corrupted. In the context of the universe, these codes could be ensuring that the fundamental processes of nature run smoothly.
    Imagine the universe like a giant computer, and these Adinkra codes are its software, keeping everything running without glitches. This idea transforms our understanding of spacetime from something passive — just a stage where the events of the universe unfold — to an active participant, governed by a set of intricate, mathematical rules. It suggests that the reality we experience is underpinned by a complex, underlying structure that we’re only just beginning to understand.
  2. Consciousness Beyond Physical Bodies
    Now, let’s turn to one of the most intriguing aspects of Carson’s ideas:
    the nature of consciousness. Often, we think of our minds as being produced by our brains, contained within our physical bodies. But what if consciousness is more like a broadcast, being picked up by our brains like radios picking up a signal? This perspective sees consciousness not as something generated internally, but as something external that we tap into.

This idea is radical because it suggests that our sense of self, our thoughts, and our awareness might originate from outside our physical bodies, possibly even from another dimension.

It’s like the brain is a receiver, tuning into a frequency from a vast ocean of consciousness that exists beyond our physical world. Carson takes this further by suggesting that all humans, and potentially all life, are connected to this single source of consciousness.
It’s akin to the idea that every radio, regardless of its location or design, can tune into the same station. This connection could explain experiences of deep empathy, intuition, or even psychic phenomena — as instances where individuals are tapping more directly into this shared stream of consciousness.

  1. The Illusion of Physical

Existence and Universal Consciousness Have you ever considered that what we see and touch might not be as solid as it seems? Carson introduces a mind-bending idea:

Our physical reality might be more illusion than actual substance. He brings up an astonishing fact about atoms – they are 99.999% empty space. If you remove all the empty space within every human on Earth, you could fit the entire human population into the volume of a sugar cube.

This notion turns our understanding of physical existence on its head. It suggests that what we perceive as solid and tangible – buildings, mountains, even our own bodies – is mostly nothing but empty space. It’s like discovering that a seemingly solid sculpture is actually made of thin air, held together in a specific form by invisible forces.
Moreover, Carson proposes that this illusion of physical existence is tied to a single, universal consciousness. Imagine if every radio in the world was tuned to the same station. Similarly, he suggests that every human, every living being, might be ‘tuned’ into the same frequency of consciousness. This idea paints a picture of unity and interconnectedness that transcends physical boundaries, implying that at the deepest level, we are all part of one vast, intercom

Are we alone no ”The Bible” is very clear about it.

The so-called elite/Cabal and deep State enforcing these lies and institutions like NASA. They do not want you to known and asked difficult questions.

THERE are two worlds, “the visible, and the invisible,” as the Creed speaks, the world we see, and the world we do not see; and the world we do not see as really exists as the world we do see.
“While we look not at the things which are seen, but at the things which are not seen;
for the things which are seen are temporal, but the things which are not seen are eternal.” 2 Cor. iv. 18.
For the world, we see we know to exist, because we see it. We have but to lift up our eyes and look around us, and we have proof of it: our eyes tell us. We see the sun, moon and stars, earth and sky, hills and valleys, woods and plains, seas and rivers.
And again, we see men and the works of men. We see cities, and stately buildings, and their inhabitants; men running to and fro, and busying themselves to provide for themselves and their families or to accomplish great designs, or for the very business’ sake.
All that meets our eyes from the visible world. It is an immense world; it reaches to the stars.
Thousands on thousands of years might we speed up the sky, and though we were swifter than the light itself, we should not reach them all. They are at distances from us greater than any that is assignable. So high, so wide, so deep is the world; and yet it also comes near and close to us. It is everywhere; and it seems to leave no room for any other world.

And yet in spite of this universal world which we see, there is another invisible world, quite as far-spreading, quite as close to us, and more wonderful; another world all around us, though we see it not, and more wonderful than the world we see, for this reason, if for no other, that we do not see it.

All around us are numberless objects, coming and going, watching, working or waiting, which we see not: this is that other world, which the eyes reach not unto, but faith only.

Let us dwell upon this thought.
We are born into a world of sense; that is, of the real things which lie round about us, one great department comes to us, accosts us, through our bodily organs, our eyes, ears, and fingers.
We feel, hear, and see them; and we know they exist because we do thus perceive them.
Things innumerable lie about us, animate and inanimate; but one particular class of these innumerable things is thus brought home to us through our senses.
And moreover, while they act upon us, they make their presence known. We are sensible of them at the time, we are conscious that we perceive them.
We not only see, but know that we see them; we not only hold intercourse but know that we do.


We are among men, and we know that we are.
We feel cold and hunger; we know what sensible things remove them. We eat, drink, clothe ourselves, dwell in houses, converse and act with others, and perform the duties of social life; and we feel vivid that we are doing so, while we do so.

Such is our relation towards one part of the innumerable beings which lie around us. They act upon us, and we know it; and we act upon them in turn, and know we do.
But all this does not interfere with the existence of that other world which I speak of, acting upon us, yet not impressing us with the consciousness that it does so.
It may as really be present and exert an influence as that which reveals itself to us. And that such a world there is, Scripture tells us.

Do you ask what it is, and what it contains? I will not say that all that belongs to it is vastly more important than what we see, for among things visible are our fellow-men, and nothing created is more precious and noble than a son of man. But still, taking the things which we see altogether, and the things we do not see altogether, the world we do not see is, on the whole, a much higher world than that which we do see.

And in that other world are the souls also of the dead. They too, when they depart hence, do not cease to exist, but they retire from this visible scene of things; or, in other words, they cease to act towards us and before us through our senses.
They live as they lived before; but that outward frame, through which they were able to hold communion with other men, is in some way, we know not how, separated from them, and dries away and shrivels up as leaves may drop off a tree. They remain, but without the usual means of approach towards us, and correspondence with us.


As when a man loses his voice or hand, he still exists as before, but cannot any longer talk or write, or otherwise hold intercourse with us; so when he loses not voice and hand only, but his whole frame, or is said to die, there is nothing to show that he is gone, but we have lost our means of apprehending him.

When, indeed, persons feel it so difficult to conceive the existence among us of the world of spirits, because they are not aware of it, they should recollect how many worlds all at once are in fact contained in human society itself.
We speak of the political world, the scientific, the learned, the literary, the religious world; and suitably: for men are so closely united with some men, and so divided from others, they have such distinct objects of pursuit one from another, and such distinct principles and engagements in consequence, that in one and the same place there exist together a number of circles or (as they may be called) worlds, made up of invisible men, but themselves invisible, unknown, nay, unintelligible to each other.
Men move about in the common paths of life, and look the same; but there is little community of feeling between them; each knows little about what goes on in any other sphere than his own; and a stranger coming into any neighborhood would, according to his own pursuits or acquaintances, go away with an utterly distinct, or a reverse impression of it, viewed as a whole.

Or again, leave for a while the political and commercial excitement of some large city, and take refuge in a secluded village; and there, in the absence of news of the day, consider the mode of life and habits of mind, the employment and views of its inhabitants; and say whether the world, when regarded in its separate portions, is not more unlike itself than it is unlike the world of Angels which Scripture places in the midst of it?

The relation between Health, Spirituality and Human Consciousness

Your lifestyle and dietary choices make an enormous difference to your lifespan and to your quality of life in later years.

A good diet will help to keep healthy. All it takes is a little work in the ‘here and now’ to keep you in a good shape for later.
People who are born healthy can grow very old and still remain in good health. Most of them will, however, die long before their potential Biological Old Age is reached.

Why should that be? Perhaps the past can help to explain, let’s take a look into some aspects of our history and then you can make up your own mind!
One of the oldest books we can use is the Bible. If you look at the Old Testament you will find that:

Most scientists dispute these claims, although one of them, C. Edward Burtis, had to admit, after a life-long study, that the age mentioned for Moses was correct. These great ages were partly made possible because of their lifestyle and a special diet which had to be enforced rigidly.

The Sumerians, living in the same area and same period are another society who left us with a lot of records, this time in the form of baked clay documents. They did record most of the reigns of the different Kings in the area and when we look at them we find Alien known as rulers of the earth.

The Ancient people explained the decrease and increase of the lifespan in the following terms: Time and space are aspects of the material world.

This is one of the reasons why Buddha called the material world an illusion. Despite its powerful manifestation, its glamour, and its glitter, it is all in vain. Others; another reason; the material world has no inside, it is empty and it cannot make one single soul really happy!

The spiritual and mental world is not ruled by Time and exist indefinitely – forever.

The more cynical ones of the ancients people associated Time with what they would call corruption and as the Destroyer!
Materialism as a destructive philosophy?
Expansion of consciousness and awareness could reduce the effects that time has on the material world and expand the maximum lifespan, a process we call now Transcendentalism.

In terms of science, not one of these ages can be realized and claims made about enormous advantages made in respect to the same.

Warning: Talking about Changes Physiological Systems, Cell population, and cell metabolism.
All about what you eat, the way in which you live, your environment and all changed to advance commercial interest and controls. Forgotten that the necessary, incredible complexity of the biochemistry of every cell, required for the continuation of health and life itself, reinforces that realization that we depend totally on our natural, genetically controlled chemistry to keep us operational on a day-to-day basis. Toxins and polluted food, other products used in cleaning, air, water all can interfere with this. That with few exceptions, we are totally at the mercy of our biological system to operating correctly, on its own.
Thousand of years ago the Chinese had written in stone that; our bodies and our selves reflect the natural world we live in. What you do to the environment and any changes you make to your lifestyle/food will affect you. Your body affects the way you think and influence you mentally and spiritually. Despite that, we set out to change all that in the name of science, not really the scientist but the politicians and the establishment in to get us to agree and comply.
What is called in the religion a flesh body can grow old and stay healthy and average 160 years in the right environment.
When you allow for poison the air, water, and food that all changes.
Chronic stress and chronic diseases are related.

It was Airl the captured Alien of Roswell in 1947 who told Matilda that there is no hell but planet Earth would come very close. Run by lunatics and Butchers

 0

The carbon dioxide scam now exposed?

Carbon Dioxide — The Gas of Life !

Climate hysteria:

“In spite of incontrovertible arguments that there is no climate emergency — CO2 is good for the Earth — the campaign to banish CO2, ‘net zero,’ has been very successful. So, how can that be? I’m really out of my depth here because now I’m talking about human nature. I’m really good with instruments and with solving differential equations but I’m not very good at understanding human beings.

But here are some of the drivers: noble lies, political lies, ignorance, stupidity, greed. Noble lies goes back to Plato who discusses it in ‘The Republic.’ ‘In politics, a noble lie is a myth or untruth, often, but not invariably of a religious nature, knowingly propagated by an elite to maintain social harmony or to advance an agenda.’

And here there’s a clear agenda. If you could somehow unite mankind to fight some external threat, for example CO2 pollution, then we won’t fight each other. There won’t be wars. So, I think many sincere people have latched on to the CO2 narrative partly for that reason. You can actually read about it in the early writings of the Club of Rome.

Then there are political lies. This is one my favorite H.L. Menken quotes: ‘The whole aim of practical politics is to keep the populace alarmed (and hence clamorous to be led to safety) by menacing it with an endless series of hobgoblins, all of them imaginary.’”

Ignorance, of course, is widespread, and largely based on incomplete knowledge or a flawed understanding of the facts. And what of stupidity? Dietrich Bonhoeffer, one of the few German clergymen who opposed Hitler and eventually paid for his public dissent with his life, once wrote about human stupidity:

“Against stupidity we have no defense. Neither protest nor force can touch it. Reasoning is of no use. Facts that contradict personal prejudices can simply be disbelieved — indeed, the fool can counter by criticizing them, and if they are undeniable, they can just be pushed aside as trivial exceptions.

So the fool, as distinct from the scoundrel, is completely self-satisfied. In fact, they can easily become dangerous, as it does not take much to make them aggressive. For that reason, greater caution is called for than with a malicious one.”

Happer himself has experienced the danger of opposing stupidity. “I regularly get phone calls threatening me, my wife and children with death,” he says. “So, what kind of movement is this?” Lastly, greed. A.S. Pushkin once said, “If there should happen to be a trough, there will be pigs.” And climate science is currently where the big bucks are — provided your work furthers the global warming narrative and the need for net zero emissions.

Whatever the drivers are, responsible people everywhere need to push back against the false climate change narrative and the net zero agenda, as it will accomplish nothing in terms of normalizing temperatures, but will rapidly erode quality of life and the sustainability of food production, and shift wealth into the hands of the few.

https://youtu.be/tXJ7UZjFDHU

Analysis by Dr. Joseph Mercola/January 27, 2024

Please click here the video link.

Next

How Sun Exposure Improves Your Immune Function

What We’ve Learned From Hundreds of Vaccine Shedding Reports

https://articles.mercola.com/themes/blogs/mercola/VideoPanel.aspx?PostID=1364964&v=20240127&CacheVideo=1

STORY AT-A-GLANCE

  • Carbon dioxide (CO2) is commonly mischaracterized as a harmful waste product of respiration and is falsely blamed for disrupting the planetary climate
  • CO2 is an essential gas necessary for life. Moreover, its impact on Earth’s temperatures is negligible, and will remain negligible even if the current concentration in the atmosphere were to double. A 100% increase of CO2, from 400 ppm to 800 ppm, would decrease radiation into space by just 1.1%, resulting in a 0.7 degree C increase of the average earth temperature
  • A 0.7 degree C difference means there’s no climate emergency, and no matter what we do to reduce CO2 emissions, it’s not going to impact global temperatures. To fabricate an emergency where there is none, it is assumed that massive positive feedbacks are involved. However, most natural feedbacks are negative, not positive, so isn’t it likely the 0.7 degree C increase is an overestimation to begin with
  • There’s no single temperature of the Earth. It varies by location and altitude. For every kilometer of altitude, you have an average cooling of 6.6 degrees C
  • Higher CO2 levels will green the planet, making it more hospitable to plant life. The more CO2 there is, the better plants and trees grow. CO2 also reduces the water needs of plants, reducing the risks associated with droughts

The video above, “CO2, The Gas of Life,” features a lecture given at the Summit Old Guard Meeting in New Jersey, October 3, 2023, by William Happer, Ph.D., Professor Emeritus of physics at Princeton University and former scientific adviser to the Bush and Trump administrations.

The topic: carbon dioxide (CO2), commonly mischaracterized as a harmful waste product of respiration and a pollutant that is disrupting the planetary climate. As explained by Happer in this lecture, CO2 is actually an essential gas necessary for life. Moreover, its impact on Earth’s temperatures is negligible, and will remain negligible even if the current concentration in the atmosphere were to double.

CO2 Is Not a Pollutant

At present, the CO2 concentration in the atmosphere at a few thousand feet of elevation is around 430 parts per million (ppm). Closer to the ground, concentrations vary widely, both by location and time of day. This is because ground-level readings are impacted by photosynthesis and the respiration of insects and the like.

In the room where Happer was giving his lecture, the CO2 reading was 1,800 ppm — the result of having a large group of people breathing in a closed space. Air conditioning systems have CO2 meters that turn on fans to bring outdoor air inside when levels get too high.

The question of what is too high is an important one, considering The Great Resetters are pushing a green agenda that demands the dismantling of energy infrastructure and farming in the name of stopping climate change, which quite obviously threatens our quality of life and food supply. Ultimately, it may threaten human existence altogether.

The fact of the matter is that CO2 is not the “bad guy” it’s made out to be, and the “net zero” agenda is wholly inappropriate if maintaining life on Earth is part of the equation.

“CO2 is a very essential and natural part of life,” Happer says. “It is the gas of life. We’re made of carbon after all, mostly carbon, and we breathe out a lot of CO2 a day just by living. Each of us breathes out about 2 pounds of CO2 a day. Multiply that by 8 billion people and 365 days a year, and just [by] living, people are a non-negligible part of the CO2 budget of the Earth.

Nevertheless, we are living through a crusade against so-called pollutant CO2. People talk about carbon pollution. [But] every one of us is polluting Earth by breathing, [so] if you want to stop polluting … apparently God wants us to commit suicide …

We’re doing all sorts of crazy things because of this alleged pollutant … more and more beautiful meadows are being covered with black solar panels. It doesn’t work very well; it doesn’t work at all at night. It doesn’t work on cloudy days. It doesn’t work terribly well in the middle of the winter because of the angle of the sun.

But nevertheless we’re doing it. We’re being misled into climate hysteria, and if you haven’t read this book, I highly recommend it. It was published first in 1841, called ‘Extraordinary Popular Delusions and the Madness of Crowds.’ It’s as relevant today as it was then …

I’m a physicist. I’m proud to say that no one could call me a climate scientist, but I know a lot about climate and I was a coauthor of one of the first books on the effects of carbon dioxide 41 years ago. This was a study done by the Jason Group which I was a member of. I was chairman for a while and it had really good people there.”

Long-Term Impact of Increasing Atmospheric CO2

The key question when it comes to global warming is, how much do you warm the Earth if you double the atmospheric CO2 concentration? This is called the climate sensitivity question. The GUESS is that doubling CO2 would result in a 3-degree centigrade rise in the global temperature.

“It was not based on any hard calculations,” Happer says. “It was because of group-think. That’s what everybody else thought, and so that’s what we thought. Now, in my defense, one of the reasons I didn’t pay much attention to this [is because] I was working on something at this time that I thought was much more important. So, let me tell you about that, so you get a feeling for why I think I’m qualified to pontificate about this subject.

It was the beginning of the Strategic Defense Initiative, of Star Wars … President Reagan … wanted some way to defend the United States so that we didn’t have to have this mass suicide pact, and among other things we considered using high-powered lasers to burn up incoming missiles …

But here’s the problem. If you take the 1 megawatt laser on the ground and you send it toward the missile, by the time it gets to the missile, the beam — instead of focusing all the power on the missile — breaks up into hundreds of sub beams — speckles — and this was something that was well-known to astronomers. You have the same problem when you’re looking at distant stars and galaxies.

Astronomers knew how to fix this … If you can measure how much this wave is bent, then you can bounce it off a mirror bent in the opposite direction, and when the wave bounces up it’s absolutely flat. That’s called adaptive optics and it works beautifully. Then, when you focus the corrected beam, you get a single spot instead of hundreds of [beams].

The trouble with that is that if you look at the night sky, there are only four or five stars that are bright enough to have enough photons to do the measurement of the distortion of the wave. So, we had a classified meeting in the summer of 1982. There were a number of Air Force officers there who explained the problem. By chance, I knew how to solve it.

You can make an artificial star anywhere in the sky by shining a laser tuned to the sodium frequency onto the layer of sodium above our heads, at 90 to 100 kilometers.”

While the Air Force was initially dubious about there being a sodium layer in the atmosphere, they did eventually build the sodium laser proposed by Happer, and if you go to any ground-based telescope today, you’ll usually see one or two of them. Anyway, that story was simply to impress you with the fact that Happer knows what he’s talking about when it comes to atmospheric constituents and their related phenomena.

Download this Article Before it Disappears

Download PDF

CO2 Has No Discernible Impact on Earth Temperatures

According to the climate alarmists, rising CO2 will result in global warming that will threaten all life on earth. In actuality, however, CO2 “is a very puny tool to do anything to the climate,” Happer says.

Keep in mind that there’s no single temperature on the Earth. It varies by location and altitude. For every kilometer of altitude, you have an average cooling of 6.6 degrees C. This is known as the lapse rate. That cooling continues up to the troposphere, where it stops.

The cooling is due to the fact that warm air rises and cool air descends. “It’s the convection that sets that rapid drop of temperatures — 6-and-a-half degrees per kilometer,” Happer says. He then explains the following graph, which details the thermal radiation to space from the Earth, assuming a surface temperature of 15.5 degrees C. The greenhouse gases is the area beneath the jagged black curve.

According to Happer, this is only 70% of what it would be without greenhouse gases, which is shown as the smooth blue curve, because as the sun heats the earth, greenhouse gases — mostly water vapor — impede cooling.

The most important part of this graph is the red jagged line, shown here with a red arrow pointing to it. That red line shows the effect that a doubling (a 100% increase) of CO2 would have on the surface temperature of Earth. As you can see, it’s negligible. It decreases radiation into space by just 1.1%.

earths surface temperature graph

As noted by Happer:

“Let that sink in. We’re far from doubling [CO2] today. It’ll take a long time, [and] it only causes a 1% change. So, CO2 is a very poor greenhouse gas. It’s not an efficient greenhouse gas.”

If you remove ALL CO2, you end up with the green jagged curve. As you can see, the green and black jagged lines run parallel with the exception of one spot. There’s a huge effect if you go from zero CO2 to 400 ppm (green arrow). But it’s again negligible when you go from 400 ppm to 800 ppm (black arrow). As explained by Happer:

“You get all of the effect in the first little bit of added CO2 … So, it’s really true that doubling CO2 only causes a 1% decrease of radiation. The IPCC [Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change] gets the same answer so this is not really controversial, although they will never show you the curve or tell you that it’s 1%. That would interfere with the narrative …

So, this is radiation to space. How do you change that into a temperature? They’re worried that we’ll get intolerable warming of the surface of the Earth where we live, or other parts of the atmosphere.

Here again it’s important to do the first order calculation … and it says that the warming from doubling CO2 is … less than one degree … 0.7 [degree] C. Very small. You really can’t feel that.”

Why, Then, the Alarm Over Rising CO2?

Needless to say, this is a huge problem for the climate science community, because a 0.7 degree C difference means there’s no climate emergency, and no matter what we do to reduce CO2 emissions, it’s not going to impact the climate.

So, to fabricate an emergency where there really is none, the IPCC “assumes enormous positive feedbacks,” Happer says. Because CO2 is not a potent greenhouse gas, the tiny direct warming caused by it is amplified by factors of anywhere from four to six to make it seem like it has a discernible impact.

“I like to say it’s affirmative action for CO2,” Happer says. “It’s not very good at warming but if you assume lots of feedback, you can keep the money coming in.” The problem with that is that most who have a background in physical chemistry and physics know that most natural feedbacks are negative, not positive.

“The 0.7 degree C of warming you get when you double the CO2 is probably an overestimate, because there are probably negative feedbacks operating in this very complicated climate system that we live in.” ~ William Happer, Ph.D.

This is known as the Chatelier Principle, named after the French chemist who first discovered that “when a simple system in thermodynamic equilibrium is subjected to a change in concentration, temperature, volume or pressure … the system changes to a new equilibrium and … the change partly counteracts the applied change.”

So, the 0.7 degree C of warming you get when you double the CO2 is “probably an overestimate,” Happer says, “because there are probably negative feedbacks operating in this very complicated climate system that we live in. The atmosphere, the oceans, everything is nonlinear.”

The key take-home from all this is that whether we’re at 400 ppm of CO2 or 800 ppm doesn’t matter when it comes to impacting the temperature of the earth. In short, the climate hysteria is just that. It’s not based on any real threat. Only if we were able to get to absolute zero CO2 would there be a change, but doing so also means we’d exterminate all living things on the planet. It’s nothing short of a suicide agenda.

More CO2 Will Green the Planet

As explained by Happer, more CO2 will green the planet, making it more hospitable to plant life. The more CO2 there is, the better plants and trees grow, so if we want lush forests and bountiful harvests, cutting CO2 is the last thing we’d want to do.

“All plants grow better with more CO2 [in the air],” he says. “Plants are really starved [of] CO2 today. We know plants need many essential nutrients. They need nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium; most important of all they need water. But they also need CO2, and like many of the other nutrients, CO2 today is in short supply.”

CO2 benefits plants by reducing their water needs, hence less risk from drought. Higher CO2 levels also reduce harmful photorespiration. According to Happer, C3-type plants lose about 25% of their photosynthesis potential due to increased photorespiration. For more in-depth information about the role of CO2 in plant growth and photosynthesis, please view the video. This discussion begins around the 40-minute mark.

Lies, Ignorance, Stupidity or Something Else?

In closing, Happer makes an effort to explain what’s driving the climate hysteria:

“In spite of incontrovertible arguments that there is no climate emergency — CO2 is good for the Earth — the campaign to banish CO2, ‘net zero,’ has been very successful. So, how can that be? I’m really out of my depth here because now I’m talking about human nature. I’m really good with instruments and with solving differential equations but I’m not very good at understanding human beings.

But here are some of the drivers: noble lies, political lies, ignorance, stupidity, greed. Noble lies goes back to Plato who discusses it in ‘The Republic.’ ‘In politics, a noble lie is a myth or untruth, often, but not invariably of a religious nature, knowingly propagated by an elite to maintain social harmony or to advance an agenda.’

And here there’s a clear agenda. If you could somehow unite mankind to fight some external threat, for example CO2 pollution, then we won’t fight each other. There won’t be wars. So, I think many sincere people have latched on to the CO2 narrative partly for that reason. You can actually read about it in the early writings of the Club of Rome.

Then there are political lies. This is one my favorite H.L. Menken quotes: ‘The whole aim of practical politics is to keep the populace alarmed (and hence clamorous to be led to safety) by menacing it with an endless series of hobgoblins, all of them imaginary.’”

Ignorance, of course, is widespread, and largely based on incomplete knowledge or a flawed understanding of the facts. And what of stupidity? Dietrich Bonhoeffer, one of the few German clergymen who opposed Hitler and eventually paid for his public dissent with his life, once wrote about human stupidity:

“Against stupidity we have no defense. Neither protest nor force can touch it. Reasoning is of no use. Facts that contradict personal prejudices can simply be disbelieved — indeed, the fool can counter by criticizing them, and if they are undeniable, they can just be pushed aside as trivial exceptions.

So the fool, as distinct from the scoundrel, is completely self-satisfied. In fact, they can easily become dangerous, as it does not take much to make them aggressive. For that reason, greater caution is called for than with a malicious one.”

Happer himself has experienced the danger of opposing stupidity. “I regularly get phone calls threatening me, my wife and children with death,” he says. “So, what kind of movement is this?” Lastly, greed. A.S. Pushkin once said, “If there should happen to be a trough, there will be pigs.” And climate science is currently where the big bucks are — provided your work furthers the global warming narrative and the need for net zero emissions.

Whatever the drivers are, responsible people everywhere need to push back against the false climate change narrative and the net zero agenda, as it will accomplish nothing in terms of normalizing temperatures, but will rapidly erode quality of life and the sustainability of food production, and shift wealth into the hands of the few.

Use of food for compliance/control. Suggestion’s that it is the result of overpopulation and climate change.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d5jSi-0vmH8

“This Is WHAT They Are TRYING To Hide From YOU” – Whitney Webb 2024 Prediction

Share

57,664 views 10 Feb 2024
In this eye-opening video, Whitney Webb delves into the unsettling future of the global economy, underscored by the potential for economic turmoil triggered by cyber-attacks or other crises. Webb sheds light on the controversial World Coin model for humanitarian aid, which leverages biometric identification for ration distribution, echoing the flaws and dangers seen in India’s Aadhaar system. As geopolitical tensions simmer, Webb reveals a unified push towards digital IDs, CBDCs (Central Bank Digital Currencies), and a surveilled economy across global powers, despite surface-level divisions. From the financial technologies bridging CBDC models to the strategic maneuvers of cryptocurrency giants aiming to align with regulatory frameworks, this video explores the underlying agendas aimed at consolidating control and surveillance. Join us on Unscripted Crypto as we uncover the concealed mechanisms that could shape our digital future and what they mean for personal freedom and privacy.

👉 FINANCIAL DISCLAIMER
This channel is intended to share tips and investment videos by experts. We DO NOT GIVE FINANCIAL ADVICE! Please consult a licensed financial advisor and do your own research before making any financial action.

Never buy crypto just because you see a YouTuber talking about it. Always do your own independent research before investing in any coin.
love stay safe everyone

Something crazy is obviously going to happen with the economy whether it’s provoked by a Cyber attack or whatever the way the UN UNICEF world food program has set up all of their stuff for humanitarian Aid is the world coin model, which is scan your eyeball and we give you a digital ID and that tells us whether or not you eat or not.

You know if you want to get your rations you have to go to the wherever the rations are and have your eyeball scanned and if there’s a mistake in the system and it decides you’re not you no food for you and this has happened in India’s digital ID system Adar to like a significant degree and they haven’t fixed it and they don’t do anything about it and they Justified it by saying that like people’s data will be safer and more secure it’s the most easily hackable thing in the world.

There was like a a big big- time like Indian CEO guy that was like I’m publicly gonna like put up my ad horror ID number and like look how safe it is and it was like hacked in like 10 minutes and people like trolled the crud out of him you know I mean it’s a joke um but they need to manufacture consent for all of this stuff and the way they’re going to do that as fear and panic there’s obviously going to be some
sort of National Security crisis.

They have to create to bring in that fear and panic but they’re creating the base issues on purpose I mean it’s an intentional decision to have the Border in that state and it’s not just happening in the US it’s like a broader thing just like digital ID.

It is like a global thing today we’re diving deep into the insights of Whitney web discussing the intricate dance of Economics technology and control in our modern era as we stand on the precipice of a year filled with uncertainties web warns of potential economic turmoil possibly provoked by cyber attacks or other crises the introduction of a world coin model for humanitarian Aid mandating biometric IDs for food rations is a stark reminder of the digital ID systems flaws as seen in India’s odar program.

This system not only compromises data security but also threatens personal freedom highlighting the global push for digital IDs and programmable money under the guise of security and convenience.

Remember if you find this content insightful don’t forget to hit the like button subscribe to our Channel and ring the bell for notifications on our latest uploads let’s prepare to navigate through these turbulent Waters together.

Talking about the geopolitical stuff you know the Divide here of you know bricks versus the West specifically like us UK Israel Europe the EU um they all agree on digital ID so like yeah there’s this geopolitical tension stuff at one level but go another level up they all agree about some sort of surveill programmable money maybe in the US it’s synthetic dbd.

cbdcs in China and the bricks countries it’s direct issue cbdc they all agree about digital IDs that are biometric they all agree on agenda 2030 and the sustainable development goals yeah and what’s interesting about that well to take it back to the article in fluent Finance the United Arab Emirates what are they setting up financially what is fluent Finance after Farmington gets shut down specifically doing in the United Arab Emirates they’re the connective tissue between the cbdcs direct issue cbdcs of brics land and the synthetic cbdcs of the West and the deposit tokens that’s what they’re setting up that’s what Finance is doing.

In the UAE right now uh with R3 that’s partnered with the dtcc for the Securities stuff and doing the Central Bank digital currency for the UAE uh and a host of other countries that are interoperable with a lot of other ones.

Specifically being overseen by the bis these mcbd projects for like multi-b cbdc projects about interoperability uh the goal is to have you know Corda the R3 DLT right have that as much run on that as possible but what doesn’t run on that will be interoperable with that so interoperability is like a key thing to watch out for and a lot of these companies like like fluent Finance for example are developing this stuff and like no one has noticed which I I think is kind of interesting like a lot of people that are so focused on cbdcs and they’re a threat to human freedom and all of this are just pointing the finger at like bricks and not paying attention to any of these other countries really.

They’re just like bis bad but like yeah um you know Wall Street has plans for this too and like they’re not good either like Jamie Diamond and Jerome pal are not coming to the rescue guys they’re creating the same system under a different name Jamie Diamond programming my dollars to expire.

Tying it to my carbon credits or whatever is not any better than Jerome Powell or uh I don’t know Janet Yellen doing it I mean it’s all the same garbage.

You know what I think is interesting too to take this back to FTX too you know in light of their team up with fluent finance and what fluent Finance has gone on to do I really am curious and I I don’t really know if there’s any way to know now but you know all those donations and cozying up to like you know Elizabeth Warren and all these other like lawmakers by FTX Executives or Ryan Salam cozying up with the Republicans and stuff like was this to uh have them favor the stable coin.

FTX was going to team up with which she seems to have been fluent finances us plus like to favor them as like you know the stable coin issuer of choice for the synthetic cbdc pretty interesting uh possibility there because a lot of it thought it was just like oh crypto reg you know regulation to favor FTX and S SPF and stuff.

But I think there’s a lot of bigger plays that have been going on here for some time and I think people
ignoring these kind of actors we’re doing ourselves a disservice. If you look at the people who created fluent Finance the main guy Bradley Algood used to work for like NATO and like Military Intelligence stuff and then immediately starts making special economic zones out of a building on this Indian reservation in South Carolina.

To like replace Delaware as a place where like companies register to like get tax advantages and stuff and that I mean and then goes on to team up with uh this guy Oliver Gail who is a failed reggae artist uh who claim s to be the in inventor of cbdcs and the other guy was with him in that first cbdc project in Barbados so the inventors of cbdc team up with like NATO spook guy uh to create the S SPF stable coin that’s what was going on before FTX uh collapsed and so yeah maybe SBF is like out of the picture and whatever but this isn’t going away like fluent Finance okay.

Yeah we can’t do the thing with Moonstone and with chalpin and Deltech and FTX but we can do it with R3 which was partnered with you know fluent Finance like pretty much from the very beginning because R3 started off as a Consortium of like some of the biggest banks in the world and their backers are still the biggest banks in the world and there’s a lot of overlap between how fluent Finance started and those same banks that back R3 specifically City Bank uh HSBC and Barclays which uh if you know the history of any of those Banks not good and then you have Bradley all good this the fluent Finance guy like publishing op-eds and and coin Telegraph and stuff being like cbdcs would be great if they put Wall Street in charge.

Literally what it says I mean it’s just they’re telling you but no one’s paying attention because they’re
like oh well look these fed chairs are saying we’re not going to do a digital dollar and that means freedom wins in the good old USA.

No what happens in the USA is is that uh Wall Street steals from everyone and funnels the money to the oligarch class and leaves everyone dirt poor that’s what they’re going to do as we delve deeper into the narrative the geopolitical chessboard reveals its pieces with major Global Powers seemingly divided yet United in their agenda for digital IDs and programmable money despite superficial tensions there is a unanimous push towards a digital surveilled economy underpinned by cbdcs and biometric IDs this convergence on digital control mechanisms transcends borders aligning closely with agenda 2030 and sustainable development goals.

The intricate web of financial technology as seen through initiatives like fluent Finance in the UAE serves as
a bridge between different models of cbdcs ensuring interoperability and control at a global scale however this
digital convergence is not without its critics as many fear the loss of freedom and privacy in the face of omnipresent surveillance and control it’s crucial to remain Vigilant and informed about these developments as the implications for personal freedom and Global sovereignty are profound.

I think tether’s recent overtures to like you know onboarding the Secret Service and the FBI and all
of this stuff freezing all of these Wallets on behalf of the US government this is them trying to Curry favor so they don’t get totally nuked by regulations and they can be like a de facto synthetic cbdc and I’m sure usdc is looking to do the same you know and that’s why I I mentioned earlier like what were these SP SPF political donations potentially really about to be like who you know.

The people that develop the regulations and and enforce them are going to be the king makers of like which stable coins are the de facto cbdc or cbdcs right and uh you know I think that’s something to to look for here I mean which one is it going to be I mean like like um Mark brought up in talking to the the paxos guy saying like he didn’t think like tether and usdc was going to make it past regulation like obviously in my opinion and that’s what s SPF and chalow pine thought because you know F FTX Deltech very tied up with tether for a very long time like very connected so why are they moving from one one dollar Peg stable coin to another well the big difference between tether and US plus is that us plus like overemphasizes regulation and cbdc compatibility and trust and reserves and all of this stuff.

It’s a trusted tether it’s a trustworthy tether right I mean I wouldn’t really say it’s actually trustworthy because it’s working with the same Shady people right so I mean uh but but they want that public perception
to be there and obviously I think the Gambit was to sell that to regulators and be like look this city group backed uh us plus stable coin and whatever uh is compliant and combatible with CBD.

It can be used for trade crossb Finance all over the world and look R3 in the UAE and they’re going to be the bridge between bricks and the Western countries and all this stuff.

I mean I’m sure those conversations have been had behind closed doors you know and then one thing
I think we didn’t mention really quick on why it’s GNA the digital dollar is going to be this and not like a direct issue cbdc like if the if the Fed was going to do a direct issue cbdc they’re really behind like that would take them multiple years to roll out and they need this stuff a lot sooner yeah so as uh CIA Spooks literal CIA veterans focused on this kind of stuff have said in publication in from think tanks like csis is like we have to use the digital dollars that are already here we can’t make a cbdc and what does that mean it means like they’re close to structural insolvency and systemic collapse yeah exactly exactly in the shadow of these advancements the maneuvers of cryptocurrency giants like tether and the political minations of figures like SPF hint at a broader strategy to align closely with regulatory expectations.

Potentially shaping the future of digital currency in the west the push for a synthetic cbdc facilitated by
compliant stable coins underscores a strategic move to integrate digital currencies into the Global Financial system seamlessly however this transition raises significant concerns about trust PR pracy and the concentration of power in the hands of a few as we stand at the crossroads of a digital Revolution.

It’s imperative to critically examine the motives and implications of these developments the future of digital currency and identity May well Define The Contours of Freedom privacy and control in the 21st century.

thank you for joining us on this exploratory Journey Through The Complex landscape of digital economy and control for more insights and analyses make sure to subscribe to unscripted crypto and
stay ahead of the Curve

The final push Push for global collapse.

Kundalini & health?

Introduction: Why

By Jerry Alatalo.
Never before in the entire long history of significant global health crises has there been such an irrational, inexplicable, ultimately vicious effort to prevent the perspectives of highly-qualified, highly-respected veteran doctors, experts, and nurses from reaching the wide public….In the past all sincere assistance actions/efforts were warmly welcomed as part of the process leading to the best-chance scientific means for resolving the health crisis of the time..

In an unprecedented manner all previous accepted scientific norms for dealing with a global health crisis were rudely thrown out the window during the past two and one half years, leading to increasing significant, legitimately-understandable suspicion and peaceful protests by millions upon millions across every region on Earth, – leading to similarly inexplicable harsh responses from governments seemingly intent of establishing totalitarian conditions in their respective nations.

Why the extraordinary nearly never-before-witnessed coercive measures?.. Why are so many circumstances which have manifested across the long past two and one half years on Earth unprecedented?

Producing good/accurate answers to those questions might offer the most moral and forthright means to establishing a starting point on the path to – as expeditiously as humanly possible, considering evermore people are dying and becoming greatly harmed with each passing day – ending the ongoing painful worldwide nightmare…

We have the knowledge, ability, technical devices, what is going on?

By Kelly-Marie Kerr. ( Please click on the link for her video/pictures.) The video is from 2022.

Kundalini Energy Sacred Secretion INFO 2022 | SUPER CONSCIOUSNESS: THE BIOCHEMISTRY of Inner Alchemy (youtube.com)

A video to highlight the inner biochemical process or alchemy of enlightenment. Also know over the centuries and throughout different cultures as Kundalini Activation, Merkabah Ascension, the Great Regeneration, the 3-Fold Enlightenment etc.

The Power of Thought – Perception; the great regeneration starts with thought the moment you change your perception is the moment you rewrite the chemistry of body imprints/thought vibrations are carried through our bodies by the lymphatic water system and our cells adjust accordingly.

Sacred Secretion and Lymphatic System, therefore our lymphatic water systems are key in the great regeneration in other words the lymphatic system creates the physical outcomes of our
conscious and subconscious thoughts again this is because thoughts emotions and memories of vibrations that leave imprints in our lymph water water is the mirror that has the ability to show us what we cannot see. It is the blueprint for our reality which can change with a single positive thought all it takes is faith if you are open to it.
It is a fact that every seed begins its life exclusively in water including all body stem cells and DNA.

Stem cells are the beginning of the physical body and water should be considered as the medium for life stem cells are another key to the great regeneration the potential of stem cells is fascinating they have the ability to self-renew and become any cell in the body.
The sign of the egg represents potentiality the seed of generation stem cell The Mystery of Life introduction historical literature tells us that the great regeneration begins with the Union of the solar and lunar germs in a purified body the evoking of man’s solar energy can cleanse us from all these diseases for its fire penetrates every element in our body and keeps the blood pure we are inwardly divided individuals in divided jewels.
The union of the lunar and solar germs is the overcoming of this inner division or enmity carnal mind versus Christ mind black Kundalini versus white Kundalini
Lunar Body and Solar Body
Autonomic versus voluntary
Ttherefore I say such a person once integrated will become full of light such a person once divided will be full of Darkness.
In the average human being the dual power is not operating in harmony but once these two currents balance the regenerated being will manifest or we could say that Jesus Will resurrect the man who is reborn in US is of water and the spirit.
Our own regenerate self the Christ Jesus and Son of Man the Bible puts it like this except a man be born of water and of spirit he cannot enter into the kingdom of God.
Okay that’s the historical symbolic synopsis now let’s see the modern scientific parallel the esoteric lunar and solar bodies correspond with the lymphatic water and respiratory breath systems.
Water is H2O two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen atom spirit is air approximately 78 nitrogen 20 oxygen so the solar Spirit body is mostly nitrogen and some oxygen when nitrogen and oxygen combine in the body nitric oxide forms later we’ll see the incredible role of nitric oxide in the great regeneration.
The philosophical elements of water air fire and Earth are now represented by periodic elements the building blocks of known life the water element of the ancient philosophers is the hydrogen of modern science the air has become oxygen the fire nitrogen the Earth carbon.
These key elements make up the mass majority of our wonderfully made human bodies Masons and other hidden groups have always known the importance of scientific elements and revered them in their art and teachings for example the famous Masonic number 153 signifies hydrogen which is atomic number one and has the atomic radius 53. 66 signifies carbon 12. which has six neutrons six protons and six electrons.


Masons and Other Secret Groups
Carbon is the alchemical coal of the ancient Masters and the Earth of material form carbon dioxide was alchemically known as fixed or stale air which is interesting when you consider that breath exercises meditations and yoga all aim to expel excess carbon dioxide which is a poison in the body with its seven protons seven neutrons and seven electrons 777 nitrogen was of course referred to as fire a key philosophical secret was that phosphorus is the fifth element and light of the body phosphorus is part of the nitrogen family alchemically phosphorus is considered light and nitrogen is considered fire.
Here is the most important fact about nitrogen and phosphorus to bear in mind as we continue all of the mineral cell salts in the body are formed by the precipitation of nitrogen the fire of life and phosphorus the light of life the mineral body is the alchemist’s inner salt body the solar light or sun body.
Our bodies are formed from Photon light electromagnetic energy .
Photon light combines to form electrons electrons create atoms atoms create molecules cell salts molecules create cells, cells create tissues tissues create organs organs organize into systems and systems organized to create the body the great regeneration will now be defined in this organ to organ overview, with some critical pit stops along the way.

Light and electrons Photon light is electromagnetic energy.
Good is often described as light God is light in him there is no Darkness at all therefore we could say God is electromagnetism.
Light predominantly enters the body via the nose mouth eyes and fontanels.
Photon light is an intelligence an ultimate unit inseparable and indivisible God.

In the body Photon light is absorbed or transformed into electrons predominantly in the form of nitrogen and phosphorus formers of mineral cell salts.

The circulation and transformation of electromagnetic energy in biological systems is the foundation of life on Earth in The Invisible unmanifest realm the sacred geometry of photons reveals the seed and Flower of Life.

Every element is built up out of one invariable unit the electron and we must therefore assert that mind is potential in the unit of matter the electron itself an electron is the lightest stable subatomic particle.

Known the fundamental unit of electricity is the negative charge of the electron the Nobel Prize Laureate svent giorgi famously said all life depends on a small trickle of electrons from the Sun.
The sun has been personified many times over the course of history some examples Brahma Krishna the ancient Hindus called the sun Chris our moon Abram Adonis Adonai Lord mithrath Zeus ayesus Jesus.

Samuel on war says that the serpentine fire kundalini dwells in electrons and electrons are the philosophers and Alchemists gold the word gold comes from the word or or or a product of the sun’s Rays or Breath of Life electrons are golden electrons are a product of the sun’s rays Photon light electrons are present in air or breath and everywhere else.

If you think about it electrons are the fundamental unit of power or electricity the receptacle of gold is the pineal gland receiver and transmitter of golden solar energy cells in the pineal gland detect electromagnetic energy and send it throughout the nervous system by phototransduction.

Christian Unity teacher Charles Fillmore also highlighted the power of electrons.

Electrons and Life Force Energy.

Through thought energy or the dynamic power of Mind man can release the life of the electrons secreted in the atoms that compose the cells of his body.
You weren’t born to die you were born to harness your full Atomic capabilities this statement really sums up what the great regeneration is all about the power stored in the millions of cells that compose the human body is infinite and accessing it is the key now.
That we have a good understanding of the light and the way it combines to form electrons and subsequently atoms
such as hydrogen carbon nitrogen oxygen and phosphorus which in turn make molecules or mineral salts we can move on to discover the Journey of light through the body.

Following the light sacred secretion through the body in the great regeneration light comes through the door of Brahma fontanels and is received by the claustrum a blood cerebrospinal fluid barrier CSF.

One fontanelle the door of Brahma the fontanelle in the skull is also known as the little fountain or the
opening of Brahman in early Christian mysticism this opening was known as Thora aesis the door of aesis Jesus.

Physiologically it is a small opening on top of the skull claustrum Santa Claus
neurons inside the claustrum branch out and extend around the entire circumference of the brain much like a crown of thorns a group of researchers from George Washington University found that the claustrum can act like an on off switch for consciousness.

In Latin the claustrum is known as claustrum hamatolicarosum claustra means barrier Hema means blood and liquor means spirit therefore claustrum hematolicarosum means blood to Spirit barrier which is exactly true since the claustrum is a barrier between blood and the Claustrum – Consciousness.

Cerebral spinal fluid CSF is a filtrate of blood.

Dr Kerry says it is from the claustrum that the wonderful Christ oil is formed in plain modern terms the light acting on the substances of the brain forms cerebrospinal fluid or Christ oil.

Three breast spinal fluid CSF is a filtrate of blood.

In fact there is a Perpetual exchange occurring between blood CSF nerve or interstitial fluid sexual vital fluids and lymph at the claustrum blood CSF barrier the body turns water into wine every second water symbolizes blood and wine symbolizes CSF

Spiritualized substance CSF has a significant charge.
It is saline salty with minerals and alkaline meaning electron rich CSF is secretly known as the blood of the Lamb, the ventricles are even shaped like ram horns hence the esoteric affiliation Christ Oil – Spinal Fluid
with Aries CSF is the most electrically conductive fluid in the body the breath charges CSF
the great regeneration relies on the charging and transmuting of this subtle fluid the Kundalini utilizes that which is termed spinal fluid it actually ionizes CSF and changes its molecular structure and consequently the basic DNA structure of the entire body.

Dr zapatera says CSF acts like a storage field and conveyor for light Energies, so far we’ve seen that light precipitates into CSF at the claustrum so what happens next CSF is differentiated into two distinct
potencies by the pituitary and pineal endocrine glands.

Pituitary and Pineal Secretions

These potencies are known as the black Kundalini pituitary and white Kundalini pineal or lunar fluid and solar fire mineral respectively the cerebellum controls endocrine function via the autonomic nervous system and the breath via the vagus nerve. Supplies the power to run the entire system both the sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous systems are part of the autonomic nervous system throughout the body parasympathetic fibers meet with sympathetic fibers to form nerve plexuses chakras so the balance between these two systems improves chakra health.
Remember the Divine conception great regeneration stands for the union of the lunar and solar germs in a purified
virgin body so let’s take a look at the two potencies formed by the lunar pituitary and solar pineal.

Pituitary gland the lunar potency

The pituitary is biblically symbolized by Mary the mother of the holy child she produces the lunar seed also known as the oil or water of life, the soul or fluid body the silver on milk but what exactly is the lunar germ let’s find out in thinking and Destiny.

Harold Percival says a lunar germ is made of matter of the four worlds the light world life, world form world and physical world this cryptic quote is Percival describing protoplasm in a symbolic language thankfully the secret teachings of all Pituitary – Lunar Seed, Water of Life, Soul ages.

Manly P hall gives it to us a little more plainly it is made of carbon hydrogen oxygen and nitrogen
its name is protoplasm it is the structural unit with which all living bodies cells start life.

The lunar germ moves with the lunar month 13 Moon cycles per 12 months solar year it corresponds with the fluidic water body which renews itself monthly.
Summary the lunar germ is protoplasm now known as cytoplasm esoterically known as Soma.

Next,now we can move on to the second potency 3.2

Pineal gland the solar potency

The pineal is biblically symbolized by Joseph the father of the holy Child which produces the solar seed also known as the fire of life, the spirit or fire body gold or honey but what exactly is the solo germ let’s find out:

The electronic solar matter is the sacred fire of Kundalini.
When we free this energy we enter the path of authentic initiation.
Same alarm War this quote from the perfect matrimony is really useful since the same author also tells us in Practical Magic that the fire of Kundalini is nitrogen nitrogen has seven electrons.

Dr Kerry also refers to the solar germ as electrons and we already know that electrons combine to form atoms such as nitrogen and phosphorus which are both formers of mineral cell salts.

The solar germ corresponds with the fiery electric mineral body which renews itself yearly with the Sun summary the solar germ is electrons predominantly taking form as nitrogen and phosphorus atoms which subsequently Forge molecules or minerals also known as cell salts the creators of cells.

Quick recap light enters through the fontanelle.
.Fontanel – Door of Brahma or Jesus contacts the claustrum and precipitates into CSF it is then differentiated into two streams by the pituitary and pineal the two potencies are the lunar germ protoplasm pituitary stream and the solar germ electron mineral pineal stream so what happens next well Kerry says the potencies then flow down into the red nucleus and consequently the olivery bodies into the descending tract known as the rubrospinal tract to the lateral column of the spinal cord.

So let’s take a brief look at these body parts.
Four red nucleus Red Lotus of Shakti the red nuclei monitor the function of the cerebellum there are two red nuclei one on either side of the spinal cord and their output Pathways cross over underneath them this is the crossing of the Eda and pingala nadis the Eda ampingala nadis are the left and right sides of the autonomic nervous system including sympathetic and parasympathetic nerve fibers the pineal and pituitary body secrete the positive and negative substance along nerves that cross in the medulla the cross formed by Eda and pingala is actually part of a double cross which forms the site of the crucifixion as we will see later

Five or Livery bodies Gethsemane the Olive Garden

Dr Kerry refers to the olivery bodies as the lower part of the pineal the olivery bodies are biblically symbolized by Geth ceremony the Olive Garden the olives are a collection of brain stem nuclei which function as a relay station between the spine and cerebellum six the lateral column of the spinal cord the spine consists of 33 vertebrae each symbolizing one of the years that Jesus Christ lived for after traveling through the red nucleus a livery bodies and Crossing sides in the rubric spinal tract the two potencies come to the lateral Columns of the spinal cord and subsequently continue through the autonomic nervous system.

Summary at the rubric spinal cross the pituitary potency crosses from the left into the right side of the autonomic nervous system and the pineal potency crosses from the right into the left side this coincides with Harold percival’s description in thinking and Destiny.

From the pituitary the lunar germ descends through the nerve plexuses on the right side of the autonomic nervous system along the digestive tract we’ll visit the semilunar ganglion next as that’s the path the potencies take to reach the solar plexus 7.

The semilunar ganglion the Sea of Galilee

The two nadis Eda and pingala converge into the body through the semi-lunar ganglion where they merge into the solar plexus. Kerry links the semilunar ganglion to genesaurus which the metaphysical dictionary claims to be the Sea of Divine Life and the garden of riches the semi-lunar ganglion is two sympathetic ganglions one on each side of the solar plexus comprised of several smaller ganglions which surround the solar plexus.

It is entwined with the vagus nerve together the solar plexus and semilunar are known as the Grand Center of all the ganglions and plexuses of organic life having passed through the semilunar ganglion the two potencies arrive in the solar plexus which we will now take a look at.

 
Every 29.5 days a seed is born in or out of the solar plexus the oil unites with the mineral salts.
A Seed is Born in the Solar Plexus (Manger)and thus produces the monthly seed which goes into the vagus in other words three streams unite in the solar plexus to form the monthly seed one the pineal stream to the pituitary stream and three the breath remember nitrogen and oxygen which travels in the Vegas but what is this seed that Kerry and other Mystics speak so highly of; well in the spleen we find the actual scientific parallel so let's head over there.

Next nine the spleen, the manger birthplace of the Jesus seed, foreign is part of the lymphatic water system.
Lymph waters are high in sodium as our CSF and blood the spleen is considered the sodium organ sodium and other mineral cell salts passing in and out of cells create the body’s electricity.

Not only does this electrical system run the body but it is actually the subtle substance with which thinking is done in other words the popular manifestation.

Mantra thoughts are things is completely true thoughts have formed mineral or mind cell salt form so the imprints made by thought in the waters of the body are of sodium and other mineral cell salt essences thought is literally creating the body with every breath now here’s the moment you’ve been waiting for a full disclosure of the seed that is

Spleen and the “Jesus Seed”

formed by the lunar and solar potencies

This spleen contains the all-important germinal center symbolically known as the manger this is the precise place where Jesus is born.

Jesus is a germ of life G.W Carey

Spleen mysteriously creates cells it does this by enclosing a minute body from the cerebrum within a case Moses basket thus within the spleen is formed the true physiological seed cells of the body.

German or centers are sites of multi-potent stem cell and white blood cell production Hilton hotema tells us that in their infancy the multipotent stem cells produced in the lymphatic spleen are no different to procreative sexual stem cells up to that moment the life and conduct of the male and female gametes infant sperm and open cells.
Present nothing different from that of the lymph cells the lymphatic system including the spleen transports lymph
a fluid containing white blood cells throughout the body.

According to Dr Kerry the great regeneration invigorates white blood cell presence and production thus improving the Vitality of the body along all lines.

The process of regeneration causes the white cells of the blood to overcome the prevalence of red cells therefore the flesh becomes transparent and he manifests more and more of the father he is no longer man but has become a god.

Multi-potent stem cells are infant cells which have the ability to become many types of bodily cells they are formed by the union of the lunar and solar potencies from the pituitary and the pineal.

Anna Kingsford describes this process beautifully on page 144 of the perfect way in her bosom protoplasmic lunar body is conceived the bright and Holy Light the nucleoli the nucleoli of stem cells are the solar pineal potency which are rich in yes you guessed it nitrogen and phosphorus.

Nitrogen and phosphorus in stem cell nucleoli.
Anna Kingsford goes further to say that solar nucleoli are in fact the Philosopher’s White Stone the white stone has always been the object of special veneration it is the well-known symbol of the Divine spirit the nucleoli of the cell the sun of the system the head of the pyramid in summary the solar germ electric
pineal potency unites with the lunar germ protoplasm pituitary potency and the breath supplied by the vagus to form stem cells.

Jesus Professor hotema explains this process most poetically the spirit of fiery nucleus of noetic
intelligence is plunged into the fluidic habitat of a body of watery flesh.
On page 21 of The Facts of nutrition Professor Hilton hotema says the protoplasm of the cell surrounding the nucleus is the negative lunar alkaline element the nucleus is the positive solar acid element this makes the cell a bipolar mechanism and the acid Alkali balance is imperative for life.

He is telling us that every cell is bipolar or lunisola in short the nucleus of stem cells contains nucleoli and DNA solar and the cell body contains protoplasm Luna the DNA chromosomes in the nucleus are tiny radio antenna they pick up and receive solar rays and convert them into electric currents in accordance with the law of animation.

The production of the physiological stem cells of the body are what the Masters once referred to as Jesus being born in Bethlehem. Tthe solar plexus which innervates the spleen the germs of Life take on human form as they enter the stomach and spleen then at the second stage these human cells are taken down.

Fall by Saturn into hell meaning that in the organs of procreation they are conjoined with animal germs or
procreative goat germs so the seed then descends to the procreative organs hell via T12 as we shall now see thoracic vertebrae 12 T12 gilgal

T12 is the place where the solar plexus meets the spinal cord via the semilunar ganglion it is also the point where the spinal cord tapers off into Sodom and Gomorrah.

At this Junction the higher forces raise a portion of the seed up the spinal cord by what Percival calls automatic reclamation and the lower forces pull the seed down to the fish gate which leads to the genitals where there’s an opportunity for voluntary reclamation.

Biblically this location is known as gilgal a very significant place gilgal is the place where Elisha neutralized poison, gilgal is also the place where Elijah was taken up in a chariot of Fire.

Gil gal a circle or rolling away the place where the Twelve Stones were set up refers to in anatomy to the 12th thoracic vertebra at which place the semi-lunar ganglion connects at this point the seed or Ark enters Jordan or the spinal cord.

T12 marks the center of the human organism the metaphysical dictionary tells us that Gil gal means whirlwind the Whirlwind is the DNA double helix which is formed by the sacred geometry of the ratcheting dodecahedron.

In The pre-existent Invisible Realm this is why the dodecahedron is DNA Activation – Dodecahedron considered the Ascension vehicle DNA is the master of transformation as proven by epigenetics our thoughts can rewrite our genetic DNA codes the DNA double helix looks like two entwined sir hence winding up as the dodecahedron turns each side of the dodecahedral structure is a pentagon.

The formation of DNA is often described as a spiral staircase or ladder the vertical sides of the DNA ladder are essentially phosphorus the horizontal rungs of the DNA ladder are essentially nitrogen.

We’ll learn more about nitrogen and phosphorus and their role in the great regeneration later for now it will suffice to say that both are integral to DNA and stem cell production not to mention DNA resides in the nucleus of every stem cell along with the nucleoli since DNA is the very Fabric or programmed for life.

It’s as though the ancient Masters believed that our bodies are animated from this Central Point T12

Let’s take a pit stop to look at some facts about DNA

Under a microscope the cross section of DNA reveals the seed of life in the Book of Revelation chapter 19 13-14 God is described as being clothed in a fabric dipped in blood fabric symbolizes DNA chromosomes so in other words scripture is telling us that God or light is in DNA which is present in every cell of the body thus the life of the flesh DNA truly is in the blood Leviticus 17 11.

The cells of all living beings shine their light electromagnetic energy and DNA is the source of this light when the photon light radiated from DNA is absorbed by the body it forms nitric oxide.

DNA is the molecule of life the genetic information of all species is being encoded by the nitrogen bases
in DNA this is the universal language of four letters c t a g every cell in the world contains DNA and every cell is filled with salt water. In many cultures it is a spiritual belief that salty ocean water is the
essence of all life the concentration of salt minerals inside cells is similar to that of the worldwide ocean.

DNA is literally bathed in seawater which plays an important part in establishing DNA’s double helix structure

DNA’s Twisted ladder shape is a direct consequence of the cell’s watery environment DNA goes together with water just like mythical serpents do before we get back to the organ by organ account. We must consider the magic of water, water emits Photon light and there’s an electromagnetic dipole meaning that it’s both positively charged and negatively charged so the lymphatic water system is electromagnetic.

It is our light energy body the lymph system is called the white blood system in many cultures the lymph system is the Gateway for communication between blood CSF nerve or interstitial fluid sexual vital fluids and lymph fluid the lymph system is the oxygen delivery and purification system at the cellular level.

Your LIGHT BODY!

Everything in the body is made of cells all generation and degeneration of the body happens at the cellular level the lymphatic system maintains the health of the entire cellular Terrain its movement is upwards towards the neck against the force of gravity our bodies are 72 percent water and the lymphatic system is the most extensive system in our body.
When the lymph system is compromised there will be a change in the body’s pH, pH stands for potential hydrogen which basically refers to the number of electrons available as stated earlier literally everything that we think feel and are exposed to creates imprints on our lymph water body.

The laws of the universe are written in water the golden ratio is found in molecules of melt water in melt water the angle between hydrogen atoms is 108 degrees and the ratio of the length of hydrogen ties is 0.618.
This is a special state of water in melting from its frozen state water deletes all information from its memory retaining only one program the program for life everything in Nature’s Perfection has been created in accordance with the program for life the golden ratio remember many cultures believe that water is the essence of all life.

Even the Bible Book of Genesis insinuates that water is pre-existent the Creator transmitted the program of life to every living creature through water this is why the lymphatic system and our body’s pH level acid to alkaline is so important acid is devoid of free electrons.

Alkali is full of electrons so our body should be slightly alkaline, electrons are teeny tiny magnets holding the cells of the body together maintaining life and slowing degeneration. Having highlighted the power of water as literally the Catalyst for life and health we can get back to the organ by organ account.

Intestine the alchemist’s alembic
The alchemist’s alembic bottle is the vas hermetic hermetic vase fashioned after the lower intestine of the body.
The stomach and small intestines are the vessels in which the sustaining minerals of Life are prepared these support the birth of the Jesus seed or stem cell which occurs in the spleen. Without digestion the great generation is physically impossible, digestion serves many bodily functions it renovates blood
it renovates all of the organs of the body renovates the nerves and the Brain, it stimulates the activity of nitric oxide and most importantly it sets the vital mineral cell salts contained in food free creating a mineral base for the body.

The mineral base is carried into circulation throughout the rest of the body via absorption into the blood and lymph at the small intestines

The Alchemists Alembic – Sacred Secretion

One constituent of the mineral base produced in the gut is serotonin a precursor to DMT and the biochemicals of enlightenment speaking on digestion Dr Kerry warns that the seed can be ruined by alcoholic drinks or gluttony that cause ferment acid and even alcohol in the intestinal tract thus no drunkard can inherit the Kingdom of Heaven.
Historically the essence produced by digestion in the small intestine was known as first Mata AKA lack of a Genus virgins milk or Prima material it is described as an oily water or fatty lymph and IT Supplies the blood with the energy derived from food which is mainly hydrogen first matter is comprised of the common elements carbon hydrogen nitrogen oxygen and phosphorus all the constituents of DNA.

DNA is rich in phosphorus Master Alchemists recognized phosphorus as The Fifth Element a sort of philosophical Secret since phosphorus absorbs light and even glows with it it is the agent of spiritual light in the body phosphorus is part of the nitrogen family alchemically phosphorus is considered to be light and nitrogen is considered to be fire.

In the pre-existent man Professor hotema explains that nitrogen fire and phosphorus liked produce life which is true in the sense that they are the formers of mineral salts and are fundamental parts of water-borne DNA.

DNA is quite literally the Quint essence of life Quint means five so DNA is the five Essence comprised of
the five fundamental elements Earth.

Water air fire spirit, spirit the small intestine plays a role in phosphorus absorption so now would be a good time to shed a little more light on phosphorus which was renamed Lucifer in the Latin Bible.

Phosphorus and carbon the sides of the DNA ladder.

The moral of this Gospel of the flesh is to produce plenty of phosphorus by means of good eating and drinking those who say let us eat and drink for tomorrow we die I diametrically opposed to the holy scriptures the biological in the body form of phosphorus is called phosphate which basically consists of phosphorus and oxygen phosphates improve nerve function and nutrition.

Are active in creating the bone matrix and are a necessary for sexual function and reproduction phosphates are vital for energy production and storage as well as producing DNA and RNA phosphates have a critical function in stem cell development proliferation and differentiation.

When the body’s pH becomes too acidic phosphorus availability decreases phosphates produce deoxyribose the sugar phosphate backbone of DNA. Ddeoxyribose is a pent oath sugar meaning a five carbon sugar.
The five carbon sugar with a pentagon structure forms the vertical sides of the DNA ladder looking more closely at the word carbon affords us the opportunity to make some interesting links for example Dr Kerry calls the seed Osiris in his car and Strong’s Concordance cites car as being from the origin Kara meaning whirling dancing or helix, Kara is a derivative of car yo meaning nucleus or seed and funnily enough karyotin or coyotein means the same as chromatin which is just DNA and protein in the cell nucleus.

We will now return to the organ to organ analysis where the seed has now reached the procreative organs.

Procreative organs


Sodom and Gomorrah the lunar germ takes one week to reach procreative Organs – Sodom and Gomorrah the solar plexus and keeps descending after the second week the lunar germ reaches its lowest point in the large intestine where it crosses over to the left side via the coccygeal plexus in front of the coccyx.

In Strong’s Concordance Sodom and sidom are referred to as places of the sea salt mineral reservoirs the early Jews called the sacral and coccygeal plexuses the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah

The sacral and coccygeal root plexuses innervate the procreative organs the organs of this lower region work together to process one the procreative seed sperm or ovum and two the procreative sexual vital fluid therefore this section includes a the gonads which process procreational seeds and be the prostate which processes seminal fluid.
The semen is excreted by the prostate as stated and the zoa by the gonads the life essence of the body.
These two the seeds and the fluids don’t combine unless ejaculation occurs, if not wasted these Essences are reabsorbed by the body and become what Percival calls the soil in the spleen, the materials available for stem cell production.

The seed portion sperm in males and ovum in females are constituents of semen spermatogonia are the infant form of sperm and ovum are the female equivalent simply stated they are stem cells in their infant form they are still able to differentiate into a variety of different cell types if preserved the sperm degenerate and their molecules are reabsorbed into the body.

This is the true 10 tithe the Animal Man actually robs his body of its cells one tenth to be exact
informing the germs of procreation this is a fact which science will one day admit since the procreative seed is rich in electricity specifically nitrogen and phosphorus mineral cell salts and nutrients saving.
It improves the quality and volume of the soil in the spleen this is what’s known as the offering up of animals procreative germs the soil in the spleen is enriched by the reabsorbed procreative seed the cells produced there will be remarkable.

Thus we have the Regeneration of the body occurring under Divine Law an interesting constituent of procreative Essences is spermine crystals.
Spermine crystals are a nerve stimulant that facilitate cellular regeneration and support helical structure of DNA RNA.
Gnostics refer to the procreational seed which becomes the Furnishing product in the spleen as the salt of alchemy because all 12 cell salts exist within it. Samuel on war warns us not to spill it but to transform it because Mastery is represented in the but to transform it because Mastery is represented in the salt of the earth which is in our sexual secretions the fluid portion the prostate is known as the skene’s gland.

In women ejaculatory tubes into these glands the fluid portion of sexual substance is alkaline in reaction
rich in calcium phosphorus nitrogen lesser thin albumin nuclei proteins iron and vitamin E.

It is remarkably similar to the fluids of the nervous system theoretically life force and vital fluids are the same thing existing in different states. After seminal fluid is broken down in the prostate gland and assuming it is not ejaculated it will make its way back through the capillaries into the blood some experts consider the prostate to be the seat of Kundalini, others consider it to be the coccygeal body as we’ll see later.

Professor hotema states that when the prostate and its oil act properly addictions can be dissolved
the higher the quality and quantity of sexual vital Essences the more vibrant the life force sustaining the body. When scripture talks about separating the sheep from the goats it is highlighting the importance of leading with your head Center Aries and not letting carnal desire stemming from the sacral Center Capricorn or goat Lead You astray.

See as their ventricles are shaped like a sheep or Ram’s Head Aries with its curling horns the procreative organs resemble a goat. In summary the seed descends to the procreative organs where it can be preserved and reabsorbed into the body providing a powerful mineral base for the production of stem cells kidney naphtali during the third week the lunar germ ascends from the coccygeal plexus through the left autonomic nervous system up to the region of the left kidney, the spleen is located on the left side of the body we can assume that this is why Percival specifies the left kidney also in the biology of Kundalini jaina Dixon says tingles are felt especially on the left side of the body.
The tingles and Bubbles are always associated with increased Kundalini flow.

Kidneys – Naphtali – Kundalini Energy

the kidneys are regarded as the body’s most important reservoir of chi life force energy the root word in kidney is kid meaning young goat kids are children the inner child is the inner chai or Chi Photon light precipitating as nitrogen fire and phosphorus light of which there is a noted amount in the kidneys and I won’t tell you the amount of dynamite we could make with all the nitrogen and phosphorus we could extract from a kidney.

The bulk of nitrogen and phosphorus is stored in the kidney organ Energy System which includes the adrenal glands and the testes or ovaries.
The adrenal glands sit like Barrister wigs on top of kidneys judge not lest he be judged the kidneys regulate the body’s acid alkaline pH balance and we already know how important pH balance is toward the great regeneration due to the bipolar acid alkaline loony solar nature of every cell in the body.

Foreign; the word pancreas is composed of the two Roots pan meaning all as in the all pervasive source of creation and creas meaning to form the pancreas is referred to as the bread pan Pantry or paneer Bread Basket.

It is a nerver rated by the solar plexus Bethlehem House of Bread, the pancreas is situated in the stomach behind the navel and secretes insulin. Insulin communicates with the genes and vitalizes DNA gene expression.

Heart Center Jerusalem Jerusalem symbolizes the great nerve center just back of the heart,
it is the Anna harta cardiac plexus.

Heart Centre – anahata – Jerusalem

Formed by nerves from the cervical ganglia the loves and hates of the Mind are precipitated to this ganglionic receptacle of thought and are crystallized there.
This is really important because love stimulates oxytocin release the flow of the pituitary chemical oxytocin is enhanced by feelings of love and pure intention in the heart. Subsequently CSF flow increases and pressurizes so that the pineal can upgrade melatonin this will be explained more thoroughly later.

The endocrine thymus gland is associated with the cardiac plexus

It is situated in the chest and begins to shrink when the genital organs develop The Majestic thymus stalks the body with lymphocytes white blood cells which are integral to the great regeneration as described earlier in the spleen section.

Lymphocytes have the ability to travel freely through the body and are more abundant than any other of the body’s wandering cells, the vibrations of the thymus have the ability to drive health or disease.

What we love and what we hate hear build cells of Joy or of pain in summary feelings of love originating in the thymus cause the pituitary to secrete oxytocin and consequently the pineal can upgrade melatonin the seeds Journey then continues upward from the thymus to the thyroid which is also innervated by cervical ganglia.

Thyroid cervical vertebrae four the baptism.


Jesus was baptized of John in the fluids the Christ substance of the spinal cord. Dr Carey says that the word John is a chemical formula let’s unpack this.

Jesus is said to be 30 years old when John baptizes him, Jesus is 33 years of life symbolize the 33 vertebrae in the human spine therefore we know that Jesus’s 30th year must correspond with the 30th vertebrae Thyroid –

The Baptism by John of the spine this is C4 the fourth cervical vertebrae the top of the thyroid gland is level with C4.
The thyroid uses iodine an electron donor to produce thyroxine a powerful hormone which disinfects all the channels of the autonomic nervous system while we sleep without this biological iodine we would not be able to live.
Thyroxine literally baptizes or purifies the body mind and soul and the letters which spell John previously ion are found in the chemical formula of thyroxine.
In summary the Jesus said is baptized by thyroxine at C4 this leads us to the crucifixion double cross crucifixion.

Three years after his baptism at C4 Jesus is crucified at age 33. Vertebral level 33 is at the medulla near the entrance to the cerebellum where the double cross of crucifixion transmutation is situated.
Golgotha is the base of the human skull where the spinal cord meets the brain at this point occurs a double nerve Crossing made by Eda and pingala and the The Cross –

Crucifixion in the Vagus Nerve.

Vagus nerve the crucifixion can actually be likened to an invigoration of potential raising the Sacred Secretion or Christ Oil to crucify means to add or to increase a thousand fold.
When electric wires are crossed they set on fire all inflammable substances near them when the christed seed crossed the nerve at Golgotha the veil of the temple fell and the generative cells of the body were quickened or regenerated after its crucifixion the seeds constituents enter the cerebellum which is the tomb cerebellum.

The tomb the cerebellum is synonymous with the Masonic Sprague of Acacia and the biblical Place Jericho.
In fact many esoteric symbols correspond with the sacred cerebellum.
Dr Kerry links the cerebellum with Taurus and Venus phosphorus, Venus rules the awakened man Kerry also proposes that the cerebellum is the tomb where Jesus was laid to rest.
James price refers to the cerebellum as the magnetic chemical Center electrons are tiny magnets the cerebellum is the intuitive brain which controls the autonomic functions of the body such as breathing circulation sleeping digestion and swallowing all of the activity of the body muscle tension joint relaxation hearing vision the relationship of every part of the body in time and space sends impulses to the cerebellum.

The cerebellum is like an electrical Loom electrical impulses give the cerebellum a perfect representation of the body’s position in time and space when CSF is sufficiently charged and transmuted the doors to this subconscious brain are flung open and allowing the conscious mind access to its power the cerebellum clearly demonstrates the proper functioning of the intellect as it begins to move into Christ consciousness.

As we become aware of the underlying activity that coordinates balances and harmonizes every action in creation the cerebellum begins to receive this picture then we have available to us the information that represents the total body of creation and we can become co-creators with the primary creator the cerebellum is the part of the brain that receives messages from the nervous system it tells us what we think or feel about certain things.

Eckhart Tolle explains that in the absence of awareness virtually all of your thoughts happen to you instead of Cerebellum – Sprig of Acacia for you meaning that the autonomous system is running Riot and keeping you imprisoned to discordant thought patterns, thus you are not considered a master of your self.

This concept is personified by Judas betraying Jesus, the other brain is the cerebellum a negative organ or switchboard switching the magnetic Aura from the autonomic system to the cerebral and spinal nerves.

Each brain has its nervous system this quote highlights the Dual aspects of the nervous system in summary when the seed is crucified it remains 2.5 days in the cerebellum which essentially switches diffuses or resurrects its energy from autonomic involuntary power to the central aware intelligence and on the third day ascends to the pineal gland that connects the cerebellum with the optic thalamus the central eye in the Throne of God the cerebellum admits the resurrected current through the cerebellar lingula into the fourth ventricle CSF Reservoir where it is distributed to the CSF the pituitary and the pineal optic thalamus the holy eye the two oval masses connected by the Massa intermedia were designated the optic thalami because they were found to be involved with the processing and projections of visual reality

The optic Thalamus is also known as ophthalmos or optimomi the eyes of the Mind thalamus opticus the Latin form of kush Optique.

Optic Thalamus – The Holy Eye

The holy eye the Eye of Providence the eye which sleepeth not the eye which is the subsistence of all things the optic Thalamus meaning light of the chamber is the inner or third eye situated in the center of the head it connects the pineal gland and the pituitary body the optic nerve starts from this single eye Masa intermedia reality projector.

The Masa intermedia is the center of the optic thalamus its surfaces form part of the lateral wall of the third CSF ventricle reality.

Literally projects from the Masa intermedia at the Masa intermedia is the center of the brain’s Taurus field this Center Point is a plane of inertia built by the brain’s resonance our senses simply absorb and filter the
frequencies that we project from the internal to the external back into Consciousness and perceives them as reality.

The frequencies vibrate the cerebral spinal fluid inside the third ventricle giving rise to the shapes and forms of so-called physical life, the entire Spirit experience of life is generated in this way.
So we do indeed write our own life stories and the realization of this causes neurons to light up creating new and Powerful Pathways of thought and possibility in the cerebrum or most high cerebrum most high the cerebrum is symbolized by the biblical character Abraham the cerebrum is the upper brain most high North Pole or Jehovah.

Dr Kerry states that Aries cerebrum and Taurus cerebellum lay down the law on the other parts of the body so the refined Essences refresh the contents of the cerebrum and another cycle immediately begins at the claustra which continues to integrate the light but we can’t conclude the journey without knowing what climaxes occur in the pituitary and pineal pituitary the Moon.

When the spirit fire is lifted up through the 33 segments of the spinal column and enters into the human skull it passes into the pituitary body where it invokes ra and demands the sacred name the pituitary is the master gland of the endocrine system the release of pituitary secretions corresponds with the electromagnetic radiation and gravitational pull of the moon macrocosmically the moon regulates the tides and oceans in time with its monthly Cycles.

Microcosmically the pituitary hormones regulate and refresh our soul fluid body on a monthly cycle also this is possible due to the presence of magnetite crystals.

Posterior pituitary lobe the lunar portion of the regenerative seed is said to be a posterior pituitary low secretion pituitary is the historical name for Combined secretions of oxytocin and vasopressin oxytocin.

The moment oxytocin levels go up the brain’s survival centers call off the amygdala an anagram for Magdalene slows the circuits of fear sadness pain anxiety aggression and anger.
Then the only thing we feel is a love for life.

In short love produces oxytocin the chemical composition of oxytocin is similar to that of protoplasm the lunar germ oxytocin has many important roles in the temple body including the stimulation production and mitosis of stem cells. Lack of oxytocin brings on premature aging but increasing oxytocin levels through meditation compassion and forgiveness actually slows the aging process by improving the behavior of stem cells.

Vasopressin vasopressin mediates stress and stabilizes circulation.

Vasopressin has the Monumental task of maintaining the appropriate volume of water in The extracellular Matrix this allows proper cellular function. In other words vasopressin is indispensable to the vital fluids of the body pituitary secretions act as a catalyst for pineal activity thus producing the felt sensation of the great regeneration.

In the brain it first activates the pituitary the feminine negative pole causing it to send a stream of bluish solar electricity through the infundibulum to the pineal the male positive pole thus completing the
circuit pineal.

The Pinnacle

The stream of blue solar electricity traveling from the pituitary to the pineal is nitric oxide the sky is blue due to the presence of nitrogen the Pinnacle of Enlightenment produced in the pineal gland has two major aspects; one the stimulation of nitric oxide. What Causes Enlightenment and Regeneration and two release of the Kundalini The upgrade of melatonin into penalene DMT and the biochemicals of enlightenment ?????and the Biochemicals of Enlightenment, the nectar of the Gods.

The pineal gland is bathed in highly charged cerebrospinal fluid the pineal contains calcite crystals that are piezoelectric endothelial cells that generate nitric oxide and pinealocytes that mediate nitric oxide release.

When we are in a state of Harmony the pituitary secretes more oxytocin for the pineal Gland.

Pineanal Gland – Calcite Crystals, Nitric Oxide vasopressin causing pineal crystals to vibrate more
rapidly this increases our vibratory frequency centered in the Massa intermedia this is the alchemical wedding.

Luna and solar bodies uniting in the climax of power and healing Alchemy –

The Alchemical Wedding
Jesus said if these two make peace with each other in this one house they will sway to the mountain move away and it will move away the harmonic State initiated by a pituitary secretions causes the Rapid Release of nitric oxide and stimulates the pineal to upgrade melatonin into pinealine DMT and a host of other widely
beneficial neurochemicals nitrogen.

The spirit fire nitric oxide is basically nitrogen and oxygen nitric oxide influences pineal metabolism DMT synthesis when Photon light is absorbed by the body it forms nitric oxide.

Nitric oxide is essential for the metabolism of all cellular regeneration and it stimulates mRNA the messenger of
DNA nitric oxide is a molecule of Health, the more the better the benefits of self-produced nitric
oxide are prolific in the biology of Kundalini.

Jaina Dixon says tingles and Bubbles are always associated with increased Kundalini flow there is some indication that the tingles are associated with increased nitric oxide remember air is mostly nitrogen and oxygen.

Kundalini Energy

What is it really? Electrons in the air are literally our life force we breathe to take in life force in the form of electrons not straw breathing increases nitric oxide in the body hence all of the pranayamas that involve nasal breathing in Hinduism. A common Mantra is om Christianity altered om and created their amen. Chanting om boosts the production of nitric oxide in the body. In fact most spiritual practices boost nitric oxide flow and release exide carbon dioxide poison.

Melatonin upgrades fact most spiritual practices boost nitric oxide flow and release exide carbon dioxide poison.

Melatonin upgrades like the sun the Pioneer wakes us up with its serotonin secretion and puts us
to sleep with its melatonin secretion serotonin melatonin is the nectar of life Cerro means seed and Mel is the Greek word for honey a glimpse at their chemical structures reveals the letters that spell honey serotonin and melatonin increase DNA synthesis and induce mitosis/cell renewal serotonin melatonin and all of the enhanced biochemicals of Enlightenment are derived from tryptophan.

Looking at the tryptophan DMT pathway really helps us understand the concept of melatonin upgrades DMT in the pineal glands of biblical Prophets gave God to humanity and let humans ???? and Melatonin Upgrades perceive parallel universes when pituitary hormones stimulate the pineal to upgrade melatonin into DMT.

The DMT stimulates Photon lighter missions from DNA creating more nitric oxide and causing us to actually shine brighter but DMT does not work alone in the great regeneration a whole host of other Blissful biochemicals are produced too the hallucinogen paneling is a major pinoline and Super Consciousness Awakening contributor to the felt experience of enlightenment.

The subconscious mind uses penalene to communicate with the deeper spheres allowing prophetic Visions to be seen on the timeline lack of sleep inhibits pinealine production.

When the Kundalini hits the pineal gland it ionizes the spin ratio of Serotonin, its electrons interchange altering its chemical nature the molecule itself is reconfigured to its highest potential.

Penalene DMT paneling and all the biochemicals of Enlightenment are detailed in my book The God design secrets of the Mind Body and Soul. The biochemicals of Enlightenment travel from the pineal to the optic Thalamus and the third ventricle, the upgraded biochemicals act as a foaming agent, biblically epaphras in CSF causing it to rise and multiply when the supply of cerebrospinal fluid exceeds the volume of the central canal and the ventricles of the brain it seeps over and bathes the nerves resulting in the experience of an intense physical and spiritual Bliss.

Like yeast the seed that comes forth from the pineal expands and causes the oil in the spinal cord to multiply flashes of light and the ultimate Clarity of Mind occurs the Massa intermedia is freed from discordant Cycles Limitless potential is realized and the great regeneration is underway.

Terminal filament bridge to immortality.

In thinking and Destiny Harold Percival says that the terminal filament is atrophied or clogged up in
adults he says it takes 13 lunar cycles to open or regenerate the terminal filament.

Tthe terminal filament is a complicated subject and this is already a long video so I won’t explain all of the details here however the book based on this video is called the cell of Life Awakening and regenerating.

it incorporates all the details from this video plus many other valuable discoveries, insights and facts.
The terminal filament terminates in the Cell of Life –

Awakening and Regenerating

Ccoccygeal body so this will be our last stop on the Journey of the great regeneration coccygeal body

Kundalini gland according to jaina Dixon the Kundalini gland is the coccygeal body and not the prostate

Australia the coccidio body is a gland situated at the bottom of the coccyx and is said to pulsate when Kundalini nitric oxide flow increases.

This has been esoterically described as an inward ejaculation up the spine.

Carey’s description of the Kundalini rising from this point also sounds like nitric oxide gas that which is in this canal is of a substance more like steam or gas than anything else.

The coccygeal body is comprised of epithelloid cells known to generate nitric oxide it is a Nexus of the body mind systems.

Hormonal blood sympathetic and parasympathetic nerves and the immune lymph system.

Therefore it is clearly a key to the homeostasis and regeneration of the body conclusion.
There is a Perpetual cycle occurring in the temporal body the cycle can cause degeneration or regeneration physically mentally and spiritually depending on our vibration and choices.

The Regeneration of the fluidic lunar body happens monthly coinciding with the Moon the Regeneration of the mineral solar body happens yearly coinciding with the Sun light in the form of photons.

Electromagnetic energy is received by the brain and differentiated by the pineal and pituitary the two potencies flow through the autonomic nervous system through the semilunar ganglion and into the solar plexus where they merge and conceive the seed in the spleen after conception some of the seed will automatically flow up the spinal cord from T12 Percival calls this automatic reclaiming.

The remainder enters the vagus nerve and descends to the procreative organs where it is further vivified if not expelled through what Percival calls voluntary reclaiming.

The vivified seed is then reabsorbed into the body where it begins its Ascension to C4 for the baptism on its path to C4 it travels through other vital organs including the kidneys and the Heart.

Love in the heart stimulates oxytocin released by the pituitary this chemical is the Catalyst for pineal metabolism.

After its baptism by thyroxine the seed arrives at the Double crust of Eda and pingala and the vagus nerve where it is crucified. After crucifixion the seed is sent to the tomb.

Cerebellum, the cerebellum admits the resurrected seed into the fourth ventricle CSF Reservoir where it is distributed into CSF the pituitary and the pioneer.

This causes the pituitary to secrete floods of oxytocin and vasopressin which consequently invigorates the pineal the stimulated pineal glows rich with nitric oxide and upgrades melatonin to DMT and the other biochemicals of super consciousness immediately after the process will Begin.

Again and again each cycle permits some of the essence to descend the central CSF Canal via the ventricles thus the body is purified by degree after the 13th round the hollow through the terminal filament is said to be fully cleared thus the seed can travel directly from the coccidio body to the brain.

The biochemicals of the great regeneration sacred secretion enhance Consciousness cognitive abilities and health along all lines well I really hope that you enjoyed this video and that you found it useful on your personal journey.

I now have a super Consciousness Awakening course available through teachable and it’s really designed to help you awaken your own Super Consciousness the world needs more light workers more loving individuals who know how to access and use their true God power.

We are all Divine beings or Gods if you like as it was stated in Psalm 82 6. but as a race our power and Divinity has been sadly forgotten and or diminished.

Spiritual Awakening is largely a remembering and a re-activation of your innate human power this power is your true Birthright for centuries.

These Mysteries have been hidden away and kept only for an elite few.

The time has finally come when these life-changing Secrets can be revealed so if you would like to learn more about the inner alchemical process and most importantly how to activate and realize the incredible benefits for yourself.

I then I will share the links to the course and to the cell of Life Book in the description box please click on this link to the original video and graphic pictures.

It is the time guy

Disease X in the planning?

The new disease X, click here for the video/link

Will Disease X Be Leaked in 2025?

Buyer Beware: Most Collagen Supplements Sourced From CAFOs

Buyer Beware: Most Collagen Supplements Sourced From CAFOs

Pfizer Sued for Lying About COVID Vaccine’s Effectiveness

Pfizer Sued for Lying About COVID Vaccine’s Effectiveness

https://articles.mercola.com/themes/blogs/mercola/VideoPanel.aspx?PostID=1364789&v=20240123&CacheVideo=1

STORY AT-A-GLANCE

  • The WHO’s pandemic treaty is the gateway to a global, top-down totalitarian regime, a one world government. The reason we can be sure there will be additional pandemics, whether manufactured using either fear and hype alone or an actual bioweapon created for this very purpose, is because the takeover plan, aka The Great Reset, is based on the premise that we need global biosecurity surveillance and centralized response
  • A new contagion will likely be born in 2025, and media are already preparing us for it
  • January 15-19, 2024, global leaders met at the World Economic Forum’s (WEF) Davos summit where the key topic of discussion was “Preparing for Disease X,” a hypothetical new pandemic predicted to kill 20 times more people than COVID-19
  • In August 2023, a new vaccine research facility was set up in Wiltshire, England, to begin work on a vaccine against the unknown “Disease X”
  • The U.S. Congress introduced the “Disease X Act of 2023” (H.R.3832) in June 2023. The bill calls for the establishment of a BARDA program to develop “medical countermeasures for viral threats with pandemic potential.” The bill was referred to the Subcommittee on Health in early June 2023 but has not yet been passed

The COVID-19 pandemic allowed for an unprecedented shift in power and wealth distribution across the world and, as predicted, it was not to be a one-off event. A new contagion will likely be born in 2025, and media are already preparing us for it.

January 15-19, 2024, global leaders met at the World Economic Forum’s (WEF) Davos summit where the key topic of discussion was “Preparing for Disease X,”1 a hypothetical new pandemic predicted to emerge in 2025 and kill 20 times more people than COVID-19.2 As reported by the Mirror:3

“The World Health Organization (WHO) has warned of a potential Disease X since 2017, a term indicating an unknown pathogen that could cause a serious international epidemic …

Public speakers at the ‘Preparing for Disease X’ event next Wednesday [January 17, 2024] include Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, director-general of the WHO, Brazilian minister of health Nisia Trindade Lima, and Michel Demaré, chair of the board at AstraZeneca.

Power, greed and more power. Push, push and push. Infinite in nature.

Enslavement of the common population/humans

In their first post-pandemic meeting held in November 2022, the WHO brought over 300 scientists to consider which of over 25 virus families and bacteria could potentially create another pandemic.

The list the team came up with included: the Ebola virus, the Marburg virus disease, Covid-19, SARS, and the Middle East respiratory syndrome coronavirus (MERS-CoV). Others included lassa fever, nipah and henipaviral diseases, zift Valley fever, and zika — as well as the unknown pathogen that would cause ‘Disease X.’”

I’ve interviewed Meryl Nass about how the WHO is trying to take over aspects of everyone’s lives. She just published an important piece over the weekend, Why Is Davos So Interested in Disease? about how the WEF and the WHO have become partners to terrify the world. 

Alexis Baden-Mayer, Esq., political director for the Organic Consumers Association, did some digging into the participants of this WEF event, and the two things they all have in common are 1) dumping the AstraZeneca COVID shot on the developing world (primarily India and Brazil) after rich countries rejected it due to its admitted blood clotting risk, and 2) pushing for the implementation of medical AI systems that will eliminate doctors along with patient choice and privacy.

Practice Runs or Responsible Planning?

In a January 11, 2024, tweet, Fox News analyst and former assistant secretary for public affairs for the U.S. Treasury Department, Monica Crowley, wrote:4

“From the same people who brought you COVID-19 now comes Disease X: Next week in Davos, the unelected globalists at the World Economic Forum will hold a panel on a future pandemic 20x deadlier than COVID …

Just in time for the election, a new contagion to allow them to implement a new WHO treaty, lock down again, restrict free speech and destroy more freedoms. Sound far-fetched? So did what happened in 2020. When your enemies tell you what they’re planning and what they’re planning FOR, believe them. And get ready.”

Dr. Stuart Ray, vice chair of medicine for data integrity and analytics at Johns Hopkins’ Department of Medicine, dismissed such warnings, telling Fortune magazine5 that “Coordination of public health response is not conspiracy, it’s simply responsible planning.”

I’d be willing to believe him if it wasn’t for a now-obvious trend: Whatever the globalists claim will happen actually does happen at a remarkable frequency, and their prognostic capabilities become easier to explain when you consider that most lethal pandemics have been caused by manmade viruses, the products of gain-of-function research. It’s pretty easy to predict a new viral outbreak if you have said virus waiting in the wings.

With that in mind, recent research from China certainly raises concern, to say the least. According to a January 3, 2024, preprint,6 a SARS-CoV-2-related pangolin coronavirus — described as a “cell culture-adapted mutant” called GX_P2V that was first cultured in 2017 — was found to kill 100% of the humanized mice (ACE2-transgenic mice) infected with it.7

The primary cause of death was brain inflammation. According to the authors, “this is the first report showing that a SARS-CoV-2-related pangolin coronavirus can cause 100% mortality in hACE2 mice, suggesting a risk for GX_P2V to spill over into humans.”

However, if this virus mutated as a result of passaging through cell cultures, then it’s not likely to emerge in the wild. It’s another unnatural lab creation, so rather than saying it may spill over from pangolins to humans, it would be more accurate to admit that it may pose a (rather serious) risk to humans were a lab escape to occur.

COVID Dress Rehearsals

In 2017, Johns Hopkins Center of Health Security held a coronavirus pandemic simulation called the SPARS Pandemic 2025-2028 scenario.8 Importantly, the exercise stressed “communication dilemmas concerning medical countermeasures that could plausibly emerge” in a pandemic scenario.

Then, in October 2019, less than three months before the COVID-19 outbreak, the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation in collaboration with Johns Hopkins and the World Economic Forum hosted Event 201.

The name itself suggests it may have been a continuation of the SPARS Pandemic exercise. College courses are numbered based on their prerequisites. A 101 course does not require any prior knowledge whereas 201 courses require prior familiarity with the topic at hand.

As in the SPARS Pandemic scenario, Event 201 involved an outbreak of a highly infectious coronavirus, and the primary (if not sole) focus of the exercise was, again, how to control information and keep “misinformation” in check, not how to effectively discover and share remedies.

Social media censorship played a prominent role in the Event 201 plan, and in the real-world events of 2020 through the present, accurate information about vaccine development, production and injury has indeed been effectively suppressed around the world, thanks to social media companies and Google’s censoring of opposing viewpoints.

In March 2021, an outbreak of “an unusual strain of monkeypox virus” was simulated.9 In late July the following year, the WHO director-general declared that a multi-country outbreak of monkeypox constituted a public health emergency of international concern,10 against his own advisory group.

Download this Article Before it Disappears

Download PDF

‘Catastrophic Contagion’ Exercise

Considering both of these simulations, SPARS (“Event 101”?) and Event 201, foreshadowed what eventually occurred in real life during COVID, when Gates hosts yet another pandemic exercise, it’s worth paying attention to the details.

October 23, 2022, Gates, Johns Hopkins and the WHO cohosted “a global challenge exercise” dubbed “Catastrophic Contagion,”11,12 involving a fictional pathogen called “severe epidemic enterovirus respiratory syndrome 2025” (SEERS-25).

Enterovirus D6813 is typically associated with cold and flu-like illness in infants, children and teens. In rare cases, it’s also been known to cause viral meningitis and acute flaccid myelitis, a neurological condition resulting in muscle weakness and loss of reflexes in one or more extremities.

Enteroviruses A71 and A6 are known to cause hand, foot and mouth disease,14 while poliovirus, the prototypical enterovirus, causes polio (poliomyelitis), a potentially life-threatening type of paralysis that primarily affects children under age 5. So, the virus they modeled in this simulation appears to be something similar to enterovirus D68, but worse.

Vaccine Drug Trials Begin for Deadly Nipah Virus

One known virus that bears some resemblance to the fictional SEERS-25 is the Nipah virus. This virus has a kill rate of about 75%,15 and survivors oftentimes face long-term neurological issues stemming from the infection. Nipah is also said to affect children to a greater degree than adults.16

Incidentally, human trials for a vaccine against the deadly Nipah virus were recently launched.17 Volunteers received their first shots in early January 2024. The experimental injection uses the same viral vector technology used to produce AstraZeneca’s COVID shot.

The trial is reportedly being carried out by the University of Oxford in an undisclosed area where Nipah is actively infecting victims. (India seems to be indicated, as an outbreak in Kerala killed two people and hospitalized three in September 2023.18)

The disease is thought to spread via interaction with infected animals such as goats, pigs, cats and horses. It may also spread via tainted blood products and food. Symptoms can emerge anywhere from a few days after exposure to as long as 45 days.

Initial symptoms include fever, headache and respiratory illness, which can rapidly progress to encephalitis (brain swelling), seizures and coma within just a couple of days. According to the WHO, pigs are known to be “highly contagious” during the incubation period, and it’s possible that humans may be as well, although that has yet to be confirmed.

Training African Leaders to Go Along With the Narrative

Tellingly, the Catastrophic Contagion exercise focused on getting leadership in African countries involved and trained in following the script. African nations went “off script” more often than others during the COVID pandemic, and didn’t follow in the footsteps of developed nations when it came to pushing the jabs.

As a result, vaccine makers now face the problem of having a huge control group, as the COVID jab uptake on the African continent was only 6%,19 yet it fared far better than developed nations in terms of COVID-19 infections and related deaths.20

The Catastrophic Contagion exercise predicts SEERS-25 will kill 20 million people worldwide, including 15 million children, and many who survive the infection will be left with paralysis and/or brain damage. In other words, the “cue” given is that the next pandemic may target children rather than the elderly, as was the case with COVID-19.

Vaccine Against Unknown ‘X’ Pathogen Is Already in the Works

🚨💉 Disease X

How wonderfully reassuring – we’re already developing a Vaccine for Disease X.

More predictive programming from Deep State owned BBC pic.twitter.com/lXx7rXlBrh— Concerned Citizen (@BGatesIsaPyscho) January 12, 2024

Video Link

In August 2023, a new vaccine research facility was set up in Wiltshire, England, fully staffed with more 200 scientists, to begin work on a vaccine against the unknown “Disease X.” As reported by Metro:21

“It took 362 days to develop the Covid-19 vaccine. But the Vaccine Development and Evaluation Centre team wants to reduce that time to 100 days. Scientists at the facility will develop a range of prototype vaccines and tests.

The new lab is a part of a global effort to respond to global health threats. The UK and other G7 countries signed up to the ‘100 Days Mission’ in 2021. The government has invested £65 million into the lab.

Professor Dame Jenny Harries, the head of the UK Health Security Agency, said the new facility would ‘ensure that we prepare so that if we have a new Disease X, a new pathogen, we have as much of that work in advance as possible.’”

Push, push and push. Weaponizing of micro-organism and a high success story. Nor was covid the first there are many more and successful introduced into our environment/big business.

In the U.S., Congress also introduced the “Disease X Act of 2023” (H.R.383222) back in June 2023. The bill calls for the establishment of a BARDA program to develop “medical countermeasures for viral threats with pandemic potential.” The bill was referred to the Subcommittee on Health in early June 2023 but has not yet been passed.

The Disease X Act amends a section of the Public Health Service Act with two new clauses that call for “the identification and development of platform manufacturing technologies needed for advanced development and manufacturing of medical countermeasures for viral families which have significant potential to cause a pandemic,” and “advanced research and development of flexible medical countermeasures against priority respiratory virus families and other respiratory viral pathogens with a significant potential to cause a pandemic, with both pathogen-specific and pathogen-agnostic approaches …”

Needless to say, since it’s impossible to customize vaccines using the conventional method of growing viruses in eggs or some other cell media in 100 days, it seems inevitable that all these efforts are about the expansion of gene-based technologies.

This, despite the fact that the mRNA technology used for the COVID jabs has proven to be disastrous from a safety standpoint, and ineffective to boot.

Why Manufactured Pandemics Will Continue

At this point, it’s quite clear that “biosecurity” is the chosen means by which the globalist cabal intends to seize power over the world. The WHO is working on securing sole power over pandemic response globally through its international pandemic treaty which, if implemented, will eradicate the sovereignty of all member nations.

The WHO’s pandemic treaty is the gateway to a global, top-down totalitarian regime, a one world government. Ultimately, the WHO intends to dictate all health care. But to secure that power, they will need more pandemics. COVID-19 alone was not enough to get everyone onboard with a centralized pandemic response unit, and they probably knew that from the start.

So, the reason we can be sure there will be additional pandemics, whether manufactured using either fear and hype alone or an actual bioweapon created for this very purpose, is because the takeover plan, aka The Great Reset, is based on the premise that we need global biosecurity surveillance and centralized response.

Biosecurity, in turn, is the justification for an international vaccine passport, which the G20 has signed on to, and that passport will also be your digital identification. That digital ID, then, will be tied to your social credit score, personal carbon footprint tracker, medical records, educational records, work records, social media presence, purchase records, your bank accounts and a programmable central bank digital currency (CBDC).

Once all these pieces are fully connected, you’ll be in a digital prison, and the ruling cabal — whether officially a one world government by then or not — will have total control over your life from cradle to grave.

We’re Already Suffering Under a Pseudo-One World Government

We actually already have a pseudo-one world government, in the form of Bill Gates’ nongovernmental organizations (NGOs). They are making health care decisions that should be left to individual nations and/or states, and they’re making decisions that will line their own pockets, regardless of what happens to the public health-wise.

They coordinate and synchronize pandemic communication during simulated practice runs, and then, when the real-world situation emerges that fits the bill, the preplanned script is played out more or less verbatim.

Between the G20 declaration to implement an international vaccine passport under the auspice of the WHO, and the WHO’s pandemic treaty, everything is lined up to take control of the next pandemic, and in so doing, further securing the foundation for a one world government.

As discussed in my 2021 article, “COVID-19 Dress Rehearsals and Proof of the Plan,” the pandemic measures rolled out for COVID-19 were the culmination of decades of careful planning to radically and permanently alter the governance and social structures of the world.

The medical system has been used in the past to drive forward a New World Order agenda — now rebranded as “The Great Reset” — and it’s now being used to implement the final stages of that longstanding plan. COVID-19 was a real-world practice run, and showed just how effectively a pandemic can be used to shift the balance of power, and strip the global population of its wealth and individual freedoms.

So, there’s no doubt in my mind that additional pandemics will be declared, because they’re the means to the globalists’ ends. To prevent this global coup, we need everyone to speak and share the truth to the point that you’re able. Only then will our voices outnumber the voices of the propaganda machine.

Door To Freedom (doortofreedom.org), an organization founded by Dr. Meryl Nass, has a poster that explains how the pandemic treaty and International Health Regulations (IHR) amendments will change life as we know it and strip us of every vestige of freedom. Please download this poster and share it with everyone you know. Also put it up on public billboards and places where communities share information.

https://articles.mercola.com/sites/mercola/special-content/dynamic-ending-ad-beef-organ-supplements-01232024.aspx?cid_medium=email

– Sources and References

Celestial information & Climate change.

“UNIVERSAL ALERT” Pleiadians Warn of a SIGNIFICANT EVENT That Will Effect Everyone on Earth!

Hello friends of the truth there are vast energetic changes taking place within this entire
residential Universe this shift of energy has happened since the anchoring of an expansive network of webbing that took place on Earth as you entered the time frame through the dramatic multi-dimensional access openings on your planet at that time.

(Note: Nothing to do with so-called warming of the planet earth) as some are trying to sell it and make a killing.

The universal Consciousness grids have been sending their tentacles of energy to interact through the vortexes and grids throughout the Earth plane.

Aa vast rearrangement has taken place with the magnetic core of Earth Shifting the structural form within the grids and vortexes.

The energetic profile of Earth is rapidly undergoing change it is being realigned magnetically to the universal Consciousness grid and this is creating what we call the great shift on your Earth plane.

This great shift has impacted the entire universe allowing the universe to undergo a rapid reset in
relationship to the god seat of power.

This happening has set in motion an expansive light signature wave being sent forth from the hierarchy of pure light Consciousness throughout the Universe to all life force groups we as a universal Community have been waiting for this Monumental opening and celebrate this occasion knowing that the work you are doing within yourselves on planet Earth has been impactful on this outcome.

We witness you and understand that you underestimate your potential power in relationship to the rest of the universe, the third-dimensional illusion creates a veil that hides from you your full origin of light understand that these energetic changes are creating a thinner Veil and a greater access to your multi-dimensional heart enabling you to align more readily to the true natural reality.

Your sacred energetic rotation of Earth continues to accelerate and is moving in direct alignment to the pulse of Consciousness that is being generated through this resident Universe.

These changes are altering the weather systems across the planet and creating a further intensity of the
third dimensional drama on the planet.

These happenings are leading you into greater change and transformation they are part of a series
of destined Monumental shifts that are to take place on Earth leading into the new Transit of consumes on your planet.

We the galactic Community are waiting for the energy of this transition on Earth to reach a certain vibrational level which is going to allow us to take our next step in the form of a direct communication to those of you who are ready to receive them.

You are like mercenaries of light for earth and the universe as you play your role out you will bring a wholeness of communion to the full Universal Community.

Remember we are your neighbors you are playing an essential role as part of our Universal Community your thought process needs to be one of belonging being an essential member and extension of the universal team as you align your thought to this truth.

There is a different Synergy that can be created between you and us. Oneness within the sacred texts it is written that at a certain destined moment Earth will return to playing its pivotal role within the universe.

Many of you have pre-agreements that will make up part of that Community which consciously returns
to the universe to interact through community.

Many of you are already in alignment with the galactic life force groups and now is the time for a deeper more complete communication and commitment to take place what is required.

From you is a development of a deepening maturity within your Collective Hearts to fine tuny your ability to creating a collective communion between groups of you humans this communion will support an authentic launching through the expansion of your ability to fully interact within the universe Collective through this Avenue.

The energetic forces continue to expand transforming daily on your planet these present energies enable you to forge a deepening connection communion within the universe.

These forces are to here to support you in the reestablishment of your own in sacred reconnections to yourself your own higher self-consciousness they’re also designed to enable you to enter alternate reality spaces that exist within the planet and outwards into the multi-dimensional universal frequency lines.

The time is now to step forward and claim your place within this sacred Arena of the light that has always been in existence through these series of expansive energetic shifts.

You may experience a tilting of your senses where there is a powerful sense of being out of control
know that your sacred senses are being reopened your crystalline structure is birthing a stronger electrical current that is pulsing through your brain cells and pineal.

You are undergoing a rapid transmutation process over these upcoming months as the Earth moves into a higher frequency setting rotation there will be continual adjustments as the planet becomes further Tethered to the universal Consciousness.

2024.

Know that the planet will become stabilized to the energy of this Universal Consciousness grid towards the end of this calendar year meanwhile through this stage of your transition you will be required to focus on a continual letting go as you enter this higher stage of metamorphosis.

You and the planet are undergoing this rapid change simultaneously through this changing energetic Arena you as an individual have vast opportunities to make alterations within your life by connecting consciously to your inner power.

You have the power through conscious choice to let go and set in motion changes for yourself within your life now.

There has never been a time like this to utilize the energetic shifts that are geared towards supporting
changes that you set in motion for yourself.

You are who you have been waiting for rather than wanting change that is your ego mind’s dialogue you can consciously move forward into creating change for yourself you create real change through anchoring a conscious Choice action.

Through the Avenue of your heart which sets in motion a wave of personal power through your life creating that change this process within you shifts the dynamic of beginning to channel your sacred nature to create practical changes in your day to-day living.

You can begin an incremental steps by making minor changes to your life doing this changes an old cycle of being in limitation and lack breaks down self-sabotaging cycles and old belief systems held within you.

There will be a natural shedding of the old shells of density as you choose to take back your
power and work through your heart, to create a changing dynamic in your life however small this action by you revolutionizes your life by simply taking back your power as co-creator.

All the new energetic profiles on your planet support these changes in you this is the time for self-launching creating what you desire for yourself at this juncture you are a creator let go and allow yourself to activate through your heart create and receive process for setting in M change what is essential in the process.

It is to make sure you are fully aligned through your heart while you consciously set in motion the
changes you want in your life now align to your heart you align by holding both Palms of your hands on your upper chest take the time to feel the warmth of your hands or the pressure of the Palms on your chest.
Hold your awareness there your full attention is moved away from your ego mind your head all of attention is feeling the physical connection on your heart space.

Take a conscious breath and place it like a soft wind into where you feel the physical hands connecting to your heart, bring the conscious breath in two or three times the breath allows your awareness to open further within where you are physically holding the heart, take another conscious breath within the space you see sense or feel and let go in the Space Place the sound an and a RN within your heart space do this as many times as you feel this sound links you deeper to your heart.

The sound acts like a key to a door feel see or sense how a door opens in your heart once in your
heart consciously choose the change that you want in your life.

You create this by placing the thought of this in your heart select only one item of change as you place the thought of the changing element that you desire place a conscious breath into the essence of the thought and let go each time to work within your heart deep changes are taking place within your entire vibrational makeup.

The old Illusions begin to drop away from you and a self- Liberation process is set in motion within and throughout your life you can activate this process daily if desired.

We witness you as you undergo this next phase of change know that you are part of a greater movement within this Universal realm of love

The Pleiadians and new disease X.

Another message about disease X from the pleiadians in 2024 but think that we after what did happen to the covid should be better prepared. Please click on the video link for the original text please

Video link: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HI9WHc9_xPA

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW – The Pleiadian High Council 2024

Planned X /new pandemic in the making?

LINKS FOR LIGHTWORKERS 🔥

Visit The Lightworkers Journal Collection: https://shorturl.at/ansxK

THE MEDITATION JOURNAL V1: https://shorturl.at/dtDOS
THE MEDITATION JOURNAL V2: https://shorturl.at/gwEY8
THE SPIRITUAL GROWTH JOURNAL: https://shorturl.at/tGHIT
THE DREAM JOURNAL: https://shorturl.at/eiwHT
THE MINDFULNESS JOURNAL: https://shorturl.at/rwL05
THE GRATITUDE JOURNAL: https://t.ly/1AxBZ

Transcript

Greetings I am Meera from The pleadian High Council I greet you this day with all the love in my heart in
these times of Rapid change and evolution it’s essential to understand the unfolding events from a higher
perspective.

As we observe the developments on Earth especially regarding health concerns and the potential for new
pandemics it’s important to remember your intrinsic power and the ongoing Transformations within your
[Music] being.

Firstly let’s address the concern of new pandemics while it’s natural to feel apprehension know that your
Collective Consciousness is elevating you are not the same beings you were years ago.

Your resilience both physically and spiritually has been significant ific L strengthened this is partly due
to the activation of your 12 strand DNA an extraordinary shift that is currently underway.

The activation of this DNA is a Monumental leap in your evolutionary path it’s Awakening dormant abilities enhancing your connection with the cosmic Consciousness and amplifying your healing capabilities this process is not just a physical transformation But A Spiritual Awakening that empowers you to navigate through various challenges with greater ease and understanding as your DNA activates you gain access to ancient wisdom and a deeper understanding of the universe and your place within it.
This knowledge is a powerful tool in Discerning truth from illusion and in maintaining your well-being in the face of global health challenges moreover the challenges you face including the threat threats of pandemics are serving a higher purpose in The Grand Design of your Collective Evolution.

These challenges are uniting you strengthening your resolve and exposing truths that have long been
concealed they are catalysts for awakening prompting you to question to seek and to understand the deeper truths of your existence.

This period is significant in uncovering veils of deception as more individuals awaken to their true
potential and the reality of their existence it’s a time of Revelation where the collective Consciousness is
rising to new heights and unity is being forged in the face of adversity.

Beloved star seeds your journey on Earth is one of Bravery courage and immense spiritual growth you
have chosen to be here during these pivotal times to be part of this Grand transition and to contribute to
the collective Awakening.

Your presence and your work are invaluable the challenges you endure are not just personal trials they are shared experiences that contribute to the collective expansion of consciousness as you navigate these
times.

Remember to stay grounded in your truth to nurture your connection with the earth and the cosmos and to allow your intuition to guide you.

Trust in the process of your Evolution and know that you are supported by higher beings who are assisting in this Grand transformation.

Beloved ones we in the High Council honor you for your courage your bravery and your patience your journey is a testament to the strength of the human Spirit and the boundless potential of the Soul.

Know that you are not alone we are with you guiding and supporting you every step of the the way I will
contact you all again soon I am Mira and I love you

Track record new drugs/covid

Story at a glance:

So far, all of the drugs developed against COVID-19 have been disastrous in one way or another.
Remdesivir, which to this day is the primary COVID drug approved for use in U.S. hospitals, routinely causes severe organ damage and, often, death.
Despite that, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has approved remdesivir for in-hospital and outpatient in children as young as 1 month old.
Another COVID drug, Paxlovid, will in some cases cause the infection to rebound when the medication is
withdrawn.
Molnupiravir (sold under the brand name Lagevrio) also has serious safety concerns. Not only might it
contribute to cancer and birth defects, it may also supercharge the rate at which the virus mutates
inside the patient, resulting in newer and more resistant variants.
The fact that U.S. health authorities have focused on these drugs to the exclusion of all others,
including older drugs with high rates of effectiveness and superior safety profiles, sends a very disturbing
message. They’ve basically become extensions of the drug industry, protecting the drug industry’s interests at the cost of public health.
So far, all of the drugs developed against COVID-19 have been disastrous in one way or another. Remdesivir, for example, which to this day is the primary COVID drug approved for use in U.S. hospitals, routinely causes severe organ damage, and, often, death.

Despite its horrible track record, the U.S. government actually pays hospitals a 20% upcharge for sticking
to the remdesivir protocol, plus an additional bonus. Hospitals must also use remdesivir if they want
liability protection.

Incentives like these have turned U.S. hospitals into veritable death traps, as more effective and far safer
drugs are not allowed, and hospitals are essentially forced to follow the recommendations of the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

The silencing of freedom/speech/organisations

The so-called factcheckers:

Sharyl Attkisson is an American journalist and television correspondent. She hosts the Sinclair Broadcast
Group’s television show Full Measure with Sharyl Attkisson. Attkisson is a five-time Emmy Award winner
and has won the Edward R. Murrow Award from the Radio Television Digital News Association.

“Virtually every piece of information you can acquire has already been adopted, whether it’s Wikipedia
online, fact-checkers or the news,” says five-time Emmy Award winner and investigative journalist Sharyl
Attkisson. “This is all part of a very well-funded, well-organized landscape that dictates to us the
information they want to see and experience.”

SHARYL ATTKISSON: HOW PROPAGANDISTS CO-OPTED ‘FACT-CHECKERS’ AND THE PRESS TO CONTROL THE INFORMATION LANDSCAPE

Attkisson is the host of Full Measure and author of Slanted: How the News Media Taught Us to Love
Censorship and Hate Journalism.”

SHARYL ATTKISSON: HOW PROPAGANDISTS CO-OPTED ‘FACT-CHECKERS’ AND THE PRESS TO CONTROL THE INFORMATION LANDSCAPE

Jekielek-san: Sharyl Attkisson, how nice that you’re back at American Thought Leaders.

Ms. Attkisson: Thank you for the invitation.

Jekielek-san: Sharyl, I was thinking about your book Slanted. You wrote it before COVID. The subtitle is
very apt: How the media has taught us to love censorship and hate journalism. I think you have seen
something very profound, earlier than many others.

Messing with the music by the Rockefeller group.

Ms. Attkisson: It’s not because I’m so forward-looking, but because the type of coverage I do leads me to
see or be exposed to trends in the media and propaganda that spread further later. Sometimes I’m at the
forefront, so to speak, when it comes to seeing them. And I can see what’s happening in the landscape.

When I say that the media has taught us to love censorship and hate journalism, it’s referring to the phenomenon that before 2015, 2016 – and I looked at this to make sure I was right with my memory – there wasn’t much movement begging big tech or third parties or fact-checkers to stand between us and our open information online or in the news. No one would have thought of it, at least not on a broad scale.

And yet we are here now, just a few years later, after a major campaign to control the information in the news and on the Internet, where many people accept the idea that some unsuspecting third parties, whose strings are pulled by some company or political interest, get involved and tell us what we can see and read and what not, and what we should believe. But people are embracing it, even in the media, and begging for more of it. I never thought this would be the case a few years ago.

Mr. Jekielek: Some of the things that are checked for accuracy are bizarre. I take a screenshot of it from
time to time. They “check” you, and then it’s in your feed. It stands on Twitter for two days.

Ms. Attkisson: Right.

Jekielek-san: What are you trying to do with me here? The whole phenomenon is strange. You have these
people who really aren’t qualified to check people like Dr. Robert Malone, an expert in vaccine technology. It’s just kind of bizarre.

https://childrenshealthdefense.org/defender/global-effort-silence-critics-great-reset/

Link copied

Publicis appears to be playing an important role, coordinating the suppression of information that runs counter to the technocratic narrative.

Story at-a-glance:

The Publicis Groupe, a leading PR firm, represents major companies within the technology, pharmaceutical and banking industries. These companies, in turn, have various partnerships with the U.S. government and global nongovernmental organizations (NGOs).
Publicis is a partner of the World Economic Forum, which is leading the call for a “reset” of the global economy and a complete overhaul of our way of life. As such, Publicis appears to be playing an important role, coordinating the suppression of information that runs counter to the technocratic narrative.
The role of the free press is to counter industry propaganda. That role has been effectively subverted through advertising. News outlets rarely report on something that might damage their advertisers.
Publicis connects to the drug industry, banking industry, NewsGuard/HealthGuard, educational institutions, Big Tech companies like Google, Microsoft and Bing, the U.S. State Department and Department of Defense, global technocratic institutions like the World Health Organization, national and global NGOs like the CCDH and the World Economic Forum, and dominating health websites like WebMD and Medscape.
These connections, taken together, explain how certain views can be so effectively erased. The answer to this dilemma is transparency. We must expose the machinations that allow this agenda to be pushed forward.
Any strategy that successfully manipulates public opinion is bound to be repeated, and we can now clearly see how the tobacco industry’s playbook is being used to shape the public narrative about COVID-19 and the projected post-COVID era.

In 2011, after many years of raising awareness regarding genetically modified organisms (GMOs) and industrial agriculture, we decided we needed a new game plan. Educating people through our newsletter was great, but we realized the best way to expose Monsanto — a leading GMO advocate and patented seed owner at the time — was to get them to engage directly and ensure national attention.

To that end, Mercola.com funded the signature gathering in California that initiated Proposition 37, the right to know what’s in your food by ensuring proper GMO labeling. We spent more than $1 million for the Prop 37 initiative, plus several million dollars more for GMO labeling initiatives in other U.S. states in the following years.

This initiative forced Monsanto to engage with the public directly to defend their toxic products and dangerous business practices, all while receiving national coverage in the process.

The Monsanto case

Monsanto spent tens of millions of dollars attacking anyone in their way, but they did so indirectly, just like the tobacco industry did before them. This is the core take-home of what I’m about to describe next.

They used a public relations team to do most of their dirty work — paying scientists and academics to voice their “independent opinions,” influencing scientific journals, and getting journalists and editorial boards to write favorable and influential pieces to help them maintain their lies and influence minds.

Still, while the spending of tens of millions of dollars to influence voters resulted in a narrow defeat of Prop 37, the new, widespread awareness of GMOs, pesticides and industrial agriculture eventually led to Monsanto’s demise.

In 2013, in a last-ditch effort to salvage its tarnished image, Monsanto hired the PR firm Ketchum. As noted in a HuffPost article by Paul Thacker, “Monsanto hit reboot with Ketchum,” which “created a campaign called GMO Answers, and used social media and third-party scientists to offer a counter narrative to allay concern about Monsanto’s products.”

The GMO Answers’ website is set up to allow professors at public universities answer GMO questions from the public — supposedly without remuneration from the industry. But over the years, evidence emerged showing that these academics are far from independent, and often end up getting paid for their contributions via hidden means, such as unrestricted grants.

University of Florida professor Kevin Folta is one prominent example described in my 2016 article “Scientific American — Another Monsanto Bedfellow.” In that article, I also review how GMO Answers co-sponsored a panel discussion about GMOs in March that year with the media and partnerships division of Scientific American.

At the time, Jeremy Abatte, vice president and publisher of Scientific American, insisted the event was not a Ketchum event but a Scientific American event. Few bought his reasoning though, and many ended up filing Scientific American into the chemical biotech shill category.

Having purchased Monsanto at the end of 2016, Bayer continued the strategy to rely on PR firms for public acceptance. In the article “Bayer’s Shady PR Firms: Fleishmanhillard, Ketchum, FTI Consulting,” U.S. Right to Know reviews the many deception scandals involving these firms. A key discovery was evidence showing “there are objective strategies to silence strong voices.”

After investigating the strategies used by Monsanto and Bayer, we can now see that the same playbook is being used by Big Tech and Big Pharma to shape the public narratives about COVID-19 and the Great Reset. Again, a central facet of these campaigns is to silence critics, in particular those with large online followings, including yours truly.

I have been publicly labeled a “national security threat” to the U.K. by Imran Ahmed, a member of the Steering Committee on Countering Extremism Pilot Task Force under the British government’s Commission for Countering Extremism and the chief executive of the Centre for Countering Digital Hate (CCDH).

According to Ahmed, I and others who question the safety and necessity of a COVID-19 vaccine may be prone to violent extremism. This defamatory statement clearly has no basis in reality whatsoever. Rather, it’s part of the propaganda aimed at destroying the opposition — in this case the opposition to the technocrats driving the Great Reset agenda, which spans across social, economic and health related sectors.

As reported by the National Vaccine Information Center, which was also on the CCDH list of national security threats:

“The anonymously funded CCDH also has an office in Washington, D.C. and the defamatory publicity campaign created in December 2020 was designed to not only discredit NVIC’s four-decade public record of working within the U.S. democratic system to secure vaccine safety and informed consent protections in public health policies and laws, but to destroy our small charity.”

Publicis is an organizing force in the Great Reset deception

Public deception is now being carried out at a mass scale, and the whole thing appears to be led and organized by another major PR firm, this time the Publicis Groupe, self-described as “one of the world’s largest communications groups,” which represents major companies within the technology, pharmaceutical and banking industries.

These companies, in turn, have various partnerships with the U.S. government and global nongovernmental organizations (NGOs). Publicis itself is also a partner of the World Economic Forum, which is leading the call for a “reset” of the global economy and a complete overhaul of our way of life. As you will see, Publicis’ fingerprints can be found throughout the net of censorship and misdirection that is now being cast across the digital landscape.

The Publicis Groupe has manipulated what people think about commercial products for nearly a century. Over that century, they have bought or partnered with targeted advertising avenues, beginning with newspapers, followed by radio, TV, cinema and the internet. More recently, they’ve branched into Big Data acquisitions and artificial intelligence platforms.

To understand the power PR companies such as Publicis have today, you need to understand the role of the free press. While pro-industry advertising worked well for decades, there was still the irksome problem of the Fourth Estate, a term that refers to the press.

The problem for industry was that professional investigative journalists working for magazines, newspapers and broadcast outlets would write in-depth exposés, outing the truth behind deceptive advertising and countering industry propaganda with science, statistics and other documented facts — and when a free press with honest reporting based on verifiable facts actually does its job, ineffective or toxic products are driven off the market.

The answer that industry came up with in the late 20th century to combat truth in journalism was, pure and simple, to control the Fourth Estate with advertising dollars. News organizations will simply not run reports that might harm the bottom line of its advertisers.

By further partnering with the “big guns” of media — such as the Paley Center for Media — Publicis and its industry clients have been able to influence and control the press to restrict, indeed virtually eliminate, your ability to get the truth on many important issues.

Publicis, Big Pharma and NewsGuard

To start off this sprawling web of industry connections surrounding Publicis, let’s look at its connections to the self-appointed internet watchdog NewsGuard. NewsGuard rates websites on criteria of “credibility” and “transparency,” ostensibly to guide viewers to the most reliable sources of news and information.

In reality, however, NewsGuard ends up acting as a gatekeeper with a mission to barricade unpopular truth and differences of opinion behind closed gates. Its clearly biased ranking system easily dissuades people from perusing information from low-rated sites, mine included.

NewsGuard received a large chunk of its startup capital from Publicis. NewsGuard also has ties to The Paley Center for Media, mentioned earlier. For clarification, The Paley Center is composed of every major media in the world, including Microsoft, AOL, CBS, Fox and Tribune Media. One of its activities is to sponsor an annual global forum for industry leaders.

NewsGuard is housed in The Paley Center in New York City. In November 2015, Publicis’ chairman of North America, Susan Gianinno, joined The Paley Center’s board of trustees.

Leo Hindery, a former business partner of the co-CEOs of NewsGuard, Steven Brill and Gordon Crovitz, is also a former trustee and director of The Paley Center. Taken together, NewsGuard has fairly influential connections to The Paley Center besides being a tenant in their building.

As mentioned, Publicis represents most of the major pharmaceutical companies in the world, and since so much of its revenue comes from the drug industry, it’s not far-fetched to assume Publicis might influence NewsGuard’s ratings of drug industry competitors, such as alternative health sites.

Publicis, Big Pharma, NewsGuard and Big Tech

Next, let’s add a layer of Big Tech into the mix. Publicis, which represents Big Pharma, not only has the ability to influence the public through NewsGuard, but it’s also a Google partner, which allows it even greater ability to bury undesirable views that might hurt its clientele.

NewsGuard is also partnered with Microsoft, initially through Microsoft’s Defending Democracy Program. Through an expanded partnership announced in 2020, Microsoft Edge users gained access to NewsGuard for free, and Microsoft Bing gained access to NewsGuard’s data.

Publicis, pharma, NewsGuard, Big Tech, government and NGOs

Expanding the web further onto government and NGO territory, we find that NewsGuard is also connected to the U.S. State Department, the U.S. Department of Defense and the World Health Organization. All three are listed as NewsGuard partners.15 NewsGuard is also partnered with:

Public libraries
Schools
MSN
Bing
Trend Micro and many others
To summarize, the web around Publicis now includes international drug companies, NewsGuard, Google, Microsoft, the U.S. State Department and the U.S. Department of Defense (DOD), the WHO and the World Economic Forum. Mind you, this is not a comprehensive review of links. It’s merely a sampling of entities to give you an idea of the breadth of these connections, which when taken together explain how certain views can be so effectively erased.

Add in ‘anti-hate’ group and Google-trusted health sites

But we’re not done yet. NewsGuard’s health-related service called HealthGuard is also partnered with WebMD, Medscape and the CCDH — the progressive cancel-culture leader with extensive ties to government and global think tanks that recently labeled people questioning the COVID-19 vaccine as national security threats.

In 2017, WebMD was acquired by Internet Brands, a company under the global investment firm Kohlberg Kravis Roberts (KKR) umbrella. KKR also owns several other health-related internet brands. Since WebMD owned Medscape, it too now belongs to the KKR Internet Brands as well.

Together, HealthGuard, CCDH, WebMD and Medscape have launched a public service campaign called VaxFacts. The goal of the campaign is to “provide facts and tools to help consumers make informed decisions about vaccines,” WebMD reports.

In tandem with that campaign, Google is funding fact-checking organizations to the tune of $3 million, with the aim of countering “vaccine misinformation,” and NewsGuard maintains a “Coronavirus Misinformation Tracking Center” that includes a “Top COVID-19 Vaccine Myths Tracker.”

WebMD dominates health searches done through Google and shares user information with Google’s advertising arm and other third-party firms — a practice that is illegal in Europe.

What this means is DoubleClick, Google’s ad service, knows which prescriptions you’ve searched for on the site, thus providing you with personalized drug ads, and Facebook knows what you’ve searched for in WebMD’s symptom checker, as well as any medical diagnoses you received. I reviewed these findings in “WebMD and Healthline exposed Violating Your Privacy.”

Since most of its revenue comes from advertising, WebMD is far from an independent source of well-researched health news. For example, it has been caught shilling for Monsanto, publishing industry-friendly “articles” that are really paid advertisements known in the media world as advertorials.

Ten years ago, WebMD was also caught publishing a fake online depression screening test. In actuality, it was an advertising trick for the antidepressant Cymbalta, and there was no way for test takers to get a clean bill of mental health.

Summary

So, to recap, we find connections between the drug industry, NewsGuard/HealthGuard, educational institutions, Big Tech companies like Google, Microsoft and Bing, the U.S. State Department and DOD, global technocratic institutions like the WHO, national and global NGOs like the CCDH and the World Economic Forum, and dominating health websites like WebMD and Medscape.

Again, this is far from an exhaustive investigation of these kinds of connections. It’s merely a small sampling of readily obvious relationships. Toward the center of this web is the Publicis Groupe, the clients of which include major drug companies, Big Tech companies and financial institutions in more than 100 countries.

By the way, Publicis also began investing in artificial intelligence technology in 2017 and partnered with Microsoft in 2018 to develop a global AI platform. It also purchased the data firm Epsilon in 2019, thereby establishing ownership of first-party data — a crucially valuable resource when it comes to the use of AI.

As detailed on its website, the firm’s expertise is concentrated within four main activities: communication, media, data and technology (including AI services), and all clients have access to its expertise in all of these areas.

While it’s easy to dismiss Publicis as just another ad agency, I believe it would be foolish to underestimate its power to organize the kind of coordination required to shut down vaccine concerns, anti-lockdown proponents and people trying to educate their fellow man about the dangers of the Great Reset, which is being brought forth as a “necessary” post-COVID step.

While these things may seem unrelated, they’re really not. As mentioned, the Great Reset involves everything — including health, education, government, economics, redistribution of wealth, business practices, environmental “protections” and much more.

Can’t get enough, insatiable, push, push and push no end in sight. All about power/greed and who will be allowed to rule the world. No shortage of godly candidates.

Nature versus Ego’s

Above & Beyond Duality

Click here for the video link please and the original.

Viewer discernment is highly recommended at all times.

With the world seemingly in chaos, there is a select number of starseeds now who are making contact with higher beings. Are you one of them? How do you become one of them? Great message!

Above & Beyond Duality
WEB: www.abovebeyondduality.com
YOUTUBE: https://www.youtube.com/user/aboveand…
INSTA: https://instagram.com/aboveandbeyondd…
TELEGRAM: https://t.me/abovedualityAOP

Links For LightWorkers!
►GOD’S GOLD 👉 http://tinyurl.com/activatetheLIGHT
►LIGHTWORKER JOURNALS 👉 https://shorturl.at/tGHIT
►PLEIADIAN AUDIOBOOKS 👉 https://amzn.to/47nmbFV
►JOIN THE SPIRITUAL NETFLIX 👉 https://shorturl.at/zAJ78

ashtarcommand #lordashtar #ashtar #chemtrails

“Starseeds This Is EXTREMELY Important…” | Ashtar Command Energy Update

Transcript

Dear brothers and sisters of Earth I am Ashtar I come to be with you at this time of great change a pivotal era not just for your planet but for the cosmic tapestry to which we all belong as we journey through these transformative times.

I bring a message of Enlightenment and hope particularly for the star seed Souls among you you the star seeds are experiencing an profound activation a kindling of the ancient wisdom and Cosmic Consciousness that resides within your very essence.
(Know that we are assisting Earth as much as we are allowed to at this time. I love you I believe in you and whether you believe it or not I will see you.)

This Awakening is no mere coincidence it is intricately linked to the increased solar activity from our
magnificent Suns the sun codes emanating from the seventh Central Sun of Illumination are cascading onto your planet in waves of powerful high frequency vibrational energy these waves are catalysts triggering an evolutionary leap within your spiritual DNA.

This is a time of remembrance and empowerment as the solar energies intensify so too does your connection to the central Sun of a illumination.

This connection is illuminating your path igniting your inner light and activating your Soul’s inate
abilities you are stepping into a new realm of existence where the latent talents wisdom and knowledge of your soul are coming to the for embrace these gifts for they are the keys to unlocking your full potential as a star seed as a beacon of light in this world.

Many many of you have become overly concerned about the increase of chemical trails or geoengineering programs in your towns and cities know; your true connection to the sun actually Bears little relation to physical sight of the Sun in other words you do not have to feel the Sun or physically be in the sun to activate deeper dormant DNA.
All you have to do is close your eyes and connect to the solar energies in meditation this is exponentially more effective than the physical version while the physical absorbing of the sun’s Rays carries many benefits we in the galactic Realms urge you to see beyond the physical and especially when it comes to activations from the Sun.

Remember the shift you are undergoing is not just an individual Journey but a collective one as each star seed becomes activated the collective consciousness of humanity Rises. You are not alone in this
transformation we the Ashtar command are ever present guiding and supporting you from the higher Dimensions.

We are aiding Earth’s transition resp in the universal laws of non-interference yet providing assistance within those boundaries my dear friends we in the Ashtar command are watching you closely from afar.

Know that we are assisting Earth as much as we are allowed to at this time.
Many of you are ready, visiting with us in dream time but have chosen not to remember.
I love you I believe in you and whether you believe it or not I will see you.

Trying to Implement/Force the so-far Hidden NWO Agendas/resulting in a worldwide war.

Trying to Implement the so-far Hidden NWO Agenda’s and resulting in a worldwide war.

Alien intervention; Allies of Humanity & Galactic federation/lightworkers, multidimensional beings.
Alien interventions are ongoing for thousands of years but have been vigorously denied by people and
others in any way possible including murder, kidnapping and experimenting on humans with impunity.


One of the examples being the underground complex in Dulce and despite countless screams for help
and evidence ignored and continued over decades. The current estimate is that their are at least 5000 of these deep underground complexes and most connected by underground tunnels.

Please read about the so-called nightmare Hall. That almost all astronauts ( Moon) did pay a visite there. Have a look at the business register of it, have a look at the inhabitants-underground wars and lost.

Main article; I did select the Questions & Answers as published by the Allies of humanity and compare it with the
information available online.

We, humans are deliberately mislead, lied to, cheated, used as Guinea pigs, killed over a very long
period of time and according to the Question/answers their are currently no Aliens here on planet earth doing their bidding without past involvement.

They must have been aware of what is/was going on on planet Earth, and behind WHO/WEF/ and many others and very actively involved in WW2.
In fact the origin of many if not most of our technical development.

It is now so bad that most of the current human part of the population/subconsciousness is traumatised and in need of treatment. It was Ron Hubbard who discovered it due to treating people who were able to regain information/experiences out of their past. The CIA intervened and destroyed Scientology from the inside out.

Every thing that should have been sacrale as far as humanity is concerned supressed/abused and destroyed by their so-called elected leaders/puppets. Pre selected before even an election take place and most recent during the election of the than new leader. Both candidates being WEF members.

I leave it to you to make up your own mind but realise that we, you, me and the general population have been kept in the dark despite the decades of knowledge and presence of aliens, nor being asked. Push, push and push!
The current wars/manipulations upheaval based/needed to grab centralised control of the humans on planet earth/resources.


When that happens parts of planet earth and not just their resources after which the complete continent off Africa be sold off. Africa is worlds richest part in minerals and size.

While we, you and me and others will rejoice the so-called re-established freedom and official claimed the end of the century of slavery again, another secret deal be completed. The deal was formalised during Nelson Mandela official funeral. All important leaders of the World in attendance without Russia/China. Marduk’s installed as King of Africa and transfer announced/sold.


Also part of the deal between them and the UN to decimate the current human population to 1 billion. Main argument because of CO2 and claimed/presented as climate changer and nonsenses, climate on Earth has been changing since the earth being formed and nothing news.

Original because of the resulting of temperature and changed into climate change and because of that pending calamity.

Do not mis-understand me please, the Earth is in a bad shape due to pollution and toxification of Land/Water/Air and food but has nothing to do with CO2.


Trying now to forceful Establishing of total control and chipping all humans. To make sure nobody will be able to escape/brain washed.

Allies of humanity

SEVENTH BRIEFING:
Questions & Answers
We are pleased to be able to respond to these questions, for we know they are important in giving you a
greater understanding. You will need this understanding now, for the world is changing and your future and destiny is before you. It is our privilege to share this greater wisdom with you. We can only hope that it can be comprehended correctly and applied correctly, for such things can be misconstrued and grave error can arise from them. Let us begin now.


“How are you different from those forces who are intervening in the world today?”

We represent those free races in your region of space who still value individual freedom and who have stayed out of the larger networks of trade and commerce conducted by nations that, though powerful, do not honor individual freedom and do not recognize the power of Knowledge in the individual as a blessing and as a great resource.

We come here not to intervene but to share our wisdom and perspective that humanity will need now to proceed with greater certainty and greater strength and understanding in its engagement with life in the universe.
You cannot give yourself this education. It cannot be taught in your universities or centers of learning.
Therefore, it must be given to you by others who value your presence in the universe and do not want to see you fall under the persuasion and domination of foreign powers.

Therefore, our intent is entirely different from that of the Intervention. Our societies are entirely
different. Our focus and our wisdom are entirely different. If you can understand that humanity must unite
itself and gather its own strength and wisdom without foreign control, then you will understand why we are not intervening in the world, but instead only offering our wisdom, perspective and guidance for you to use or not to use, as you so choose.


“What does the Intervention want here on Earth?”

The Intervention seeks to control this world and the world’s peoples. It does this not only to meet its own
goals of wealth and resource acquisition, but to serve larger powers who secretly will use the Intervention
to gain control of the world. These larger powers would not dare to enter the world as the Intervention is
doing now, but they will use these more unscrupulous forces to achieve their own goals of influence and
acquisition.

The Intervention wants a compliant humanity. It does not want a rebellious humanity, for it could not manage that. The Intervention wants humanity to work agreeably—believing in its goals, principles and promises.
These, of course, are false and deceiving, and it would be the gravest of errors if humanity were to follow
these mandates.

Therefore, understand that you now have competition from the universe—competition for the value and the
resources of this world, its strategic position and those things that are secretly hidden here beyond human awareness, which are of immense value to those races in the universe who are aware of them.

From this point forward, you will have to defend your world from intervention and from persuasion, which can be very powerful and very influential. These powers have been exerted in our worlds to the great detriment of our peoples, and we had to fight and struggle to regain our freedom and to ward off these influences and to keep them out of our districts.

It is the price in the universe where freedom is rare.

Freedom requires vigilance. Freedom requires great care and great discernment. Humanity must develop these skills and these qualities if it is to survive in a diverse and influential universe, if it is to remain free
and self-determined amidst the presence of other powerful forces.


“Are any of the visitors beneficial to humanity?”

No one who is visiting your world now or in recent times is beneficial to humanity.
They all represent competing forces vying for power and influence here. They are all part of the Intervention, which is made up of more than one race. If you could understand your situation more thoroughly, then you would recognize that intervention in any form is detrimental to humanity and that such intervention is being carried out for self-interest to gain control and to gain domination.

No true ally of humanity would be in the world trying to manipulate human awareness, trying to control human behavior, trying to steer human destiny to its own ends.

Therefore, you are facing an unequivocal situation. You do not have the burden of trying to tell friend from foe amongst those who are intervening in the world. That would be very difficult for you to do, given the powers of persuasion that are being placed upon humanity at this time.

You have the benefit of facing a clear and unequivocal situation. Those who are visiting your world are here to manipulate and to deceive. They feel that their goals are correct and that they more than you could rule humanity beneficially. But that is according to their values, which does not esteem in any way individual freedom, nor does it value the greater qualities of the human nature and the achievements of humanity.


“Will anyone from space come to save humanity?”

No one will come to save humanity, and those who claim to be here for this purpose represent the Intervention itself. If humanity is ever to become strong and self-determined in the universe, it must save itself.
What it needs from other races in the universe is the kind of wisdom and guidance we are providing through these sets of Briefings. This is what any other society in the universe who cares about humanity’s future and freedom could give in a world where a divided humanity is struggling with itself, despoiling its world and undermining the three basic achievements that are necessary for freedom: unity, self-sufficiency and discretion.

Do not think that others will come here to save humanity, for they will come here to save the world for
themselves, and humanity will be but a resource they will use to achieve their own goals. Do not be foolish and naïve. Do not think that other races would expend the energy and invest themselves to such a great degree just to assure your freedom, for such an investment must be for their own purposes.
This requires careful thought and consideration on your part, a very sober approach and a greater objectivity.


“If conquest is not allowed in this region of space, how can an Intervention occur and be successful?”

Conquest is not allowed in this region of space, so other means are sought through inducements, through the offering of gifts of technology and through persuading a native race that it alone cannot govern itself or assure its own future. It is these same persuasions that humanity places upon itself through its commercial and political persuasions.

Humanity has a greater destiny and a greater potential. Humanity can establish a sustainable use of this world.
It can establish this security and stability, but it will have to proceed very differently than it is
proceeding now. Otherwise, it will think that others will come to give it gifts, to uplift its science and
technology, to show it how to live in peace.

But this is where you are vulnerable and fall easily under foreign persuasion. For such a peace does not
exist amongst those who are intervening in the world. And there is no free energy in the universe that is truly free.

They will come to exploit you and to take advantage of your expectations and your naiveté.
Therefore, you must be very wary here and very cautious. It is these powers of persuasion and powers of
influence in the mental environment that will have such a great impact upon human thinking, human expectations and human emotions.

Here you either make yourself available to such persuasion, or you recognize you must resist it.
Here humanity’s approach will make all the difference, for truly a small non-military force could gain
ascendancy in the world without the use of force. It could do this through the power of persuasion and by
offering the native people things that they think they want. This is how native peoples have been seduced
throughout human history by other intervening powers. Now you are facing intervening forces from the universe, whose persuasion is much more sophisticated and much more powerful. If you are in their proximity, they can control your thinking, your feelings and your perception. This is the power they have of influence in the mental environment.

You can withstand this power because of the presence of Knowledge within yourself, the Knowledge that the Creator of all life has placed within you. For it cannot be persuaded. It cannot be deceived.
And it cannot be corrupted. You will need to gain access to this greater Knowledge if you are to remain
free and to develop wisdom and maturity in the Greater Community.


“What role, if any, do our governments play in assisting the activities of the Intervention?”

Some governments have assisted the Intervention, only to find it is working against them, and that it is
deceptive and untrustworthy. Major governments in the world today have had contact in the past and have made certain agreements to allow the Intervention to function here in exchange for certain kinds of technology.
ut this has given license to a very dangerous intrusion into the human world and into human societies.
Its influence is considerable and is directed to those individuals who are deemed to be the most compliant and the most easily persuaded.

But in recent times, there has been a shift to influence those in positions of leadership in commerce, for
they are not accountable to the public. They are unelected and go largely unrecognized by the human population. They garner tremendous wealth, and they do not claim to have great scruples, such as your elected officials might proclaim. They can operate in secrecy, with very little accountability to anyone.

There has been a change, therefore, in the Intervention’s emphasis to move towards individuals in positions of leadership in commerce, particularly regarding resource acquisition and distribution.
For these individuals hold great power in these arenas and are far more easily persuaded.
Your people know not of what is occurring in your midst.


“Are any of the world’s governments resisting the Intervention?”

Yes, the United States and Russia are resisting the Intervention. That is one of the reasons they have ceased their competition that was so destructive over many decades. They are more cooperative now, for they realize they need one another to be successful in offsetting the impacts and the persuasion that is being cast upon humanity.

There are smaller governments assisting now, but primarily it is these two greater powers that hold such great military strength and persuasion in the world. It is they who had fallen under alien deception, and it is they who have now turned against the Intervention. That is why our contact on Earth, Marshall Vian Summers, can receive this information and can receive our Briefings and counsel without fear of government suppression.

He is being watched, we are sure, though we cannot tell to what extent. He is providing a service not only to the peoples of the world, but also to those governments who are aware of the Intervention and who are now opposing its presence and its activities in the world.


“Human scientists say that no one can travel faster than the speed of light. Therefore, how is it possible
that the Intervention can come here or even that you could come here?”

This premise is certainly one that limits human understanding. If you could not travel faster than these
speeds, you could not travel in space at all, and that perhaps is the assumption of many who still think
that this is a barrier that cannot be surpassed.

Even before there were any human civilizations in the world, space travel was underway to a very large and sophisticated extent. You can travel faster than the speed of light and counteract its effect on time and aging, and this has been practiced far longer than any human civilization.

But travel is not as fast as you might think or imagine. It still takes time to travel between solar
systems—sometimes, in your estimation and time frame, days and weeks or even months, depending on the distance one has to traverse. This, of course, would be astoundingly fast according to your notion,
but you are still crawling along at a slow pace while other nations have been engaged in commerce,
trade and travel for hundreds of thousands of your years, even in your region of space.

You do not live in some newly developed part of the universe. There has been a long history in this region, longer even than we can account for—a history of early war, conquest and conflict. This has been surpassed by a greater unity, a great network of trade and a great network of control—which has suppressed war and conflict, but which has also suppressed freedom and self-determination amongst its participating nations.

Therefore, you must consider that this barrier, called the speed of light, is something that humanity, in
some distant future, will be able to overcome. Even on its own it will find a way to do this. But surely
it cannot hold to such a limit as being defining. For we have come to be near the Earth, and now we are far away from the Earth, and the Intervention has come to intervene in the world, which it is doing now ever so greatly with each passing year. Trade and commerce is going on in many regions inside the galaxy, and we may only assume in other galaxies as well. So never think that technology in the universe is limited by human understanding or accomplishment.


“When will humanity be able to travel outside this solar system?”

Your travel outside this solar system may be possible within the next two centuries, but we say “may be
possible” because you will have to face the great environmental change that is occurring in your world,
which has the power to undermine human civilization. And you also have to face the consequences of
intervention in your world, which could usurp human authority here and place humanity under foreign
control and domination. Either of these two events could alter the course of human destiny thoroughly,
could stifle and control humanity’s accomplishments and its destiny as a free and self-determined peoples in the universe.

Therefore, there are great dangers facing you now, and that is why our Briefings are so important and why we have been called by greater Spiritual Powers to come to the Earth to deliver our messages to a worthy world and a worthy people.


“You speak of individual freedom being rare in the universe. Why is this so?”

Freedom is difficult to cultivate. It can be unruly and disorganized. It can lead to dangerous individual assertions. It can have disastrous consequences if it is not governed wisely and conscientiously.
It is far easier for nations to exert control and to establish authority over their peoples and societies.
That is why most nations choose this easier and more expedient path, even though it leads to a far less productive and creative outcome.

Freedom is difficult to cultivate even on an individual level. It requires responsibility.
It requires awareness. It requires wise governance and counsel. It requires a wise leadership and a willing
and educated population. These things are all very challenging to establish, and that is why many nations
choose the alternative route to stability.

We believe, however, that the path of individual freedom leads to a stronger nation and to greater
creativity and accomplishments amongst its citizens for the benefit of all. We believe that repressive
societies, though they may be common in the universe, do not have this creativity and cannot benefit
from the wisdom and the greater purpose that each person carries. Thus, their achievements are limited,
and they tend to copy one another, for they are not creative. New technology, new wisdom and new ways of creative social governance are not established in these nations. They are conservative, and they resist
progressive thinking and progressive accomplishments.

Here humanity must see that it has one of two pathways to follow in establishing greater security and
stability in the world. It will either create a repressive regime that will enforce order and stifle the
creativity and freedom of individuals. Or it will choose the more difficult path of establishing a freer,
more creative and more productive society.

It is our hope and wish that humanity will choose the path of freedom and build the freedom that it has
already established in many parts of the world. It has, of course, a long way to go in doing this, and it
is not an easy task. But now with the prospect of diminishing resources in the world and the presence of
intervening, manipulative forces, humanity faces a great challenge in this regard.

You can never take your freedom for granted in the universe. Freedom is a privilege and not merely a right. It must be built with strength and wisdom, and it must be protected with vigilance, always.


“If you were caught by the Intervention, what would happen to you and would there be consequences for your own worlds?”

If we were to be caught by the intervening forces, we would be tortured and exposed to cruel punishment to extract from us any information that we might have. Our home worlds would be discerned, and great external pressure would be brought to bear upon the leaders of our nations regarding our presence and influence here in the world. For our worlds have established agreements of non-interference in regions outside of our own, and this is what gives us our autonomy, an autonomy that is always fragile and under scrutiny for the possibility of revision.

According to our agreements, we are not allowed to be in the vicinity of your world giving such counsel,
even if we are not directly intervening. But we are nearby, and our purpose is noble and worthy and guided by a greater Source. So certainly we would be tortured and destroyed, those of us who are gathered for this purpose.

And our worlds would come under greater scrutiny and tremendous pressure, and our contracts
guaranteeing our autonomy would be threatened and challenged.

This would be grave for our leadership. Therefore, we act with the greatest secrecy. That is why we do not
describe our appearance. That is why we do not give our names, describe our worlds or tell you where our worlds reside. It is of the utmost importance to us that these things remain secret. We have not even
revealed them to our contact here on Earth. Nor would we do so. For any human mind can be interfered with, and its understanding can be extracted by those intervening forces in the world now.

Therefore, you must understand the importance of discretion. That is why it is one of the three requirements for establishing and maintaining freedom in the universe: unity, self-sufficiency and discretion.
You are only at the beginning of learning about the power of the mental environment.
You are only beginning to learn how other races can gain access to human wisdom and understanding.
You are only beginning to realize how much your freedom will have to be guarded and protected if it is to
be sustained in a universe where freedom is rare.


“The Briefings state that the Intervention is promoting human conflict. How does it do this?
Can you give us an example of what you have seen so far?”

You have but to promote religious extremism and nationalism and to convince the leaders and persuasive
individuals that other peoples represent their enemy and a threat. You have only to project the images
of spiritual saints and emissaries proclaiming the need to overcome adversaries. This is how the
Intervention can promote conflict in the world. The United States’ engagement and its war in the nation
of Iraq is a very good example of leaders being persuaded to do something that is utterly foolish, to
engage in an intractable conflict with no certain outcome, committing so much of its resources, even
risking world opinion to engage in this manner. Other nations, particularly nations that are powerful and
influential, will be engaged in this way through persuasion by the Intervention—to diminish their power,
o diminish their influence, to diminish the morale of their own peoples and to diminish their economies.
For the Intervention needs humanity to decline in order to present itself as truly beneficial to human destiny.

Therefore, the Intervention will seek to weaken the strongest powers to degrade their influence in the world
and to create an overall situation where the Intervention will be deemed truly valuable, and its counsel and
its guidance will be attended to and followed.


“You also indicate that the Intervention is pacifying people. How can it pacify people and yet promote human conflict?”

The Intervention is pacifying certain populations—the young people, the educated, those who are spiritually
inclined, those who could not be encouraged to wage war or conflict against others. Those who could be the
greatest emissaries for the Intervention will be pacified and directed. They will believe in the new
eadership. They will believe that the Intervention is here to save a struggling and declining humanity.

Those who cannot be pacified can be encouraged to engage in their ancient animosities and their distrust
of their neighbors, and to fortify their resistance and hostility towards their historic enemies.
Lands can be contested. Resources will be contested increasingly. Even within nations, there will be groups who will arise, who will seek to destabilize and overtake those nations.
Many groups will be governed by religious ideology, governed not only by the defaults of human nature, but also by the influence and guidance exerted by the Intervention itself.


“Is the Intervention manipulating food production or any other industries here on Earth?”

The Intervention does not need to manipulate food production, as it is declining as a result of humanity’s
impact on your own environment. Other industries, such as the military industries—industries that supply and support military efforts and military adventures—these are certainly being encouraged. There are forces encouraging human conflict. This represents the impact of the Intervention. While there is an incentive for peace, there is also an incentive for conquest. That is why many nations are building their military capacity. At least they were when we were last in the vicinity of your world, and we must assume that this is continuing.

This is not only the result of human mistrust and human fear. It also represents the impact of the
Intervention. The Intervention is not threatened by your weapons. Only nuclear power and nuclear
weapons threaten its existence here. And these things cannot be used without great consequence to the
welfare and to the future of humanity.

The Intervention is using power in the mental environment—the powers of persuasion, powers which humanity is only beginning to discern and to understand. Humanity still thinks that military power will determine its fate and its future, but in a universe of greater skill and greater influence, this will not prove to be effective. This represents a new threshold of learning and accomplishment for the human family.


“Can you reveal where the Intervention bases on Earth are so that we can shut them down?”

We do not have full knowledge of this. Certainly, the first bases were established in the oceans and shallow waters, away from the presence of human military forces—in the Arctic regions and in areas where there is no military establishment.

Bases underground, which are far more difficult to establish, have been built in mountain regions. Transmitters have been established in mountain regions, which have cities at their base—transmitters to affect the mental environment and pacify the public. This represents one of the efforts of the Intervention.

We do not know where all of these transmitters have been placed, but we do know they are being used.
We do not know where all the bases have been established, particularly on land. We were never near enough to the surface of the Earth to be able to witness these things ourselves and can only understand their existence by deciphering the transmissions of the Intervention. Yet it is enough for you to know that
such bases exist here and that there is a significant alien presence in the world.
It is not a military presence. It represents the skillful use of commercial forces by those who have gained
power and influence in the mental environment.

You will have to change your understanding of the use of power to realize how strong an influence this is
and how much more effective it is towards establishing your goals and priorities than the exertion of
military power. The exertion of military power is restrained in your world, and it is greatly suppressed
in this part of the galaxy.


“If the Intervention is overcome, what should humanity do with all the individuals who are a result of the hybridization program?”

If the Intervention can be overcome, you will face future interventions. But regarding the presence of such
individuals, you will have to reincorporate them into the human society, and that will require a great
investment of time and energy. These individuals will actually be able to be beneficial participants in
society, but their understanding and the influences upon them will have to change remarkably.

Some could become wise seers. But it is their allegiance to humanity that will have to be fully established, and they will have to learn to shield themselves from the effects of the Intervention, which can influence them even if the Intervention is not present in the world. For in space, influence in the mental environment can accrue over vast distances. Once influence has been established, this can take place.

This will be a challenge. These individuals can become beneficial to humanity if their allegiance can be
placed here and if persuasions upon them can be minimized or eliminated.


“Inter-dimensional travel seems to be the fastest way to get around in space. Why is it not being used?”

Inter-dimensional travel, though greatly promising, has proven to be disastrous, for you cannot control your reentry, and even if you could find one of the portals, which are constantly in motion, you would not be able to ascertain where you would emerge—into what kind of physical environment or physical condition you would find yourself. That is why so many craft that have attempted this transference have never returned.

The portals remain a mystery. Inter-dimensional travel remains a hypothesis. We know that certain races havebeen able to bridge the gulf between dimensions. They have been able to communicate from the other dimension, but they were not able to return, and contact with them was short lived, leading to an uncertain outcome.

Humanity hopes and believes that such things will be available to it so that it can travel anywhere it wants, to move across the galaxy in an instant, to emerge in any environment. But the reality of the Greater Community will change these notions, will temper your ambitions and will show you a very different reality than the one that you imagine for yourself.

Even if you could emerge through such travel, you would end up in the vicinity of foreign worlds with whom you do not have relations or in physical environments that are entirely hazardous. You would have no way of charting a corridor route there unless you had allies existing in that region. And such alliances would be very difficult to establish, for no race wants to be intruded upon by races from afar in this manner.
This would be a challenge to their security and to their network of local trade.
They would be greatly threatened by the appearance of a foreign race with whom they had no history or
relations.

You have but to think of these things more carefully, more objectively, to see and to understand what we are conveying to you. This requires a serious consideration. Otherwise, you will continue to indulge in fantasies of high technology and instantaneous space travel. But you will have to face a very different reality as you emerge into a Greater Community of life.


“Many people here on Earth would love to travel to other worlds and meet other races there, yet you indicate that this would be very limited. Why is this the case?”

Most nations do not welcome visitation unless it is from those who are its longstanding trading partners, and even here visitation will be limited, for societies do not want to be influenced by other societies.
Certainly any free nation would not be welcome to visit a nation that is not free.

Then there is the problem of biological contamination. We can think of no world where humanity would be welcome at all given the biological reality of your world and the tremendous threat it could impose upon a foreign world. They are not prepared to deal with the innumerable biological agents and influences that exist here, and to receive an emissary from Earth would be a very challenging prospect for them.

If they were not a free society, they would not be interested in your individual expressions.
They would be threatened by your music and your art. They would not want these influences to be exerted upon their cultures. They would not want their own populations to witness you or to understand you, for in this, you would be a great threat to them and to all they have invested in establishing their
highly controlled societies.

You would not be able to reach other nations because you would have to cross territories owned by others.
You would have to use trade routes governed by trading authorities. You would have to make agreements and compromises. You would have to come to terms with many other powers just to travel freely in this region of space. If you traveled outside these established routes, you would always face the danger of piracy. You would also face the danger of becoming lost.

Even amongst our worlds, we would not welcome human visitation at this time, for you are not yet wise enough, united enough or discerning enough for us to establish active relations with you. That is why no one should be intervening in the world. No one should be attempting to establish relations with the human family, and those that do are here for their own purposes, to establish their own quest for power and domination.

You, who are naïve and do not understand the realities of life and travel in the universe, have yet to see
these things clearly. But if you think carefully about this, you will understand. There are nations even
within your own world that you could not visit freely at this moment because they are not free, because they would not welcome your influence and your presence in their midst. Though such nations are few, their examples serve to illustrate what we are saying.

The universe is far more diverse, and its societies are far more different from one another than anything you have established here on Earth. Races are far more different from each other. And trust in relations can take a very long time to establish and is always maintained with great scrutiny and care. This represents the reality that you will face as you emerge into this larger arena of life.


“It appears very likely that we will run out of at least some of our essential resources in the near future.
How can human civilization continue if we do not receive technology and assistance from our neighbors in space?

If you seek to gain technology and assistance, you will be drawn into the persuasions, requirements and the commercial trade networks of other nations. They will limit your freedom. They will limit what you can do here on Earth. They will influence the kind of societies you will create in the future and will greatly limit the freedom allowed your citizens. You would give up so much for this technology and assistance.
You do not yet realize what a great loss this would be and how much humanity would lose in the exchange.

You have enough here on Earth if humanity will govern itself wisely and if nations will cooperate sufficiently to preserve the resources of the world and to use them in a sustainable manner. You will need to build new technology, but even more than technology, you will need the will and the cooperation to do this.

Over time, humanity will have to find beneficial and humane ways of limiting its population and limiting its consumption. It would be a very different world than the world you live in today, which is based upon the desire and the expectation of endless growth and expansion.

To be self-sufficient is one of the requirements for freedom. For humanity to be self-sufficient in this
world would require a very different creation of society and a very different set of priorities for your
leaders and your citizens.

What will bring about this great change but necessity itself? You are facing great change in the world—great environmental change, great change that all advancing technological societies have had to face or will have to face inevitably in their evolution. It is how you recognize and prepare for this, how you respond to this and what kind of society you build, whether it be free or repressive, that will determine the future of human existence in this world.


“Are there many worlds such as ours in space?”

There are many worlds that have been stripped of their natural resources and have become barren as a result.
Certainly, terrestrial worlds such as yours are rare, maybe one out of five or six thousand planets contain
the biological diversity that you enjoy and take for granted here in your world. That still accounts for many planets in the universe. But such planets are always occupied, are always valued and the native races always have to defend their rights, their privileges and their stewardship as they begin to emerge into the Greater Community.

Terrestrial planets create biological hazards for visitors. And that is why colonization is usually attempted
once the native race has either established a usable network that the visitors can use, such as is the case
here on Earth, or have destroyed themselves through conflict and war, leaving an open door for intervention to occur, even military intervention. Military intervention is allowed in this region of space under such conditions. This represents part of the ethics of contact that are assumed and are practiced by many nations in this part of the Greater Community.


“Many people conclude that the visitors are beneficial because they haven’t already attacked us and taken over. What would you say to this?”

The Intervention is not here to attack humanity but to persuade humanity. The Intervention needs a compliant humanity to work for it and to engage with it to become part of its Collective. This assumption that humanity would be attacked and overtaken is entirely wrong. It is how you view gaining access to new lands and new resources.

But even in your modern world, economic, more than military, forces are used to gain acquisition to resources, and this is what is happening to the world regarding its relations in space. You are encountering small, economic Collectives who are here to begin the process of acquisition that larger nations can assume later on, if the Intervention is successful in establishing its presence and its power in your world.

To think that you would be attacked is wrong, and to think that because you have not been attacked that the forces that are here are beneficial is wrong. Both are based upon false assumptions. Therefore, the
conclusions are incorrect.

Humanity, living so long in isolation and being so warlike yourselves, is certainly likely to make such
assumptions and to continue to believe in them and to uphold them. It is human ignorance that gives rise
to such things, and human arrogance as well. For you may be preeminent in your own world, but you have no preeminence in the Greater Community, and you are not looked upon favorably by your nearest neighbors because of your warlike tendencies and destructive use of your environment.

Those neighbors who are not free will look upon the freedoms that you have cultivated thus far with great anxiety and with great concern, not wanting these influences to be exerted within their own worlds.
You have no idea what your music and your dance could evoke in such worlds and why they are viewed as a threat to those controlling powers that dominate them.


“How do free races maintain their autonomy and keep races that are not free from interfering?”

Ah, this is the challenge! This is the challenge that awaits you if you are able to offset the Intervention
that is occurring in the world today. The interest in your world will not cease, and attempts to influence
you will continue. How would you keep such influences at bay? For free races living in larger neighborhoods of worlds that are not free, often this requires the signing of non-interference contracts, which stipulate generally that the free nations will not participate beyond their boundaries and areas or regions of influence.
They will not try to exert or promote their freedom abroad. In exchange for this, other nations agree to stay out of their areas of influence and to not contact them directly.

So various kinds of contracts like this are often made in highly inhabited regions of space, but such
contracts are subject to change and reevaluation, and that is why the free nations do not travel beyond
their districts or seek to promote freedom abroad. For that would violate their own autonomy and their own insulation from the Greater Community itself.

In areas where there is not a large concentration of nations, free nations will have to maintain their
security through military means, aggressively challenging anyone who would come into their vicinity.
This is less desirable, of course, but in sparsely populated regions in uncharted territories, this is
definitely required. Everyone in the universe is looking for resources. Many in the universe want to have influence over other nations. Even in largely inhabited regions such as this, these desires and these needs continue.

Therefore, it is a tenuous balance that a free nation or a group of free nations must establish in order to
keep the Greater Community out of their territories and to prevent the kind of intervention that is occurring in the world today.

Humanity still thinks the universe is a great empty place awaiting exploration, awaiting colonization, with infinite resources there for the taking, if only humanity can establish a sufficient technology to gain access to them. Yet these assumptions all stem from your isolation and your profound ignorance about the nature of life, commerce and interactions in the Greater Community.

We understand this, and we do not condemn you for it, for we too had many of the same assumptions before contact with the Greater Community began for us, before intervention was attempted in our worlds.
Since then, we have established greater autonomy, but it must be guarded carefully, both in the physical
environment and in the mental environment.

Other nations employ seers who try to see into our worlds, to see what kind of technology we are producing and to see where our power and our weakness reside. We must offset these intrusions in the mental environment with seers of our own, who are guided by Knowledge, who would obstruct this kind of intervention in the mental environment.

This is all a new frontier to you and to human science and to human religion. Power in the mental environment in many ways can be equivalent to power in the physical environment, and the dangers and defenses that must be established here are significant. This is the price of freedom in the universe—constant vigilance, constant care and great responsibility.


“You keep mentioning that Knowledge is the most powerful force in the universe. How can that be true when there are so many other powerful forces to deal with?”

Knowledge represents the power to see, to know and to act with certainty. It also represents the power to
resist persuasion, deception and influence in the mental environment. The individual or the nation that has this strength has the power to resist intervention and to comprehend the intentions and the activities of other nations who might be threatening to its freedom or existence.

It is the ultimate form of intelligence, you see, and seers who are guided by Knowledge are more powerful than seers who are not. Here you are able to discern the future and future events before they happen, with varying degrees of accuracy. Here you are able to discern the intentions of others and the capabilities of others without the use of technology. Here you can pretend to be weak when in fact you are really strong.
Here you can appear to be non-aggressive when in fact you can be incisive in your inquiries. Here you can be well protected and well defended without requiring a great military force or infrastructure.
Here you can make wise decisions regarding your relations with other nations even if their intentions are
questionable or uncertain. Here you can engage in diplomacy with other nations with far more certainty than you would have otherwise.

It is this power and this Knowledge that humanity will need if it is to gain the strength and commitment to establish greater unity amongst its nations and the wise and sustaining use of the world. This will overcome greed and avarice. This will overcome competition, conflict and war. This will overcome grievance and hatred and inequality.

That is why Knowledge is the greatest power in the universe. It is a power that the Intervention is not using, or it would not be here engaged in the activities it is undertaking. This is the power that will give humanity the power to offset intervention and to prevent future interventions. This is the power to give humanity the stability to establish a new world with far greater equanimity and equality, justice and freedom.

Think upon these things.


The current Elite Global Agenda or Alien intervention.

Ongoing Hidden Agendas Right Now in The World on planet Earth.

Click her for the video link.

Clandestine machinations that have long eluded our perception and join a community seeking enlightenment and transformation. If you yearn to elevate your spiritual journey and immerse yourself in the wisdom of Dolores Cannon, lightworkers, and multidimensional beings, this video is your gateway to higher consciousness and the divine essence within.

This video offers a glimpse into the law of assumption, lighting the way for you, the lightworkers of today,
to engage in a life-altering spiritual journey. Let’s investigate the unseen forces Dolores Cannon has
revealed that shape our cosmic history and prepare the way for a transformative, enlightened existence on his new Earth.

Your voice matters in this grand narrative, so share your journey of ascension and how you are working to
raise your vibration. Together, we are co-creating a new paradigm of higher consciousness and a world
brimming with divine essence. 🙏✨

CHAPTERS:
00:00 – Global Events Update
01:48 – Elite Global Agenda
03:18 – Instagram Post From Tom Hanks
05:16 – Vaccines as Army Of Control
06:57 – Media Awakening Insights
08:49 – Manipulation Behind The Scenes
09:57 – Alien Existence Revealed
11:09 – Gaia Called Cosmic Disclosure

Global Events Update

You may be wondering what these plans are and how they are changing the world, right?
Before we start, have you ever thought that there might be more to the world than what we see?

I’m going to talk about some things that happen behind the scenes that we don’t usually see.
To be honest, some of the things I’m about to say may sound a little crazy, but I’m sure there are three
secret plans going on right now that you should be aware of.

Trust me when I say that you will want to know about them even if you don’t think you need to.

Dolores Cannon was a groundbreaking hypnotherapist and author who made important contributions to our spiritual and metaphysical knowledge. In her writing, she often talked about forces that we can’t see.In books like The Convoluted Universe, she went deep into the dimensions that are beyond our normal understanding.

There, she found answers about the nature of reality and the hidden forces that control our lives. As we talk about these issues, keep in mind that I’m not just someone who looks around and makes assumptions.


I do a lot of research and I’ve known about many of these things since 2020, when I had my spiritual awakening.

At first, I didn’t pay much attention to these insights, but now I think they’re more important than ever,
especially if you have been quarantined and are starting to think about things or see patterns.

I stress how important it is to look at these issues in a positive way.

The things that are happening are unsettling, but I think many good things are happening too. The world’s energy is changing and the old systems that kept it in check are beginning to break down.

People are beginning to take back their power at this point in time.

The Elite Global Agenda.

Let’s talk about the three hidden plans I mentioned.

You may be stuck at home right now, which gives you a unique chance to think about the bigger picture. First, there is the agenda of the elite.

And by elite, I do not mean merely the very rich. It’s about a small group of powerful people who have always worked behind the scenes to stay in charge by changing people’s thoughts and actions.

It would surprise you to learn who these people are. They’re not always the ones in the spotlight.
They’re usually the ones running things from the background. The majority hasn’t been told much about this elite group, and their methods aren’t always clear.

They use their power in a sneaky way, usually through well-known people who speak for them, and reach and affect a lot of people.

This is a planned way to stay in charge and keep people from realising how powerful and capable they really are.

Let’s go deeper into this secret world and find out the long-hidden truths. We could call these people
celebrities or the elite, but the truth is that they have a lot of power because they have so many followers.

They have the power to spread specific information and subtly plant ideas in the minds of their audience
which changes people’s plans. This fascinating look goes deep into the complex web of power and influence that runs beneath the surface of our everyday lives.

Instagram Post From Tom Hanks An interesting example of this complicated relationship can be seen in an Instagram post by the famous actor Tom Hanks.

At first view,the post seems harmless because it has a normal typewriter in it.
But a closer look shows that there are many hidden messages and signs.This is where things get stranger.
The post says that Tom Hanks loves this £25 typewriter and takes it with him when he travels.

If you are going to carry such a heavy item across borders, it’s especially strange if the name of the item
has something to do with current events happening around the world.

What are the chances? Hanks talks about losing to his wife by 201 points at a game called Remy in the post.
If you look into this more, you can find links to an event from 2001 that has something to do with Bill Gates and vaccines.

This brings us to a key point. How the elite shape public opinion and readiness. They make people more open to certain ideas or actions by making them afraid and then giving them ways to deal with their fears.

What’s the most interesting thing about all of this? The obvious ways these messages are sent are right in
front of us. But many people still don’t get them.

This level of influence and messaging isn’t just seen in celebrities. It’s happening all over the place and
has big effects. What does this mean for us? It’s an invitation to pay more attention and think more deeply about the stories and information we hear.

It’s about being aware of the bigger plans at play and choosing not to be a part of them.
Think about this.

How could you get people to support vaccines? Fear is the answer. People are more open to ideas they might not have considered before if they are scared and then locked up.

It’s a plan that takes advantage of weakness and fear. Vaccines as Army Of Control.
According to the research I did, even though vaccines are said to be good for you, they may contain harmful substances that are used for control at different levels.

There is more.
At the very top, some groups do rituals that have an effect on the whole consciousness.
Think about how much energy was put into that typewriter and then shared with millions of people.
Getting over 1.6 million likes on a post like this establishes certain associations in people’s minds.

These celebrities’ actions, coded messages, and use of symbols on sites like Twitter are incredibly clear.

Madonna is another example.
She has also used the same typewriter imagery in her photos and videos,which is a pattern that is hard to
explain away as a chance event.

What does all of this mean? This refers to ways that powerful people keep most people in the dark and also try to control what happens.

But we can choose. We don’t have to take part or give these symbols power. Being aware is the most powerful thing we can have, but we also need to not be afraid.

Fear only makes them stronger in their control. I’m sure that the long-standing balance of power is changing.
The ground under these controlling entities is crumbling, which means they are losing the power they have had for a long time.

Being aware is important, but don’t give in to fear. As we become aware of these truths and make different decisions, we reclaim our power and help break down these old control systems.

Media Awakening Insights
Our planet is going through a change right now. Many people are waking up and starting to question their reality during this time.
The awakening isn’t just happening in individuals, it’s also happening in the media.

Think about this.
Six big companies run almost all of the media outlets. Imagine that they were working together to change
people’s minds by adding fear to their stories to control the masses.
When people watch the news, they hear a lot of scary stories, which makes them feel anxious and uncertain.
But there is a shift going on. More and more people are starting to see how mainstream media is full of lies and manipulation.

This realization is part of a bigger awakening of the spirit.In the next few years,I think there will be a
big change in the media landscape.

One day there may be news sources that are truly impartial and report the news in a fair and accurate way.
The way the media works now often gives a skewed picture of what’s going on in the world, making it seem like isolated events are common.

The goal of this trick is to keep people scared and dependent,looking to authorities for safety and certainty.
Due to their control by large corporations, the media rarely contradicts the narrative.

There are many stories of journalists who were punished severely for telling the truth. But this time of controlled information is coming to an end.
There is a change happening that is moving the media toward honesty and openness.
This change is very important for our shared consciousness. We reach a higher level of awareness as we move away from fear and manipulation.
Our view of the world and how we interact with it will both change because of this change.

Manipulation Behind The Scenes
The future of media isn’t just news stories. It’s a shift in how people think about things.
The way things are going is both interesting and energizing.

It’s getting harder for the people who have been manipulating things behind the scenes for a long time.
They can feel the ground breaking under them.
This change is clear even in the way they talk to each other.

On social media sites like Twitter, they often use coded messages.
It’s shockingly clear, especially when it comes to famous people like Tom Hanks.
The strange symbols they use are not just a coincidence.They are part of a bigger story.
Think about this.

A lot of people believe that the collective consciousness of all people affects our reality.
Powerful people have used Hollywood for a long time to get this information.
Movies like Contagion, which I haven’t seen but know about, reflect what’s going on in the world right now.
These productions are more than just fun. They make us think about certain situations, which affects what we expect and how we react.

Alien Existence Revealed
My goal here with you was to make my videos easy for everyone to understand by not introducing such strange topics all at once.

Now I’ll talk about the third hidden goal.
It may be hard to grasp at first, but it’s important to remember that humans are not the only ones living in the universe. The universe is very big, never-ending, and full of different kinds of life.
It is important to recognize this fact if we want to have a better understanding of our place in the universe and the events that are happening in it.

The public hasn’t been told the truth about life on other planets for a long time, but some people in power have. The old powers that relied on keeping things secret and manipulating people are seeing their systems fall apart.
I think that when this happens, there will be a big revelation.
The official acknowledgement of alien life and their interactions with humans.
This information will completely change how we think about the universe and our place in it.
We often think about our unique place in this huge universe and wonder if we’re the only intelligent beings that live here.

Gaia Called Cosmic Disclosure

People who are interested enough to look for it can find a lot of information.
A show on Gaia called Cosmic Disclosure with interesting guests has been helpful to me since I first heard it.
People like these, who are sometimes called whistleblowers, talk about the amazing things that happened when they worked with aliens at underground facilities.
These facilities are not usually run by the government, but by private companies and sometimes by the military.


This information isn’t just from far away.
In fact, this direct connection opened my eyes to the fact that governments have known for a long time that
aliens exist, but have kept this information from the public, keeping us in the dark about these important
facts.

I’m sure that in our lifetime we will see something that has never happened before, proof that aliens exist.
This new information will completely change how we think about the universe.
It will show us that we’re not alone and that many of these aliens are good and live in a higher vibrational
state of consciousness.
They know how well we are linked and wouldn’t hurt us. So there is no reason to be scared.
Instead, this is a chance to learn more about the universe we live in.
This view is similar to that of the well-known author and hypnotherapist Dolores Cannon, whose books also dealt with similar topics.
She looked into how the universe is connected and whether there are beings from other worlds through her quantum healing hypnosis technique.
Her books, like The Three Waves of Volunteers and The New Earth and The Convoluted Universe series, give deep insights into these topics, which makes it even more likely that we will hear about them in our lifetime.

Please watch my other videos for more information on how to look at conspiracy theories in a positive light and the possibility of alien contact.

If you’re still with me, I extend my gratitude for your presence, and if you wish, consider subscribing to our channel.

The Fed’s New Rescue Mechanism (Concoda)

Yahoo/Inbox

  • ConcodaFrom:concoda@substack.comTo:tracalee2000@yahoo.comTue, Feb 13 at 11:11 PMForwarded this email? Subscribe here for moreThe Fed’s New Rescue Mechanismthe central bank’s emergency facility is about to evolveCONCODAFEB 13∙PREVIEW READ IN APP After a year of neutralizing losses on banks’ underwater assets, the Federal Reserve’s BTFP (Bank Term Funding Program) is about to expire. A facility once used to quash financial panic and stimulate markets has been abused by the very banks it aimed to safeguard. Subsequently, the U.S. central bank is not only about to commence an “emergency phaseout” but assemble a new version of its primary rescue mechanism.In March 2023, the remnants of COVID-19’s speculative boom came back to haunt the banks and monetary leaders that enabled it. The failure of Fed officials and Silicon Valley Bank (SVB) executives to address the hazards of handling a vast amount of flighty deposits ended in a string of bank failures. After SVB declared an emergency restructuring on March 8th, its heavily concentrated VC investor base engaged in a coordinated exodus, pulling billions of dollars in uninsured bank deposits from the Silicon Valley giant. Following the spread of rumors on and off social media the next day, another $100 billion in deposits (and thus reserves) was set to flee SVB’s balance sheet. Since obtaining more reserves to process further customer outflows required selling bonds heavily devalued by the Fed’s rate hikes, SVB’s equity cushion was set to be wiped out. Realizing they were toast, SVB executives contacted regulators, who promptly shuttered the bank’s doors on March 10th. Still, news of SVB’s collapse paired with Silvergate Bank’s earlier demise initiated a run on the regional banking system. By Friday’s market close, a mammoth Fed intervention was looming.click to enlarge (best viewed on desktops)Upon resolving numerous failed banks and broadcasting further potential actions to calm the public, monetary leaders made their most assertive move to prevent financial turmoil from spreading. On March 12th, just before markets opened following a nervy weekend, the Fed announced the opening of its largest confidence booster: the Bank Term Funding Program, or BTFP for short. By enabling banks and other depository institutions to borrow cash (in the form of reserves) equaling the full (par) value of their securities — not the market value exposed to losses from rising interest rates, the Fed effectively bailed out banks’ interest rate (duration) risk.Although this only applied to banks’ asset portfolios, the U.S. central bank indirectly signaled to market participants that it was willing to neutralize any amount of duration risk to maintain stability. Minus a tiny blip involving the long-awaited demise of investment banking giant, Credit Suisse, the Fed’s measures reignited sentiment, sparking a durable rally in risk assets. Quantitative Teasing™ had been unleashed.click to enlarge (best viewed on desktops)As it happened, market participants correctly assessed the strength of the Fed’s interventions. Only a few poorly managed banks collapsed, while every other bank facing a squeeze turned to the BTFP for assistance. Increasing volumes at the Fed’s facility stoked fears that the banking turmoil had yet to conclude. But a few months later, the rise in BTFP loans outstanding began to slow, peaking at around $107 billion. As economic growth remained resilient and inflation rose at a slower pace, risk assets kept advancing, until increased issuance of longer-dated sovereign debt in Q3 provoked disruption in financial markets. The Treasury, however, soon performed a 180 and eased coupon issuance, marking the start of one of the sharpest equity rallies ever witnessed. By December 2023, the Fed started to deliver clear signals of rate cuts ahead. The coast finally seemed clear for the banking system.That was until volumes at the BTFP facility reaccelerated. But yet again, fears were misplaced. Increased usage delivered another false signal of impending ruin. Because Fed officials chose 1-year OIS (the 1-year overnight indexed swap rate, a forward-looking interbank borrowing measure) plus 0.10% as the cost to borrow from the facility, the BTFP rate plunged while several cuts were priced in. The BTFP consequently transformed from an emergency backstop into a risk-free arbitrage for banks, who started borrowing reserves cheaply from the facility to “lend” to the Fed at a higher rate of interest. This involved banks depositing reserves borrowed from the BTFP into their Fed master accounts to earn interest on reserve balances (IORB), profiting from roughly a 0.50% (50bps) spread.click to enlarge (best viewed on desktops)Week after week, alongside a favorable economic outlook and some of the loosest financial conditions on record, arbitrage trades pushed BTFP volumes higher, peaking at around $170 billion outstanding. Then, on January 25th, 2024, the Fed suddenly revealed it would no longer accept new BTFP loans after the facility expires on March 11th, 2024. The U.S. central bank also killed the BTFP arbitrage, raising the facility’s minimum borrowing rate to equal IORB. This meant banks would earn 0% (0bps) on future trades.Fast forward to today, the Fed and other monetary leaders globally have begun to fix the apparent flaws in their “lender of last resort” systems, the same systems in which the BTFP was established. Plans to construct an updated version of the Fed’s primary rescue mechanism are now underway. Let’s dive deeper…
  • Subscribe to Concoda to read the rest.Become a paying subscriber of Concoda to get access to this post and other subscriber-only content.
  • Upgrade to paidA subscription gets you:Support the newsletter/threads full of geopolitical and macro analysisFull article versions with high-res graphics, plus extra deep divesA digital copy of “The Global Monetary Handbook” (out late 2024) LIKECOMMENTRESTACK 

Alien intervention/religion.

THE GALACTIC FEDERATION CONFIRMS: THE LIGHT FORCES ARE TAKING OVER
~Aurora Ray Nov 7-2020

Hello dear friends


Fellow star seeds, way’s to showers light.


Workers, rainbow warriors i am Julie Joy of the young light workers with a message from some new friends, the Galactic Federation as channeled by Aurora Ray.

November 2020 and the title of this message is the light forces are taking over.

they begin this is the beginning of the establishment of an intergalactic confederation as the old system is crumbling in front of the eyes of earth’s population.
The galactic federation confirms that the light forces are taking over now we are moving into a heightened state of awakening of the masses the unbelievers and mind control population of earth are now moving into the first stage of awakening
For many this will come as a shock and they will inevitably experience the dark night of the soul.
Now this is necessary to process and shed layers of programming and false beliefs
the u.s election 2020 has been utilized to become the greatest coup d’etat in universal history.
The whole world is watching as the old system is being dismantled the corruption is surfacing at rapid speed.
This is the final battle and the victory of light is imminent current events have been carefully premeditated planned and executed as a corporation between the light forces and the earth alliance.

Only a landslide of this caliber is powerful enough to shake and awaken the sleepers
The events of 2020 have forced many to reevaluate their belief systems the political situation of united States of America. It is the culmination of events that will bring the victory of light over darkness. This marks the ultimate death of a corrupt system that does not honor earth and does not honor life you are now moving into the golden age of gaia at an accelerated speed do not engage in political discussions with those who still cling to their matrix programming it would drag you down and lower your frequency at this point.
The tables are turning rapidly and even the mainstream media will soon be forced to report unbiased. The forces of light are in full control and will begin to adjust the narrative.
Now you are being asked to assist by keeping your frequency and holding on to your vision of liberty peace and love for the human race. The revelation of truth is near all darkness is coming to light
Many will be devastated and feel lost or trapped the programming is severe and people on earth identify with their beliefs as these beliefs are beginning to be crushed. They will be confused not knowing who they are this is where we need you to hold the light.
You are the ones who have chosen this assignment this is why you are awake and enlightened so you can be the way.
Showers light bearers and warriors of light and galactic way seers that your fellow earth inhabitants now need more than ever, many will start coming to you asking for moral support and compassion during these stressful times.
We want to assure you that we see and appreciate all the hard work you have done to help raise the vibration of earth the collective consciousness is ready to receive the higher light codes.
Nnow we continue to blast earth with photon gamma light beams. These these codes carry a frequency designed to make this transition process as smooth as possible or as the individual consciousness allows.
For those who have already gone through the process of awakening these codes will trigger your blueprints and place you on the super highway to 5d ascension. The official dismantling of the old paradigm has begun as the cabal leaders have fallen into their own trap.
Rejoice dear ones you will forget all the hardships you have had to endure and experience the harmony and love unlike anything you have ever dreamed of, your world’s abundance will be given back to you and laid at your feet.
It has begun we love you we are here with you we are in control now this is the victory of light over darkness and the coming of the new dawn of gaia.
This was channeled by aurora ray she’s an ambassador of the galactic federation.
Their website is the galactic galacticfederation.com i’ll post that below, and when you get on there you can enter your email to receive an exclusive invitation to the galactic federation members only portal.
I just applied for this i don’t know if i’ll be accepted or not but i certainly hope so.
thank you so much for listening to this special powerful message.

Our heaven or 4 the dimension/density

War in heaven published 1988 and has long been out of print; ‘War in Heaven’ (WiH) consists of a dialog between Griffith and a “disembodied spirit” who claimed to be a member of a group calling itself ‘The Invisible College.’ Griffith states that the answers were received by automatic writing and read back to the contacted entity for review and correction.
The questions and answers that appear in the text are actually the result of several iterations of review and discussion.


The material thus generated is both convincing and compelling, and appears to be of vital importance to human society.
That is a claim we see all the time; this time I submit that the claim is truly justified. The intent was to use this material to enrich the discussions It is about magic, and magic, at times, is about sex.

These matters are all about the past, present, and future situation of the human race.

On the Soul Technology page, there is a type of matter having the same atomic and molecular structure as physical matter, but whose particles are much less dense, and whose gravitation does not interact with physical matter. This is called astral matter in WiH.
Every human has a somatic soul, closely resembling the physical body but made of astral matter, and an astral soul, also made of astral matter, which comprises the more permanent self.
Astral souls may or may not equate to higher selves as discussed in A Synthetic Myth.

Spirits are simply astral souls operating without somatic souls and physical bodies. Hundreds of thousands of spirits from worlds with advanced technological civilizations have been sent to Earth by their governments to work with the Invisible College to assist humans in fighting a war to liberate us from the oppression and exploitation of Theocracy.

Disembodied spirits are forced to incarnate after a few years.
When they do, they lose most of the memories they brought with them, especially after repeated reincarnations. However, they, as well as many native Earth people, can learn to communicate with the discarnate Invisible College on a completely conscious level. This requires “proper psychic training”. Any human being can receive telepathic messages from the Invisible College subconsciously.
Invisible College members consider themselves ordinary people like us. Their previous bodies, on their home worlds, may or may not have resembled ours, but they are based on the same basic genetic code.
The home worlds possess what we would call advanced knowledge in many scientific and humanistic fields.

Of particular importance is their capability with psychic energy that can produce changes in astral matter. That technology was used to send them here, but they were not able to bring their equipment with them.

Their motives are both altruistic and selfish. Had they not intervened, the human race would have evolved in directions that posed a serious threat to their own worlds and space colonies.
So they are fighting a “preventive war” on their own behalf, but they also feel the overwhelming majority of Earth people will support their cause once they are able to explain the situation fully.
They operate mostly by influencing the subconscious minds of Earth people. They come from civilizations that actually practice “human dignity and rights,” “individual sovereignty,” “social justice,” “consent of the governed,” and “equality of opportunity”.

Anyway, they say, “We are at war here, and we are fighting on your behalf as well as our own.” They must practice these social values, because they possess technology that would totally eliminate individuality if they did not have sufficient social, political, and ethical knowledge to keep the technology under control.

We are at war here, and we are fighting on your behalf as well as our own.” They must practice these social values, because they possess technology that would totally eliminate individuality if they did not have sufficient social, political, and ethical knowledge to keep the technology under control.
Their societies live with this threat, and we will eventually have to live with it too.
But the greatest danger we face in the next few decades (written in January 1987), is that
Theocracy and our exploding population will cause a spiritual cataclysm that will destroy the human race as it now exists and threaten their civilizations too if it goes unchecked.

They will probably be able to avert catastrophe and guide these upheavals in constructive directions, but the fate of many Earth people will still depend on their own actions.

The concept of a Theocrat as a human who chooses to exert power over and ultimately to consume other humans, rather than to undergo reincarnation many notorious tyrants, conquerors, evil religious leaders, black magicians, and criminals have become Theocrats after death, but so have some people whom history calls saints or benign geniuses. This is due to the well-known tendency of power to corrupt, not to mention the prospect of achieving immortality (though most are and eventually destroyed by other Theocrats).

This has been especially true of people who were religiously devout, and then found out the horrible truth about their Gods after death. Theocrats as a class have ruled both the Earth and its astral plane throughout most of human history. This includes most of the medieval Popes and other religious leaders notorious for being cynical and power-hungry. It also includes many famous occult leaders, from Cagliostro down to Aleister Crowley. The Theocrats’ method of absorbing energy from other spirits affects their growth patterns,causing their astral soul to go out of balance, and eventually driving them into irrational, insane, and self-destructive behavior. Theocrats acquire bands of enslaved spirits, containing from a couple of dozen to several thousand, with the average in the
low hundreds.
Most of the activities have to do with the survival of the band and especially its dictator, recruiting new members from among the recently deceased, stealing souls from other bands, fighting to keep the Invisible College from liberating members
of the band, etc.
Each Theocratic band works with a corresponding group of living people, whether religious, occult, political, or of other common interests: popular music, sports, or centered on other media. Theocrats can be found hanging around almost any place where crowds gather.


(Remember that the astral plane is not a “place”. It is right here, but of a different density.) Theocrats communicating telepathically to individual Christians when they pray may call themselves God or Christ or the Holy Spirit… what ever they believers expect. They also may claim to be angels or saints or devils as appropriate. Some people who deliberately become Satanists on Earth hold positions of power in “Hell” after they die. Who goes to Heaven or Hell is mostly determined by which particular band of Theocrats gets to them as they’re in the process of dying. The Moslem, Hindu, and Buddhist mythologies are also theocratic institutions designed to imprison souls of believers in their own forms of Heaven or Hell.
With the decline in fanatical belief in organized religion, Theocrats have devised ways to persuade atheists and agnostics to join bands organized as any type of community of spirits, such as previously deceased relatives or friends, or some famous person they greatly admire, rock stars, politicians, movie stars, writers and scientists, even fictional
characters.
Theocratic religious sects often forbid deliberate mediumistic contact with the spirit world precisely because of this need to protect knowledge of the true nature of the afterlife.
Every single one of the ideas at the core of traditional deistic doctrine is a lie:
1 Only God (under whatever name) is good; people are basically evil and are incapable of improving themselves morally by their own efforts.
2 Only God is naturally immortal, but people can gain immortality through proper service to the Deity.
3 Human beings can receive forgiveness for their sins, and divine strength to prop up their various weaknesses, by ‘Letting God into their hearts’… that is, by creating a
powerful psychic bond between themselves and the deity. The important thing to realize about this whole body of lies is that it makes people weaker and more evil than they already are, and increases their dependency on the Theocrats.

Religious Mind Control


The methodology of religious mind control is what modern psychologists know as “operant conditioning”: altering behavior and mental programming by positive and negative reinforcement on the physical and sensory level. But Theocrats
strengthen this conditioning by transmitting ideas and emotions directly into people’s subconscious minds by telepathy. And they use people’s own psychic powers to control
other members of the congregation. The key to the technique is putting people into a state of consciousness best called the “religious trance” — a mild hypnotic trance in which the conscious will is awake but passive. People in this condition are completely aware of what is going on around them, and are recording these events in their memories exactly as they would in a normal waking state. They are also capable of thinking and acting voluntarily, but can do so only within certain very definite limits without breaking out of the religious trance and assuming normal consciousness.
People enter a very similar state when they read, listen to music, watch television or a movie, listen intently to a lecture or radio broadcast, etc. The passive state of the will
is often called “identification with the sensory intake,” which means accepting the sensory intake uncreatively and uncritically on both the intellectual and emotional levels. People enter a very similar state when they read, listen to music, watch television or a movie, listen intently to a lecture or radio broadcast, etc. (advertising)The passive state of the will is often called “identification with the sensory intake,” which means accepting the sensory intake uncreatively and uncritically on both the intellectual and emotional levels. It also means agreeing with the ideas being presented and feeling the same emotions being described in the song, story, play, etc.
This is a rather light trance. If the material being presented begins to contradict the person’s existing opinions or knowledge, identification breaks down. He or she assumes full normal consciousness and thinks, “I don’t agree with this,” or “I don’t understand this,” or “This is wrong.” But identification with sensory input can make people accept
things they would reject if they were fully conscious, as long as the input isn’t controversial or unfamiliar enough to break their concentration.
Once the conscious will becomes passive, electrical energy within the nervous system changes slightly in character, assuming a level closer to that during sleep than that during normal wakefulness. In a person fully trained to enter the religious trance, electrical activity stabilizes at exactly the right level to allow an equal flow of energy into and out of the astral soul. This allows the “astral will” to awaken partially, and creates a direct, two-way link between the physical mind and the astral mind.
(Griffith’s guide had explained that during incarnated life, a human’s physical and astral mind normally alternate in being conscious, the former when “awake”, and the latter when “asleep.”) This allows information to pass reasonably freely between the physical mind and the astral mind and vice versa. Also, the physical mind can receive impressions from the psychic senses of the astral soul more or less directly.

This type of trance
is controlled by outside sensory input into both the physical and astral minds. It is a passive state used to control and brainwash people.
When religious believers say they “feel the presence of God” at church services, they are referring to telepathic communication. Most of this intake comes from other members of
the congregation; this is usually a more powerful influence than anything sent by spirits.
So there is a sort of “psychic chain reaction” that occurs, as every member of the congregation influences the emotions and thinking of every other member, like a box of matches catching fire or an atomic chain reaction. This process creates a “religious group

Religious and electronic mind control


This state of religious ecstasy and emotions do generate large amounts of psychic energy. Any Theocratic spirits present may directly absorb part of that energy, but most of it is diverted back into the physical mind of the members of the congregation to indoctrinate them with whatever the Theocrats want them to believe or feel or do.

This is the essence of religious mind control.
In other words, a Theocratic spirit sends a telepathic message into the minds of people in such a state of religious ecstasy, and they generate powerful surges of telepathically-transmitted emotion that program them to believe and act on the messages they receive. For example, the idea “Abortion is murder” might generate powerful feelings of hate, whereas “All Christians shall be as brethren” might generate feelings of familial love among all the members of the congregation.
People being controlled by this method enjoy it more than anything else in life. It is highly addictive. Theocrats make the religious mind-control process as addictive as possible to enslave believers. The whole vicious circle of sin, guilt, and forgiveness was deliberately designed to create a cycle of addiction that is almost impossible to break.
The last thing Theocrats want is for religious believers to stop sinning. That is why they made sexual pleasure a sin. Sexual desire originates on the biochemical level and cannot
be extinguished by manipulating the programming of the mind. (In this context, “mind” is defined as “The information stored in the brain, plus the software for retrieving and processing that information.”)
Theocrats do not confine their activities to religion and occultism, but corrupt and control human beings through all activities that produce certain states of altered consciousness.
Examples include using electronic media for passive recreational purposes — listening to popular music over the radio or on recordings, watching televised sports events and game shows, and playing the simpler computer games.
The Theocrats know a lot more about psychology than people do. In a crude analogy with computers, it is as though people can handle data input and output, and some have enough professional skills to modify some programs slightly, but the Theocrats not only know the software far more completely, but also have much easier access to the special “command mode” used to modify it.

This command mode is the telepathic chain reaction used in religious mind control. Of course, trained human psychics also have access to it, and so do spirits in the Invisible College, but it is still extremely difficult to free people from Theocratic control.
The mind of the average person is run by software designed by the Theocrats to keep people from consciously finding out they exist.
They simply can’t understand or believe it, because the very mental programs they use for understanding and believing things, and drawing rational conclusions from certain kinds of information, were designed by the Theocrats.

Programming.


In their explanation of the Theocrats’ programming techniques, Griffith’s guides note that memory storage and retrieval in the human mind is a cumulative rather than an absolute process. Data has to be received repeatedly, if details are to be recorded, and should be periodically
retrieved. Otherwise it will be automatically forgotten.
An organism’s behavioral response to stimuli depends on the quantity and quality of reinforcement that it
receives for performing that response. What was described as the “religious trance state” occurs in many
different places besides religious services, enabling Theocrats to practice mind control on crowds attending sporting events, in gambling casinos, at political rallies, during musical concerts of many types, and in a number of other places.
The Invisible College used the rock concerts, peace demonstrations, “love-ins,” and similar events of the
Sixties for exactly the same purposes. Before that, Griffith’s guides state, they used meetings of fraternal
organizations, a variety of progressive political meetings, and even the circuses and carnivals that used to
visit every American village and town, as the Theocrats used, and still use, touring revival meetings.
Both groups practice religious mind control to reprogram people whenever they get the opportunity.
I personally was involved with an “esoteric group” which at the time of the Apollo lunar landing in 1969 was asked to inject a certain concept into the mass mind of the human race while it was distracted or in a light trance state watching the landing on television. The concept had nothing whatever to do with the landing event.

It was expressed as follows: “Individual responsibility interacting social responsibility.”
The peculiar syntax was emphatically confirmed and the reason for this is anything but obvious; no explanation was given.
This was the kind of mind control we are discussing here, and I was participating as a sort of junior or
apprentice controller! This experience confirms that such activities do take place. I believe it came from
the Invisible College, not Theocrats.
Griffith’s guides state that even though most of the individual facts that make up the model of spiritual
reality presented in this book are already available to the public, very few people are capable of assembling them into a coherent theory. This is because the mental programs they use to draw conclusions from information on spiritual subjects were deliberately designed by the Theocrats to be illogical and irrational.

Seventeen years after the book was published, I have scanned the Internet looking for any signs that the book had made an impact or is even remembered today. I found only two or three references on the Web, and to me they seemed to be from people who were completely demented. This caused me momentarily to question my own sanity!

a long description of how principles of positive and negative reinforcement are used to maintain
people’s beliefs.
Rituals, for example, are of great value when they remain relatively stable. This is one of the principal
reasons why Theocratic religion is socially and politically conservative or reactionary.
According to basic behaviorist theory, the book states, human personality, including the mental programs that people use to evaluate data and decide what is true and false, is conditioned into them by their physical environment. Even if you leave direct telepathic programming during religious mind control out of the picture, people still receive their programming from both their physical and social environments.

Programming from the physical environment usually favors empirical thinking, which the Invisible College strongly encourages, but that from the social environment favors acceptance of doctrine on faith.
A large part of the customs and beliefs and instinctive emotional reactions that make up this social environment were created by Theocratic religion. The further back you go into human history, the greater the percentage of people who were devout believers in Theocratic religion and were subjected to religious mind control to a significant degree throughout their lives.
The hold of Theocratic religion on most of Earth’s living population did not begin to weaken until the modern era, from about the 1300s down to the present.

And even today, the greater part of the population is still subject to religious mind control.
Modern civilization does program people with personality structures that resist religious mind control, but the Theocrats have been able to counter by resorting to electronic mind control.

Electronic Mind control
Undoubtedly if the book were to be updated, it would take up a discussion of the role of the Web in supporting a sort of mass mind of humanity.
Griffith’s guides begin the discussion of electronic mind control by noting that the technology works on two different levels, just as religious mind control does. Recall that
religious mind control works by putting people into an altered state of consciousness similar to a light hypnotic trance and how the thinking and behavior of people in such a religious trance can be influenced by what they experience through the physical senses during the service. In other words, the preacher’s words can have the same effect as post-hypnotic suggestions during regular hypnosis.
Electronic mind control does exactly the same thing, and often to an even greater degree. It is also even more addictive than religious mind control. Like religious mind control, electronic mind control works on two different levels, one physical and one psychic.
The physical level can be directly observed with the physical senses and analyzed with the conscious intellect. Many researchers have described the uses of subliminals in media
and how to spot them. The psychic component of electronic or media mind control
employs completely different mechanisms and one needs to be careful not to confuse them. It is also important to distinguish between the psychic phenomena of religious mind control, which function most
efficiently when the people or spirits involved are spatially close to another, as though the effect were broadcast and subject to inverse-square-law energy radiation, and a second, non-broadcast system for transmitting and receiving energies between human souls.
Reminiscent of the old Greek myth about the “Threads of Destiny” woven by the Goddesses called the Fates, threads actually exist, but they aren’t woven by superhuman beings.
They are “transmission lines” of astral matter connecting one soul to another, and they allow telepathic communications over greater distances and with greater power than can be accomplished by ordinary “broadcast” telepathy.


These threads are created spontaneously when astral souls come into contact with one another while generating large amounts of psychic energy. Whenever the astral mind is in the correct state of consciousness, generating these threads is as natural and automatic as the process that spiders use to leave a silk strand behind them when they travel. Added to the material about religious mind control given in the previous section, this additional theoretical information explains how television evangelists can exert a direct psychic influence over their congregations from a distance.
The process has two possible starting points. First, people who regularly attend Christian church services dominated by the Theocrats are urged to watch certain television evangelists and to listen to designated religious radio broadcasts. Over the years, an elaborate network of astral transmission lines has been built up to link the religious broadcasters to the clergy of Theocratic congregations all over the country, and through them, to the masses of ordinary members.

These psychic threads are put in place when radio and TV preachers are invited to hold services at church conventions, or when a group of churches hosts a large local revival meeting with a media evangelist, or someone working for one, as a guest. This method is used primarily to link the churches to the hundreds of second-rank broadcast evangelists with regional or local media followings. The superstar evangelists who already have national followings reverse this procedure: they invite the ministers and elders of selected churches all over the country to visit their studios and become part of the in-house congregation during their broadcasts. In either case, psychic linkages are stablished between the media evangelist and the local churches. Some of the more ambitious TV evangelists have also directly linked large numbers of ordinary members of Theocratic congregations – and hundreds of thousands of new converts as well – into their electronic mind control networks by periodically holding huge, live revival meetings. (They are people who have little or no interest in organized religion. It’s centered on major spectator sports, organized gambling, and the communications media that service both, and it controls more people than all the Fundamentalist churches and TV evangelists combined. It doesn’t program people’s surface thinking and behavior as thoroughly as Theocratic religion does, because People don’t have to be watching a sermon or listening to a hymn to receive subconscious telepathic messages from the very same spirits who control Fundamentalist religion; they only have to be in the correct state of altered consciousness (which TV and radio produces automatically in all members of the audience who haven’t learned specific techniques for preventing it), and they have to have the transmission lines of astral matter implanted in the right part of their soul, linking them into the network.


(This idea of connecting lines to the right part of the soul reminds one of Carlos Castañeda’s mention of “shifting the assemblage point,” a location on the “luminous cocoon” of awareness where all the fibers of the universe are focused into our perception of the universe.)
So live sports events and casino gambling serve the same function in this network as church services and revival meetings do in the electronic religious mind control networks. Compulsive gambling, especially on sports events through an enormous electronic bookmaking network, plays the same role as does the cycle of sin/guilt/forgiveness in Theocratic religion.
And the Theocrats are now actively expanding this form of mind control. Many states have legalized various forms of gambling that plug people into the networks just described: state lotteries, horse racing (including off-track betting), bingo, card parlors, etc. It’s no accident that gambling expands on both the in-person and media levels as the Fundamentalist churches and TV evangelism decline. The Theocrats are shifting their attention to activities more natural to the average opinions and lifestyles of present-day Americans.


Casino gambling in Nevada is one of the most important battlefields in the war between the Theocrats and the Invisible College. Once Theocratic spirits get their control threads on people gambling in the casinos, they continue to send telepathic messages into the minds of these people whenever they watch certain television programs, especially sports events and game shows.
Griffith responds with the advice that people who want to gamble do it in private games with friends, or at local bingo or card clubs if such are legal where they live. These forms of gambling can still plug people into an electronic mind-control network, but they’re less dangerous than the Nevada casinos. Going to Reno or Vegas or
Atlantic City to gamble for fun would be like going “out on the town” in Saigon during the late Sixties.

Development and minimize the danger if they are careful to remain in a normal state of consciousness. This means: don’t
sample the free drinks, and above all, don’t gamble for more than an hour at a time. If you get at all intoxicated or spaced out from fatigue, the Theocrats can put you into the same type of trance that people go into at religious services, and start brainwashing you. working mostly through popular music and pop culture in general. Once people have been to a certain number of live rock concerts, whether huge ones in sports stadiums or small ones in clubs, then they are permanently linked into a media mind control network run by the Invisible College, and they receive subconscious telepathic messages every time they listen to the right kind of music on the radio or on their own stereo systems.
The song lyrics perform the same function in this process as sermons do in religious media mind control. It’s hard to hear the channeled messages in song lyrics. Most of them are subliminal unless you go to special efforts to pick them out word-by-word, and when you do extract them, they’re written in an elaborate jargon and code. People who are part of the mind control network learn a deep instinctive understanding of this code, but few can paraphrase the content of the messages into plain English. The Invisible College does use sports and gambling for reprogramming when they can seize control of part of the network, while the Theocrats have a large and powerful following in the popular music world.
The Invisible College has a word of advice to conscious psychics and magicians who may be hostile to all forms of involuntary mental reprogramming: they can help people learn to defend themselves consciously against it by, for example, employing “clearing” rituals, which should be widely and publicly performed. Of course, this will also knock out “beneficial mind-control linkages” so they recommend people be prepared to create new beneficial linkages of their own. At this point, the discussion touched on sex and drug magic.


Millions of Americans now practice relatively advanced forms of sex and drug magic without bothering to learn the intellectual knowledge traditionally associated with such practices in both the East and the West. Many such experimenters have been hurt trying this, but a large number have gotten to the point where they can channel down instructions directly from spirits. However, because they have never bothered to learn the
associated spiritual, cosmological, philosophical, and ethical systems, they are almost totally ignorant of how to identify the political faction a particular spirit belongs to on the astral plane, so their channeled information is usually a mishmash from many different sources.
But most have been evolving into more advanced types or have been replaced with outside religions since these peoples came into contact with foreigners over the past few hundred years.
The terms “primitive” and “advanced” are from the viewpoint of the Theocrats, who judge a religious system by how well it allows them to control every phase of human thinking and behavior, especially the conscious use of the psychic powers. Most shamanistic religions teach that some spirits eat souls. However, the information is usually encoded in such a way that the believers, including the shamans, do not realize that the “Eaters of Souls” are their own Gods. Instead, the Eaters of Souls are said to be the Gods of enemy tribes, or spirits that are very different from human beings (such as the Windigos of various Amerind tribes), or the ghosts of human criminals and outcasts. The shamanic religions usually teach that the tribe’s own Gods protect people from the Eaters of Souls. Griffith states that he himself feels a deep instinctive fear that maybe the Theocrats can in fact forcibly take over the minds of living people or somehow damage their souls. Their control over people is indirect, exercised mostly by programming the subconscious mind. They can’t overwhelm the conscious will of any normal person, only the wills of people with seriously damaged physical or astral minds; and they can’t directly harm or enslave the soul when it is incarnated. Second-stage theocratic societies, then, were large, densely populated, totalitarian, and practiced human sacrifice on a large scale. The most important factor is deism: belief in Gods that are omnipotent or at least significantly superhuman. This separates the higher levels of Theocratic religion from primitive shamanism, which considers the Gods rather similar to earthly shamans, except that they are disembodied spirits.


Often they are simply called “the Spirits of Our Ancestors” or “The Shamans in the Spirit World.”
The reason that second-stage Theocratic religion practiced mass human sacrifice was to supply the Theocrats with a constant food supply. When the victims were killed as part of a large public religious ceremony, the telepathic chain reaction generated by a congregation in the religious trance was sufficient to put the victims’ astral souls into a hypnotic trance before death. When they were suddenly and violently killed, the Theocrats were usually able to get control of the souls before they had a chance to flee. This is one of the few examples in the history of Theocracy where the Theocrats were able to seize souls by force, and they could do it only with the help of large numbers of living people. It seemed to him that the ancient Egyptians and Hebrews were not societies with second-stage Theocratic religions.

The guides replied that both were in the third stage when they first appeared in written historical records, and archaeological evidence shows that they probably went directly from the first stage to the third, as did the Greeks and the rest of the Western Aryan peoples. The second stage of Theocratic religion was a failed experiment from the Theocratic point of view.

Third Stage
The third stage of Theocratic religion involves mass animal sacrifices. Although they prefer human souls, Theocratic spirits can nourish themselves off the astral souls of lower animals to some extent. And these souls are easier to paralyze and control with religious rituals than human souls are. However, the astral tissues of animal souls aren’t very compatible with the astral souls of the Theocrats, so they are not a good food source.

History
Third-stage Theocrats tend to be short-lived, except that they also receive some nourishment from the psychic energy generated by their worshippers, which is better for them than the animal souls alone. Even more important, most of the major third-stage religions have had some fourth-stage components as well. This was especially true of the ancient Egyptians, Hebrews, Hindus, and Western Aryan Pagans. Judaism and Vedanta eventually evolved into fully-developed fourth-stage religions. The others survived
for a long time with a mixture of the two. One of the chief characteristics of all third-stage Theocratic religions was that their practices were not much concerned with the condition of life after death. Religious practice in third-stage religions was concerned almost entirely with gaining the favor of the Gods during earthly life, not with life after death.
The Theocrats running such religions didn’t know how to enslave souls on the astral plane, so they ignored them. Instead, they programmed living people to send them the souls of sacrificed animals, and to broadcast psychic energy during orgiastic rituals.

Fourth Stage
The fourth stage of Theocratic religion is the one represented by all the major modern religions. Its most important characteristic is that the Theocrats use religious mind control to delude souls into deliberately putting themselves under Theocratic control after death, thinking they are entering “eternal bliss in Heaven” or “union with the Godhead.” I cannot leave this topic without drawing a comparison with the stages of religion as outlined by Paul Von Ward in Gods, Genes, and Consciousness.
Note that “religion” does not equate with “Theocracy” as defined in War in Heaven.

1 The Theocracy is a particular group of beings and a power structure. It is largely non-physical.
2 Religion is a social activity, seemingly organized by humans in response to a sensed divinity (in the case of modern religions), but putatively fostered and controlled by the Theocracy. Von Ward’s information is derived from a liberal analysis of historical and archaeological data.
From his sources, he constructs a model of intervention into a preexisting naturalistic human culture. The model of Griffith’s presentation is derived from non-physical players who can view the Theocrats on their level of being and action. The stages described by Griffith are as they are seen from the inside, as it were, and in terms of the needs and aims of the Theocracy, for whom the Gods of religions are fictionalized stand-ins.
A crucial difference between the two scenarios is in the nature of the ABs (Advanced Beings). Griffith’s Theocrats would definitely qualify as belonging to the class of Von Ward’s ABs, but they did not come swooping down onto humanity in its naturalistic state, as Von Ward suggests. Rather, in the War in Heaven scenario, they were already present at that stage.
Note: The dialogs between Kyle Griffith and his guides from the Invisible College, as quoted or characterized in this section of the notes and throughout the book, may give the impression that English is the common language used between astral entities.
Of course this cannot be true, and even the status of language as we know it would be dubious. Indeed, Griffith clarifies this issue in a private communication:
“…neither the mind contained in the embodied astral soul nor the astral minds
of disembodied spirits use English or any other human language. Instead, they use entirely different “pre-verbal” symbols to encode information.
The speech center in the physical mind then translates these into ordinary human language.”
The name “Invisible College” is just a collective term in
common use on the astral plane to describe all disembodied spirits who are not members of Theocratic bands and are not merely lost souls wandering around helpless because they can’t
function effectively in the spirit world.
A synonym in wide use is “free spirits,” which contains play on words because “free” is used in two senses at once. It means, “free of Theocratic control” simultaneously with “free to move around the astral plane at will and communicate telepathically with other spirits.”
There are three main groups of spirits in the Invisible College: enlightened ones, magicians, and space people. Enlightened Ones
Most of these spirits were highly advanced in spiritual knowledge and the use of their psychic powers during life, but they were also devout believers in some sect of the Eastern religious system that includes Vedanta and Buddhism. They were wise enough to refuse to join the Theocratic bands associated with their particular sect after death, because they could psychically perceive the enslavement and exploitation going on
in the various Heavens.
(Few of the Western occultists who have called themselves “Illuminati” or some other synonym of “enlightened ones” join this group after physical death; most become magicians or Theocrats.)
The enlightened ones could be very useful to the cause of the Invisible College, but few of them are willing to stay on the astral plane and help actively fight Theocracy. They believe that the Theocratic perversions of Heaven they observe there, are illusions, and that perceiving such illusions proves that they are not yet advanced enough to liberate themselves from the cycle of rebirth. So they go back and live another earthly
life, always hoping that the next time they die they will be worthy to enter the true Heaven. They consider the War in Heaven an illusion and run away from it, back into earthly existence, which they also consider illusory.
The idea that much of the universe is “maya” or illusion is just Theocratic propaganda, and the refusal of the enlightened ones to help in the war against Theocracy is a perfect example of how effective it is. Physical life on Earth is no illusion, nor is existence as a disembodied spirit on the astral plane. What’s illusory is the claim of the Theocrats to be the Gods of various religions, and the lie that their Heavens offer the human soul eternal life.
What happens to saints in the Judeo-Christian religions after death?


Most become Theocrats if they are devout members of Theocratic churches during life.
However, some people who claimed to work miracles through faith in religious doctrine have become magician spirits after death. They were really occultists whose faith was merely a sham to allow them to work within the religious establishment.
However, even some believers in the Western religious systems whose psychic powers are highly developed are still quite vulnerable to being enslaved by the Theocrats after death, whereas similar people in the East often remain free of Theocratic control and go on incarnating. This is because the Eastern religions teach belief in reincarnation as part of their official doctrine.
Theocrats persuade many of the saints in western fourth-stage Theocratic religion to reincarnate. Often they become charismatic preachers who win large numbers of new converts, or religious leaders who increase the power of churches over the whole of society. In the process, they may become so corrupted by earthly power that they eventually become Theocrats Magicians, living or disembodied, tend to be practical people, not mystics or “true believers.” Most of the spirit guides who assist occultists all over the world in obtaining spiritual knowledge and in learning conscious control of their psychic powers are magicians.

The Theocrats are seriously frightened of the work these spirits do, which explains why Fundamentalist propaganda contains such stern warnings against contacting them.
This accounts for the propaganda against Ouija boards and other aids that help people achieve independent, consciously controlled contact with disembodied spirits. The warnings about demonic possession through engaging in mediumistic workings are especially ironic, as the spirit-contact that Fundamentalists achieve at services using religious mind control are much closer to the descriptions of “possession” than what happens to occultists when they hold mediumistic conversations with spirits.
But passing information to people with conscious mediumistic powers is one of the less important things magicians; do, because there aren’t very many conscious spirit mediums.
However, the magician spirits can communicate telepathically with a much larger segment of the living population on a strictly subconscious level, and do so very frequently. Such spirits are responsible for many experiences that people call prophetic dreams, flashes of insight, hunches, intuition, instinctive knowledge, etc. However, some of the experiences assigned these names are entirely the product of the person’s own The response:
“Would you rather be drafted into the army to fight against beings as evil as Hitler, or to fight on their side?”
Most Earth people simply don’t have the psychic strength of spiritual knowledge to remain neutral in the war between the Theocrats and the Invisible College. If the Invisible College doesn’t manipulate them subconsciously, then the Theocrats will do so anyway. Their own code of ethics applies the principle of “greatest good.” An individual manipulated by both sides is better off than if he or she were influenced by the Theocrats alone.
As to “informed consent,” this book and hundreds of similar attempts to communicate the same information are intended to provide the general public with the information they need to make a choice. They call this “making a personal breakthrough in spiritual consciousness.”
They want people to learn enough about how mind control operates to avoid situations that expose them to it.
Even now, when very few people are consciously aware of the nature of Theocracy and the forces opposing it, the Invisible College thinks their methods are still more ethical than those of the Theocrats and their religions. Brainwashing people with religious mind control is the Theocrats’ strategy of first choice, whereas the Invisible College employs .

Still a major problem.

In many cases, people who had read a lot of occult literature during life put up more resistance to understanding the true nature of Theocracy than atheists, agnostics, and even some believers in orthodox religion. It’s actually easier to show religious people that their Gods are impostors than it is to show occultists that there are no “planes higher than the astral.” Many of them tell us, “OK, so some Heavens are really Hells of psychic vampirism. I’m going to keep looking until I find one that’s not.” Unfortunately, there are Theocratic bands specifically designed to entrap spirits like this, bands run by Theocrats who were occultists themselves during life.


Griffith observes that the Invisible College faces the same problems in dealing with people on the astral plane as he has in getting people on Earth to accept the information described in this book. There are thousands of years of false knowledge to overcome, and virtually every body of available spiritual information is heavily corrupted with Theocratic propaganda. It strikes him as miraculous that the Invisible College was able to start teaching such knowledge widely, both on the astral plane and on Earth.

Space People

Griffith’s guides state that about seven hundred years ago, scientists from their world established two-way contact with spirits on Earth’s astral plane. Accidents in interstellar transportation had already marooned quite a few extraterrestrial spirits on Earth, but they were not capable of communicating with the societies they’d come from.
(Ironically, psychic machines capable of establishing such communication existed on Earth’s astral plane, but none of the spirits who came here by accident possessed the specialized skills for using them.)
Of course, such spirits were forced to reincarnate periodically, and every time they did so, they lost a portion of their original memories. This meant that Earth people remained ignorant of the basic facts about spiritual reality, including the true nature of the Theocratic spirits who claim to be Gods.

There were always a few spirits around who knew the truth, but they were seldom able to communicate more than hints of it to others before they lost the memory of who they were and where they came from. The two-way contact roughly coincided with the beginnings of modern Western civilization. There are numerous passages in occult literature from the late Middle Ages on about telepathic conversations between mediums and spirit entities who resemble modern UFO-contactee descriptions of space people much more than they do the traditional angels,
demons, or spirits of deceased Earth people or disembodied souls.

As to why the spirits from advanced civilizations couldn’t take some kind of direct action against the Theocrats right at the beginning, it simply wasn’t possible.

The space people don’t come here physically, but as naked spirits transmitted across vast distances. We come with a certain amount of knowledge, a small part of which we can communicate directly to Earth people, and with psychic powers that are highly trained but not especially powerful in terms of force.
The average Theocratic spirit is actually “stronger” than one of us in terms of sheer ability to radiate psychic energy as a disembodied spirit.
The reason is that a normal spirit can transmit only limited amounts of astral energy through the psychic powers – less than that which can be radiated by the psychic powers of a similar spirit incarnated in a physical body. But Theocratic spirits are not bound by this limitation, because they don’t keep their astral soul in a normal condition.

Instead, they absorb energy from other spirits and grow as much as they can.
Abnormal growth gives them access to more internal astral energy and hence stronger psychic powers than a normal spirit possesses.

Satan and the whole mythology of Satan and the Rebellion of the Angels.

The creation of spirits fighting Theocracy goers back a long time, and the original teachings of the Buddha contain similar elements. Does using terms like “Satan” invite accusations of being “devil-worshippers?”

They respond that they have good reason to use terms that encourage people to take a closer look at the Biblical myths about Satan.
But the Invisible College rejects “worship” as the term is usually defined:
“Absolute, unquestioning belief in and obedience to a spiritual being or a body of doctrine.”

Instead: Individual sovereignty is the most fundamental postulate of the philosophy of the Invisible College. Each person must assume full responsibility for making value judgments on ethical and political matters. The Invisible College never advocates absolute obedience to ANY authority, even their own. They urge people to resist orders from leaders if they disagree with them, and to use laws, customs, and ideologies only as guides for making their own decisions on specific issues. Assuming personal responsibility for running their own lives makes people wiser and stronger.
Satan has a much more favorable image in literature and folk tradition in all the Judeo-Christian cultures than you’d expect him to have if he was really the archetype of reversed Biblical morality that religious doctrine claims he is.

Look at all the folk tales in which the Devil simply opposes the puritanical, “blue-nose” aspects of Christian morality that say that sex and other sensual pleasures are intrinsically evil.
The Theocrats want religious believers to feel guilty every time they feel sexual desire or enjoy any
“pleasures of the flesh.” The guilt literally addicts them to attending church services that subject them to
religious mind control. When the Devil of folk tradition says that sensual pleasure is not immoral in itself,
then he is actually advocating an ethical code superior to the Judeo-Christian one.

The core of Jewish doctrine from the time of Moses down to the present has been that Jehovah is both an angry, judgmental deity who condemns people for Original Sin, and a loving God who forgives their sins after various acts of faith and ritual atonement.
“Was the Hebrew Pagan deity Satan originally a God in serpentine form like Damballa and some of the other African trickster deities?” Possibly.

We really don’t know.

What we’re telling you here is mostly derived from our knowledge of modern religious and occult works,
supplemented to some extent by rumors that have circulated on the astral plane for thousands of years.
We have no exact historical details on any of this, just educated guesses. However, the choice of a serpent
image for the deity that tempted people into disobeying Jehovah is obvious if you realize that it was enemies of Theocracy who dictated the myth in the form in which we know it.
The serpent was intended as a symbol of reincarnation, because snakes shed their skins, leaving behind a
casting that resembles a dead snake to a casual glance, while the animal crawls on about its business with a shiny, new, young-looking skin. The process by which the Theocrats dictate “holy writ” to religious believers is, like that used for this book, some form of automatic writing or other mediumistic reception of data from spirits on the astral plane. The only difference is that the spirits involved are Theocrats instead of members of the Invisible College. Griffith realizes that he has to be responsible for that, to ensure that what he receives is internally consistent and agrees with his own rational judgment based on the evidence
available in his memory.

Jehovah says, “Right and wrong are only what I tell you they are, and they are absolute values that never vary.”
Satan, on the other hand, says, “Use your intellect to determine what is right and wrong in a given situation, because such value judgments are highly dependent on the environment you’re in at a given time.” Since the latter statement is rational and the former irrational, people are put into conflict with Theocratic religious doctrine every time they use their intellect to make rational value judgments. The Theocrats don’t want people to become consciously aware of the basically illogical nature of absolute moral doctrine, but there is nothing they can do about it. The more highly developed a person’s rational intellect, the less likely he or she is to accept religious doctrine on “blind faith.”

The Theocrats tried to obscure the information about using the intellect to make ethical decisions on a rational basis. They added many extraneous details to the mythology about Satan. For example, they included the idea that telepathy, mediumship, and other human psychic powers are either “works of God” or “works of the Devil.” This allows them to forbid religious believers to communicate with spirits hostile to Theocracy without revealing various facts about spiritual reality that the Theocrats wish to conceal. However, even gradual reprogramming can produce some extremely evil and violent people if it continues over a whole lifetime. There are plenty of people in this country right now who are emotionally and morally capable of “killing a Commie for Christ” or acting on the literal meaning of the Biblical passage, “Thou shalt not suffer a witch to live.

“The Tree of Life. (Life is immortal from origin.)

As the serpent myth represents the concept that people have the right to determine good and evil for themselves through the free exercise of the conscious intellect, the Tree of Life represents certain essential details of the breakthrough information – the concepts that people can only achieve immortality through reincarnation and that the “eternal life in heaven” offered by deities is a delusion.


However, you must remember that the Tree of Life is mentioned only so the Theocrats can gloat that they
prevented people from gaining this knowledge. (Mathilda)
The secret referred to in this passage is not just mortality, but the complete knowledge that Theocratic
spirits have about the nature of the soul, reincarnation, psychic powers, etc.

Buddha

The beginning of Buddhism is a similar case in which enemies of Theocracy tried to help people make the
breakthrough but didn’t quite succeed. After the Buddha achieved enlightenment, he made some statements that seemed self-contradictory, at least on the surface. He attributed his spiritual progress to his own efforts, not to a “gift” from omnipotent deities. He also stated in so many words that ordinary people could achieve enlightenment through practicing the proper psychic development techniques.


But at the same time, his statements about reincarnation appeared paradoxical. He said that achieving
enlightenment meant that he no longer needed to reincarnate, but he also said that he would continue to do so to help other people achieve enlightenment.

They state that what the Buddha called his enlightenment is actually a version of the breakthrough – that is, he became consciously aware of exactly what the Vedantic Gods really are and how they operate. But the words in which his followers wrote down his knowledge are somewhat confusing. (airl)
They understood the most important part of his message quite clearly: the path to enlightenment is the
disciplined practice of various psychic development techniques. Notice too that the Buddha himself didn’t
limit his followers in which specific techniques they used, because part of his knowledge must have been that different techniques work better for a given individual than others. He was quite vague on this, and Buddhists ever since have practiced a wide variety of techniques drawn from Yoga, Tantra, and other sources within Vedanta.
However, the basic teachings of Buddha are anti-deistic whereas those of Vedanta were highly deistic.
Many modern Buddhists believe that if they personally achieve enlightenment, their souls will merge with the soul of Buddha into Nirvana, a “state of blissful nothingness.”
Vedantic doctrine in the time of the Buddha already taught that enlightened souls would merge with Brahma or some other God.

This doctrine was grafted onto the Buddha’s teachings after his death, when Buddhism was taken
over by the Vedantic Theocrats.
Buddhism was originally founded to fight Theocracy, as were Gnosticism and some forms of early Christianity.
The Buddha implied by his own example that the enlightened were capable of transcending reincarnation but deliberately chose not to do so in order to be of service to the human race. The Buddha realized he could become a Theocrat and remain on the astral plane indefinitely, but he refused to do so for ethical reasons.
This interpretation of the early Buddhist teaching is possible for people who have already made the
breakthrough from some other source, but it is not stated clearly enough in the writings themselves to make finding and understanding it very easy.
Even though he founded a major religion, the enlightenment the Buddha achieved was still only a partial
breakthrough.

Much of what he learned from the Invisible College was on a subconscious level; it is reflected
indirectly in his various teachings and practices as described by his followers after his death when they
wrote the early literature, but much of it never came out in so many words in his actual teachings.
He didn’t actually say that the Vedantic Gods are evil beings who eat souls, or that enlightened souls need to reincarnate for their own good as well as that of living people. This vital information is implied, but never directly stated.

For example, the Buddha did teach that animal sacrifices and “austere practices” – by which he meant self-torture, starvation, etc. – are not mandatory for one to achieve enlightenment; but he didn’t antagonize the Vedantic majority around him, or their Gods, by saying that “The Gods are evil.”
However, it is easy to misunderstand what he was actually doing, which was to separate ethics from the
process of achieving enlightenment.


In other words, says Griffith, he said living ethically was important, but not directly related to the
psychic development that causes enlightenment. Again, this interpretation is possible from reading the
Buddhist literature, but the point is not made clearly enough for most people to understand it.
Certainly most modern Buddhists don’t.
Modern Buddhism, except for a few occult groups associated with it, is a Theocratic religion.
Buddhists feel that their ethical conduct as well as their psychic development practices will earn them
enlightenment by pleasing various incarnations of the Buddha, all of which are imagined to co-exist as Gods similar to the Vedantic Gods.


This is not what Buddha taught at all.
it wasn’t possible to turn most of those people into high-level psychics or magicians or to teach them much about the true nature of Theocracy;
they just wanted to turn them into what would be defined in the United States today as “good average citizens”.
Two types of consciousness-raising programs were used within the lodges:
1 one trained initiates in the lower degrees to become rational atheists and political liberals;
2 the other, more advanced, program, taught high-level occult knowledge and conscious control over the psychic powers. The first of these programs always had many more members than the second. Initiates who learned to accept the Masonic philosophy often became immune to falling into a religious trance during the rituals. This is an example of the difference between the way the Invisible College reprograms people’s The Invisible College continually plants information in the subconscious that says, “Think for yourself. Don’t accept anything without evidence. Do what you feel is best under the circumstances rather then just accepting what someone tells you. You can become a better person if you only learn how to do so. Judge yourself realistically: you are neither a self-righteous saint nor a miserable sinner, but simply an ordinary human being with free will and control over your own destiny.” This is almost the opposite of the Theocrats’ programming that takes place during Fundamentalist Christian services. They want worshippers to say “Thy will be done,” and submit completely to the telepathic influences they receive, as well as to obey religious doctrine to the letter.

The Christian code took people deeper into bondage to the Theocrats; the Masonic code liberated them from that bondage without substituting any other master for “God.” What’s most important here is that the Masonic initiates were taught to receive increasing amounts of positive reinforcement from their material and social environment, and decreasing amounts from religious mind control. The idea that people can significantly improve the quality of life on Earth by their own efforts is one of the most important strategies that the Invisible College uses in fighting Theocracy. Its strongest point is that they don’t need to use subconscious emotional manipulation or intellectual persuasion to get people to accept it.


Just living and working within a modern technological society proves the basic validity of a humanistic philosophy by direct environmental conditioning. On the conscious level, people may think about the problems modern society has not yet solved and yearn for “the good old days”; but on a deeper level, they know they are as well off, on the average, as human beings on this planet have ever been.
Theocratic propaganda and religious mind control have great difficulty extinguishing this intuitive feeling, because environmental conditioning rooted in physical causes it
reality.

So the disembodied spirits in the Invisible College telepathically manipulated the subconscious minds of leaders in the Masonic and Rosicrucian lodges to design their rituals and doctrines in certain ways. Many of the individual elements of these rituals and doctrines were drawn from the writings and practices of previous occult groups, including some that were quite advanced in both spiritual knowledge and psychic
training techniques. These occultists included Cabbalists, Gnostics, Alchemists, Hermetics; influences from all these spiritual systems are still visible today in the Masonic and Rosicrucian doctrines.
There are spiritual knowledge and psychic-training techniques brought from China and India by the Islamic Sufi sect and taught to the medieval Knights Templar. There’s knowledge inherited from the ancient Egyptians, Hebrews, and Babylonians, taught to the Masons and Rosicrucians by Cabbalists, Gnostics, and Astrologers. Possessing advanced occult knowledge doesn’t automatically make a person morally virtuous. Even today, some of the advanced occult lodges derived from the Masonic-
Rosicrucian traditions are “Black Lodges” (lodges under the control of the Theocrats).

It’s extremely important to realize that Theocratic
enslavement and psychic vampirism are not things that happen only to disembodied spirits after death.
Living people can do virtually the same things to other living peopleThis can be done in a Christian context, as Jim Jones did with
the People’s Temple, or in the context of almost any other religious or occult group.
Many of the modern cults are also examples of this Theocracy-on-Earth:
1 the Moonies,
2 the Rajneesh Cult,
3 etc.
However, such groups aren’t always openly identified as religious or occult organizations. The Symbionese Liberation Army was such a group, and so was the Manson Family. So are many terrorist groups, especially those in the service of Islamic Fundamentalists.
A number of present-day rock groups are actually bands of living Theocrats, enslaving their fans and draining energy from them at concerts. This last type of living Theocrat is especially dangerous right now, because such people can influence a large number of people who listen to their music on records or over the radio, using electronic mind control techniques that we will describe later. One of the worst things about this movement is that some of these people have made the breakthrough.
They know what they are doing, and they still do it.
The illusion of achieving immortality for the ego is a very powerful corrupting influence. You can see why many occultists wouldn’t want to listen.
The quality and completeness of a person’s breakthrough knowledge are very important. Until very recently, communicating many of the individual details that constitute the breakthrough has been extremely difficult.
It is much harder to understand Theocracy without the background of many terms and concepts from recent scientific discoveries: computer science, behavioral psychology, modern physics, etc.
Government policy and general opinion in this society now treat alcoholism more as a medical and psychiatric problem than as a moral or criminal problem.
This is actually a significant step forward for the whole civilization: learning how to deal with a social problem to minimize the total harm it does to the society.
Yet while Western society deals with the alcohol problem in a reasonably sensible and sophisticated manner, it fails to apply the knowledge learned from the “noble experiment” to psychoactive drugs other than alcohol. The Invisible College let the Sixties Movement stop when they had reached the limit of what could be programmed through the use of psychedelics. It was extremely difficult just to program large numbers of LSD users with a set of vague idealistic principles that would make their opinion-forming and decision-making processes more tolerant and flexible. It was totally impossible to start teaching a detailed, sophisticated ideology.


The major reason for this is that the Invisible College was working almost entirely through people’s subconscious minds, so that they were absorbing short strings of data at random places in their “mental files.” As long as these messages were simple, clear, and positive, then they did more good than harm. It generally made people more socially and politically liberal. If they had tried using more complex material, it would have merely confused the recipients, probably to the point of interfering with ordinary mental functions.
If they hadn’t started the telepathic communications, several of these people would have accepted the information about Sirius and the Dogon as hard proof of physical visitations to Earth by Ancient Astronauts. As it was, the Invisible College managed to complicate the issue in their minds, and may have kept them from seriously misleading the significant number of people who regard their opinions as authoritative.
Griffith: During the Sixties, Timothy Leary often said that
LSD helps people unlock cosmic secrets that are encoded in our DNA; and at the time, I found this concept completely incomprehensible. But he’s still saying the same thing today. For example, he said in NEUROLOGIC just a few years ago that, “Most of the characteristics formerly attributed to the soul now describe the functions of DNA, whose complex messages originate from higher intelligences in other solar systems.

The mission of DNA is to evolve nervous systems able to escape from the doomed planet and contact manifestations of the same amino acid seeding that have evolved in other solar systems.”
What is the relationship between the concept in this quotation, the acid mutants, and the cosmology that you’ve already given? Invisible College: First of all, there was never a physical seeding of amino acids to start organic life. What actually happened was that disembodied spirits went to planets that were ready for life to develop, and created the amino acids by telekinetic manipulation of existing organic molecules. They assembled these amino acids into physical DNA using their own astral DNA molecules as templates.
When Leary and other scientists theorize that the physical DNA contains an evolutionary program that automatically causes new species to develop, they are slightly misinterpreting messages that we put in their subconscious minds.

What we’re really telling all these people is simply, “Try to develop conscious control over your psychic powers during your present lifetime, so you’ll have a better chance of surviving after death.” LSD and other psychedelic drugs are a dangerous but useful tool for doing this, and so are many psychic training practices derived from occultism and religion. We do want people to evolve; but the evolution is spiritual, not physical.
However, there’s a lot more to the War in Heaven than just a struggle between the Invisible College and the Theocratic spirits who operate through organized religion and try to retard material progress towards an advanced civilization on this planet.What’s actually been going on during the last twenty years [as of 1988] is that the Theocrats are preparing to achieve their final goal. Throughout recorded history, the Theocrats have falsely pretended to be Gods. Now, because of the Earth’s extremely high and unstable population, they actually have a chance to assume Godlike powers.
Hitchiking Spirits
Elements of this and following sections concerning the nature of spiritual beings, especially “the basic cosmology about the origin and destiny of the human soul,” could not have been given earlier. Also the Invisible College did not want to describe certain things they intend to do in the future before they were fully prepared to do them.
The technical preparations have now been completed, their psychic network is now in place and functioning, and it is safe to tell more.
Some advanced civilizations have a form of rapid interstellar travel that makes it possible for disembodied spirits to travel from one world to another at speeds much faster than the speed of light.
When they get to their destination, they incarnate there. However, such interstellar travel by spirits involves risks, and they sometimes get lost in transit and end up on a planet
other than the one they intended to visit. If the equipment needed to project spirits over interstellar distances does not exist there, they are marooned. If spirits find themselves
marooned on a planet devoid of life, they eventually die, unless other spiritual beings are able to rescue them. Accidents like this do not leave spirits marooned in empty
interstellar space because the method of travel requires there to be a large mass of physical matter at the far end. The problem arises when that mass isn’t the one intended.
In earlier communications that are not part of this book, the Invisible College has said This statement was true as far as it went, but it didn’t
mention that such civilizations were very different from theirs – as different as a colony of social insects such as bees or ants is from a herd of horses or a pack of wolves.
They had also mentioned (elsewhere) that the civilizations that sent out such original missions of creation seemed to be enemies of the civilizations ancestral to their own, and that their (the Invisible College’s) ancestors were partly responsible for driving them away. But they didn’t tell the full story. In the present section, they continue describing how spirits create organic life on planets that are ready for it and then guide the process of evolution until intelligent beings develop. But they point out that everything they say about the origin and evolution of life on Earth is just scientific speculation. They’re reasonably sure it’s accurate, but it’s not based on detailed historical records.

Griffith asks why the Invisible College doesn’t have access to the histories of all the advanced civilizations going back millions of years?
Surely all such societies would have sophisticated equipment for storing information, better than our present computers here on Earth, so information about all of them would be easy to obtain. Even if civilizations are always rising and falling, communication between them should ensure that history and other information gets passed along. After all, we Earth people, primitive as we are, still possess many important written records of our own vanished civilizations. But we don’t, his guides point out.
We Earth people have a few written records from the ancient Greeks, Hindus, Chinese, etc., but there are still huge gaps in our knowledge.
To answer the question: Advanced civilizations don’t use electronic computers, nor do they store much of their data in durable physical forms equivalent to books, photographic film, sound recordings, etc. The equipment they use to store and process information is made of living organic matter and is relatively fragile, so it’s not that hard for specific historical knowledge to be lost. Also, the symbolic systems for storing data are neither alphabetic nor digital, but are versions of the system used for memory storage in the human brain.
Such systems are extremely complex, and translation from one system to another is often very difficult. As long as a particular civilization is viable, it retains the information that the people in it want to retain. If it breaks up, the souls of the people who survive the breakup go to other civilizations, which have their own history, their own store of information they consider valuable. So specific information about a particular planet is often not available.
There is no need to visit planets in spaceships and “seed” them physically.
But this does not mean that organic life is always of the same type as on Earth… or that DNA “as we know it” is the basis for all life in the universe.
There are other kinds of organic life on the surfaces of other kinds of planets, and also non-organic forms who live in the interiors of stars, comets, gas clouds, and other bodies of matter. They all have different kinds of souls, composed of different kinds of astral matter, and there is almost no communication between the different kinds of life.

Even telepathic communication, while barely possible, is not
really feasible, because the different types of organic and astral life use very different kinds symbols for communication, and also think at different rates of speed.

Griffith asks about the possibility of building translating equipment, as we do to allow data exchange between different computers. The response is that the analogy doesn’t really apply. All of our computers were designed by and for human beings.
The common denominator between two different computers is the person who understands both. There is no such common denominator between people and vastly different forms of intelligent life. The human astral soul is both an alien parasite or symbiote, and a natural part of a human being. All mammals have astral souls, but the astral soul of a human being is extremely
different from the astral soul of an ape. Human beings were radically altered by psychokinetic genetic manipulation to become physically different from other apes. The brain, the hands, the sense organs, the general musculature, and the organs used in standing and walking erect are all very different in humans from those in apes. However, the scientists who recently started mapping the DNA structure of anthropoid apes found it much more similar to that of humans than they had expected.
And when genetic science begins to learn the details of how DNA structure is typically changed by random mutations, the scientists will discover that the genetic differences
between apes and humans don’t fit those patterns. They’ll realize that the particular loops in the DNA molecule that cause the genetic differences between people and apes have an
artificial or alien look to them. That’s because they actually are artificial, and spirits made the changes from other worlds who were familiar with genetic patterns different from those on Earth. The somatic soul of the human species was genetically altered
just as radically as the body was, and is also very different from the somatic soul of an ape. The human somatic soul’s nervous system is much more highly developed for transmitting and using astral energy, and the attachment point for the astral soul is much more highly developed. This attachment point allows any human astral soul to
incarnate, including those used to incarnating in bodies very different from human bodies on Earth. In other words, there is a sort of standardization among human-type bodies on many different worlds to allow them to be linked to a wide variety of astral souls. There are often problems of astral tissue compatibility if body and soul are too different, but it is still possible for many different types of astral souls from many different worlds to incarnate on Earth.
One of the chief characteristics of intelligent beings compared with similar non-intelligent beings is that both the body and the astral soul show strong evidence of neoteny. For example, many scientists on Earth have noticed that an adult
human being retains many physical characteristics found in an anthropoid ape during infancy or childhood, but lost in the ape as it matures. Many technologically advanced races of people use genetic engineering (modification of the genes before conception) and biological engineering (modification of the body during
embryological development by the use of hormones and other chemicals) to repress the development of the secondary sexual characteristics and to increase the neotenous characteristics. This is why so many dreams and visions of space people show them as rather androgynous.

There are three reasons why humans living under primitive conditions were genetically engineered to have less sheer muscular strength than ordinary apes.
1 The first is that if the process is properly done, they gain considerably in coordination and are are much better at doing delicate manipulations with their hands.
2 Second, having less muscular strength stimulates people’s intellectual development by encouraging them to use tools and develop technology.
3 The third reason is that neoteny significantly slows down the maturation and aging process, giving people more time to develop their minds than animals have.
Since humans are physically immature and dependent on others for so long while they are growing up, this also gives them an opportunity to learn many things from their elders that they might not learn if they became independent adults sooner. Advanced human civilizations inhibit the secondary sexual characteristics and certain kinds of muscular development even more, for exactly the same reasons.
They gain a longer lifespan, better general health, and physical equality between the genders; and they lose very little, because they don’t need great physical strength nearly as much as they need good balance, agility, and coordination. If such a body is kept in good general muscle tone, it has greater endurance against fatigue than a more heavily muscled body and is more resistant to many kinds of injuries. Also, most advanced human societies reproduce entirely by ectogenesis, so there is no need for people to be capable of ordinary mammalian reproduction. Most advanced societies have separated sexuality from reproduction.
Why create the human body by having it grow inside an adult as a parasite, when it can be grown much more efficiently in an artificial environment?
Notice the paradoxical attitude that so many Earth women have about bearing children: on one hand, they know the future of the human race may depend on it, but on the other, they also know it’s damaging to the body and seriously interferes with
other aspects of adult life. 86re13

Especially, pregnancy and child rearing are ready-made excuses for placing women in an inferior social status.
However, sexuality itself still exists in all advanced human societies for emotional, social, and psychic reasons. The androgynous people you see in your dreams are all sexually functional males or females. On the average, advanced humans tend to be more sexually active than primitive humans, because their physical and mental health are better, and because they don’t have to work as hard for basic survival. Many Earth people have an instinctive feeling that the soul is an “alien parasite” attached to the body. The somatic soul of a human being contains many structures not
found in the souls of other primates. Some of these produce a form of neoteny in the body; others could cause the brain to develop into a high-quality bio-computer; and still others allow astral souls of many different types to incarnate in human bodies.
This gives many people the feeling that there is something alien about the soul.

Gods
The Invisible College has stated that Gods don’t exist. That statement is completely true in the context in which they used it.
Throughout human history on Earth, some spirits have pretended to be Gods, using a definition of the term that allows them to rule over human beings without being accountable for their actions. These definitions assert that Gods are greatly superior to humans in wisdom and morality, encouraging people to let deities deny them their rights to consent of the governed. However, the human spirits making these claims are simply
lying. They are not superior to ordinary people except in possessing certain forms of knowledge and power; and in moral terms they are significantly inferior because their very existence depends on enslaving and exploiting living people and other disembodied spirits. Since pretending to be Gods is one of the chief sources of Theocratic power, the
Invisible College attacked it very strongly in an earlier section of this book. Elementals
Elementals and Gods are the same kind of entity structurally, though they differ enormously in personality and behavior. You might say that Gods are civilized elementals. So, for our descriptions of how the astral bodies and minds of these
beings function, we’ll use the general term “Elementals.”
On one level, Elementals are specialized types of Theocratic bands. They are very large composite spirits containing thousands of human astral souls very closely linked together. On another, they are sentient creatures in their own right, with personalities and emotions quite different from those of ordinary human beings.
One thing we want to stress: Elementals and humans are not two races of beings, but different forms of one race. The astral DNA template of both is identical, but humans are the individual form and Elementals are the composite form. Composite physical life forms exist on Earth. The bees, ants, termites, and other social insects are the most intelligent of these. The Elementals bear the same relationship to humans as an ordinary honey-bee colony does to a primitive, solitary bee or wasp.
The nature of group minds depends on the amount of control they have over their individual members. There are roughly four levels of control, though each “intergrades” with the next.
These can be verbalized as cooperation, persuasion, coercion, and compulsion.
1 Cooperation is working with others because your mutual interests coincide, and the joint effort is of mutual benefit without major concessions on the part of either party involved.
2 Persuasion is essentially barter: “I’ll do this for you if you’ll do that for me.”
3 Coercion is similar, but the barter is negative: “I’ll do harm to you unless you do some particular thing for me.”
4 Compulsion is direct control of someone else that transcends that other person’s volition.
Earthly societies operate mostly by cooperation and persuasion, with some coercion and only a small amount of compulsion. A bee colony operates entirely by compulsion, almost in the same way that your brain operates your body through the nervous system. Human societies resist becoming a true composite entity, for two reasons.

  1. First, people have highly developed brains and are fully intelligent as individuals.
  2. Second, each person has a separate astral soul with an astral will that resists outside control. It is possible to control the minds of living people by psychic compulsion under certain circumstances, but this is very difficult. People strongly resist such control because of their highly developed brains and souls. A bee colony is a composite entity because individual bees don’t have large enough brains to support true intelligence and because they don’t have individual astral souls.
    A colony of social insects has a single astral soul that is linked to the body of every individual in it.
    The individual uses telepathy to pass information to the astral mind of the hive. This group mind processes and stores the information received from individual bees and does the thinking for the entire hive, passing down its orders by telepathyOne example is the colony’s ability to direct the physical changes that individual bees go through during the course of their lives to perform different specialized functions: gathering food, cleaning and repairing the hive, rearing the young, defending the colony from enemies, swarming to produce a new colony, etc. A bee colony is actually better organized in terms of division of labor than a human society. Human societies are superficially similar to composite entities, but they aren’t true composites, because individual people have independent intelligence and will. However, the human astral soul has a strong potential for forming composite entities while it is in a disembodied state, because souls can literally link themselves together, as was described in the section on Theocratic bands. This is another important reason why Theocratic spirits don’t achieve true immortality. The longer a Theocratic band lasts, the more it develops into a composite entity with a mind of its own. At first, the controlling Theocrat completely dominates
    the group mind, but eventually that mind becomes powerful enough to become independent, and the band becomes an elemental. We’ve already described how an increasing population forms new souls. If there is an abundance of human astral souls at a low stage of development in the astral plane for the Theocrats to recruit or feed upon, Theocratic bands tend to grow larger and larger, making the creation of new Elementals more common.
    Right now, Earth has more Elemental spirits than it ever had before in its history. And this is a very dangerous situation. As long as the Earth’s population goes on increasing, the existing elementals and Theocratic bands have a steady supply of new souls to feed
    upon or recruit. But when massive human die-offs occur, vast numbers of new souls will be stranded on the astral plane at once. This overabundance of souls will cause thousands of embryonic Elemental spirits to start growing very rapidly towards adulthood. Once a young Elemental reaches a certain critical mass it becomes able to seize and capture souls psychokinetically against their will, something that ordinary Theocratic bands cannot do because they lack the necessary psychic energy. Almost every human culture has produced some version of the saying, “A man is a God in embryo,” and it’s true. However, the astral template also can program the soul to act as a sovereign individual, which is why there are free spirits as well as Theocrats. The extension of this influence to living people creates the desire for freedom and individuality on Earth as well. Elementals don’t have peers in the natural cycle of their evolution because they are the composite form of another race. We individual humans are their parents as well as their children, but we also have a destiny of our own which conflicts with theirs.
    This is why the space people interfere with this natural cycle of human evolution. They raise Elementals to be fully human and civilized by teaching them to accept a symbiotic relationship with individual humans. Remember, an Elemental is similar in structure to a Theocratic band, and it has a place in its astral body for individual humans to attach to it.
    In a primitive, animalistic Elemental, these attachment points remain empty when the creature reaches maturity. To produce a God, human astral souls attach themselves to these points as the Elemental is growing and try to control it. If it overcomes them and remains an animal, then it may have to be killed. If the spirits win and tame the Elemental, it becomes a God.

Another thing the Elohim do before they leave a planet is to create an elaborate and self-sustaining network of astral machines, which remains there for future use.

Much of what the Invisible College is doing on your planet right now makes use of such machines, which were left on Earth’s astral plane by the Elohim when one of the Gods seeded your planet in the remote past. It might have been hundreds of thousands of years ago, or millions of years.
The devices are constructed of organic astral matter. They are machines, but they are also alive as plants are alive. This is why they were able to survive for unimaginable periods of time. The equipment is capable of defending itself from Theocrats and all but the largest Elementals, and of sustaining itself indefinitely. It possesses an artificial intelligence like a computer, but does not have true volition or creativity. It repairs itself but it does not reproduce or evolve.
Are Elohim and space people different races, or the same?

Invisible College: We are both the same race and species in a genetic sense, because our astral souls are capable of incarnating in the same types of bodies. There is not a single race of space people or a single race of Elohim, though; there are actually several of each that we are in contact with. Your occult literature has for many centuries used the word “Elohim” to refer to the beings we’re talking about, just as it has called space people angels. In general, the difference between the space people and the Elohim is simply that those who live in space value physical technology and life in a physical body more than the Elohim do.
Space people normally incarnate immediately after death, though they can function quite well in the disembodied state if there is reason to do so. The space people possess a high level of psychic technology, much of it learned from their friends among the Elohim people, but rely on it less to meet their total needs than they rely on physical technology. It should be pointed out that these differences between cultures are matters of esthetics, not morality or level of evolution. Both groups are good in the moral sense and highly advanced in the evolutionary sense. Of course, the cultural differences between the two groups often create political friction arising out of conflicting goals and values, but this can be beneficial and stimulating to both sides if handled correctly on the social level. An individual can change from one group to the other, as a person on Earth might emigrate to another country and become naturalized. Whole societies have made this change in the past on the collective level, and adopted a new technology and culture.
Over the last six hundred years, both space people and Elohim
have been coming to Earth in ever-increasing numbers. Many of your greatest minds were directed by astral souls from advanced extraterrestrial civilizations. And your whole modern Western civilization is the creation of our political organization on Earth, the Invisible College. Griffith: This confirms all these rumors I’ve heard about Earth’s is used by other worlds as a hospital, or insane asylum. But doesn’t the presence here of people with Theocratic mentalities and advanced extraterrestrial knowledge make survival and spiritual development more difficult for the native Earth people? How do you justify this ethically?
/Invisible College: Most of the memories are removed from the exiles’ minds before they are sent here, so they don’t have the same type of knowledge that our regular agents have. The majority of them have a vague feeling of being alien to earthly society, but very few possess conscious memories of life on other worlds, and they have no technical nowledge at all. However, they do possess high intelligence and control over their psychic powers: these are essential functions of the astral mind that we don’t have the right to tamper with.
Griffith: Science-fiction writers often assume that advanced societies handle their crime problems by reprogramming people’s minds to rehabilitate them.
Why don’t you do this to your criminals instead of sending them here?
Invisible College: We do employ such methods, but only on the less serious cases. Every advanced society that’s tried to eliminate all crime and insanity from the population has ended up destroying itself. It’s impossible to program destructive tendencies out of the mind without also eliminating good qualities like creativity. So exile is the lesser evil. And having a few extraterrestrial Theocrats here doesn’t affect the average Earth person at all: They’re really no different from your own native Theocrats, and there’s no shortage of those. The presence of such people on Earth really has no overall effect on events here, especially since about half of the exiles eventually rehabilitate themselves and fight on our side.
Griffith: My personal psychic experiences and my past-life memories tell me that the exiled criminals and the agents sent here to direct the War in Heaven are only a small minority among the extraterrestrial spirits now incarnating on Earth. What kind of people are the rest? There are two main groups: refugees from physical, wars and disasters, and young souls seeking development in the challenge of this hostile environment. Both come here to be in at the beginning of a new civilization. Unless the control of Theocratic spirits over your technology can be broken fairly soon, the Earth’s biosphere will be seriously damaged before the Last Days. It’s going to be a near thing.
Griffith: Are you referring to things like the destruction of
the ozone layer by organic halogen compounds, the greenhouse effect, etc.?
These are only two out of a long list of symptoms, and not even the worst ones. For example, some of your medical researchers are becoming aware that insecticides and other poisonous chemicals cause mutations in bacteria and viruses that create new diseases, but they have not yet realized just how great a potential danger this is. Over fifty million years ago, the dinosaurs became extinct because of diseases caused by chemical pollutants released by the impact of large numbers of comets with the Earth during a visit of the Sun’s astronomical companion, the “Nemesis Star.”
Griffith: What happens if the Earth becomes uninhabitable
after the majority of the population dies off during the last Days and the new Gods depart? It may be possible to start an advanced civilization of reasonable size on space colonies, as has happened on many other worlds. This is the most probable outcome, the way things look right now. However, if there is largescale nuclear or biological warfare, the last Days may come so soon and be so short that this won’t be possible. That’s the worst-case scenario, and if it happens, we will simply have to evacuate as many souls as
possible to other worlds, using the same psychic equipment that we use to control the Elementals.

Griffith: Well, that sounds better than the prospect of
universal death that everyone on Earth would face if the extraterrestrial spirits weren’t here.

Invisible College: It is, but it still isn’t a good situation.
Only astral souls above a certain state of development can be teleported out of here.
Weaker souls would not survive the journey. Now, all of the agents and immigrants and even the rehabilitated exiles are strong enough to survive the journey out as they survived the journey in, but many Earth people aren’t. This means that many
ordinary Earth people will die under these conditions… but
they will survive if this planet continues to support physical human life, or if it’s possible to build space colonies in time.
The use of the term black magic for psychic workings performed with the aid of psychic technology has a similar grounding in operational reality. The energies radiated by astral-
matter machines appear to be black in color when perceived with the psychic senses, whereas the energies radiated by human astral souls – including those of Theocrats – appear to be white or bright-colored. This has a physical cause related to the frequency of the radiant astral energies themselves: the former appear absorptive and the latter reflective.
A high percentage of the imaginative novels, movies, and television programs produced in the last twenty years contain hidden messages about the war between the Theocrats and the Invisible College. And popular music today is an even more effective tool for mind control than it was in the Sixties.
As soon as we started this subliminal warfare, the fifth-stage Theocrats began using it too, and both sides have been fighting desperately for control in this area all during the last twenty years.
[Griffith very quickly noticed the magnitude of this warfare
when he started doing research for a book on the role of popular music in the War in Heaven. Many of today’s rock songs tell the same story, over and over again. It’s like reading passages from the diary of someone gradually going mad in an old horror novel. Every new rock group starts out with a few normal protest or love songs. Then a group mind controlled by fifth-stage Theocrats, and from that point on, all their songs sound as if the same person wrote them swallows them.
However, this Theocratic subversion is often not complete, and periodically one of the groups still writes a song about the fight to liberate the human race from mind control.]

A number of musicians who are also highly skilled magicians
From our point of view, the entire mythology is completely false. It is based on a number of false assumptions about spiritual reality that you have already thoroughly debunked in this book. The key fallacy that underlies everything else concerns the so-called “higher self.” It exists, of course, but it’s no more Godlike than the lower self. The higher self is nothing more than the astral soul with its astral mind and psychic powers. Becoming a
magician is nothing more than putting the physical mind in conscious contact with
the astral mind and using the psychic powers in the astral soul.
The medieval alchemists and cabbalists developed excellent practical techniques for doing this, but their theoretical explanations of how it worked were completely wrong. Griffith: How does the information you just gave relate to my experiences with
modern rock music? For example, I sometimes seem to hear messages with my name in them. Is this how people get entrapped into Theocratic electronic mind-control networks? And what exactly are the messages – actual subliminals in the music itself, or telepathic messages that use the music as a focusing device for my own psychic powers?

Invisible College: This form of electronic mind control is extremely powerful, and much more is expressed in electronic signals than an analysis of the surface message indicates. Modern rock music is not just a melody and a lyric with a few specific subliminals added in such a way that they can be easily extracted.
If it were, then computer scientists on Earth could put songs in digital form, separate out the subliminals that had particular effects on people’s minds, and actually write a sort of computer language out of them that could be used for simple kinds of mind control. For this reason, both the Invisible College and the Theocrats deliberately keep the subliminals far too complex to be analyzed and cracked with present Earth computer technology.

Don’t assume that the voices you hear on records speaking your name, or various other word patterns that you think are personal and unique to you, are proof that some living person or some disembodied spirit has the same verbal knowledge that you yourself possess. This simply isn’t true.
The mental programs that human beings use to deal with language involve a lot of what
you could call “computer enhancement of images” and also “high-level computer languages.”
The actual subliminal sounds mixed into recorded music and broadcast on radio and television are more like a computer machine language than either an ordinary spoken Earth language or a high level computer language that resembles such a spoken language. They are not words or even phonemes in English, but patterns of sound that produce certain reactions within the speech-interpretation programs in the listener’s mind.

For example, when you think you hear your name being called, the signal is probably not your name as an Earth person at all, nor your name where you came from, but a descriptive term in machine language that refers to a specific type of person. It’s comparable to sending a narrow-band radio signal on a certain frequency; if anyone has a set tuned to exactly that frequency, he’ll hear a signal. Some of the Theocrats and many spirits in the Invisible College know what kind of people are here doing various jobs. If they want to communicate with such people, they send a group of machine-language symbols that a mind of one exact type will receive, and no other. If you are that type, you will hear your name being called, or will otherwise be aware that someone has a message for you. What you don’t seem to be aware of is that
only you or someone exactly like you can hear the signal if it is specific enough. Some of
these call codes are more specific than others. Some can be heard by nearly all conscious extraterrestrial agents; others by all extraterrestrials, period;
and some by everyone with a certain degree of psychic development. Many of these subliminal messages have the same effect on the human mind, which on one level is computer software, as programming commands sent into an computer. In other words, receipt of a group of machine-language symbols by your mind causes a particular program to start running, if you are in the correct state of consciousness and if your mind
possesses the program in the first place. This is why the voices you hear in the music seem to be trying to recruit you to their side or to scare you off from interfering with
their activities. Do not jump to the conclusion that the senders have conscious knowledge of who you are or what you are doing on the level of Earth-plane activity.
They know that many different people are doing research into electronic mind control, and that among them are undoubtedly some conscious extraterrestrial agents with the correct mental programs to understand messages of the type you are now receiving from us. They also know how to send messages directly to you through music subliminals,
because they know some of the mental programming you have to have to do your job. They are “on your wavelength” or “they know your language.” So, no matter who
they are or which side they are on, they try to get you to join them or to keep you from interfering with them.

Another thing you have to realize is that these messages that you can now receive because you have the right programs loaded into your mind are not new. Many different groups of spirits and living magicians have been sending such messages for years. That hasn’t changed; it is you who have changed. You can now hear and see the messages, whereas a few months or years ago you couldn’t. What you are receiving is quite real, but it isn’t quite what you think it is either. You think that the messages are much more specific than they are. You think that they are aimed at you as a unique individual. [Griffith asks about “Raudive voices,” named for a psychic researcher (Konstantin Raudive) who postulated that disembodied spirits could impress their voices onto magnetic recording tape. He has received a large number of messages of this type
during his music research. Does spirits that psychokinetically manipulate the molecules in the tape put them there, or is there another explanation?]

The messages are not on the tapes, but in your mind. Spirits perceive the pattern of
background noise going onto the tape and key it to a telepathic message they’re sending into your subconscious. You can consciously retrieve the message when you listen to the tape. The proof is that sometimes more than one person will hear the same message on a particular tape, sometimes not. Also, if you listen to such a tape frequently, you can learn to retrieve the message without it. Both we and the Theocrats use this method of communication frequently, on music tapes as well as tapes containing only noise.Griffith: The scope and effectiveness of the electronic mind-control techniques you have just described give the fifth-stage Theocrats much more power to control people than the religious Theocrats have ever had. However, Western civilization still seems to be evolving towards the goals set by the Invisible College long ago: an increase in individual
sovereignty in all aspects of human life, a decrease of bigotry and closed-mindedness,
and a higher level of general knowledge and sophistication in both technological and social areas.

I assume that this is why you remain optimistic about the future, but nevertheless, many of the people who commented on Spiritual Revolution [a preliminary edition of War in Heaven] expressed serious doubts about the future of the human race on Earth. They believe that nuclear war, biological warfare, or destruction of the Earth’s biosphere through pollution will prevent an advanced civilization from developing on this planet, no matter what the Invisible College is able to do.
I present here a very brief summary of the state of the Technology War at that time, category by category. Kyle Griffith will provide a current look at this area in the WiH Forum.
1 The Birth Control Pill. The pill, not birth control in general, is important because
the way in which it interferes with the menstrual cycle can enhance women’s ability to gain control of their psychic powers – something the Theocrats always try to suppress.

The effect is related to changes that take place in the somatic soul during early
pregnancy as it prepares itself to bond with a reincarnating astral soul. Birth-control
pills simulate early pregnancy. The AIDS virus was created by Theocrats by using psychokinetic genetic manipulation to alter a relatively harmless African venereal disease virus.

The need to find a vaccine for AIDS through genetic engineering was one of the chief
reasons why such research was sanctioned and financed on a large scale. And genetic research is far more dangerous than atomic research in its potential to produce a wider variety of weapons of mass destruction, more easily and cheaply. The risk of accidental release of such weapons is much higher than the risk of accidental nuclear war.

Right-wing reactionaries in 1988 were conspiring to pressure governments to treat
AIDS with benign neglect and to withhold vaccine from public distribution for as long
as possible after it was discovered. This would allow AIDS to spread very deeply into
the Third World, so that the means of preventing or curing it could eventually be used
as a weapon to further First World interests.

This power-brokerage scenario could be used with other biological agents as well. Griffith: I’ve always felt the same way about the predictions of historical events between the time of Nostradamus and the present. What has impressed me are his visual images of modern technology. Some of his verses contain what seem to be accurate descriptions of
airplanes, submarines, missiles, conventional and nuclear bombing, chemical and
biological warfare, etc.

Invisible College: Nostradamus had visions of all these things that were quite accurate, but this had nothing to do with prophesy. Physical technology develops along similar lines on many different worlds, and the images he described were taken from the historical records of some advanced civilization. Griffith: It looks to me as if the advanced extraterrestrial civilizations that is
manipulating the evolution of earthly society are divided into two factions with
conflicting goals.
1 the Elohim are here to assist in the birth of new Gods,
and
2 the space people are here to create a new civilization similar their own.
Invisible College: This is completely correct, and it is a difficult political situation. The Elohim have a strong claim here because of the astral technology that their ancestors left on this planet long ago;
but they also want to maintain a good relationship with us, so they will allow us to found an advanced civilization of individual humans on Earth if possible.

There is no emotional animosity between the two factions, and a complex set of rules to determine how the situation is handled. And in one sense, the Earth people themselves will determine the fate of their own world.
Invisible College: If a major nuclear war occurs before Earth has established
viable space colonies, no advanced individual civilization will develop here.
And even if such colonies are established, the fate of hundreds of millions of
individual souls depends on the course of history from now until the Last
Days. If the Earth is still capable of sustaining human life after the Last Days,
many more people can be saved than if the new civilization is forced to live in
space.
Griffith: Isn’t there a better way to communicate the information than putting it into a book like this?

Invisible College: Of course, but it is a good first step. Having the information in coherent verbal form in an earthly language makes it easier to communicate it telepathically to large numbers of people. And the more people who read the book and write or talk about the ideas in it, the better.
WAR IN HEAVEN is just one tiny part of our efforts to spread this information.

Werking
The Theocrats are violating natural laws when they refuse to reincarnate. The souls of all living beings are constructed to incarnate and draw energy from the physical body. This is the only natural and efficient way in which the soul can get the vital energy it needs to
function and regenerate itself. Although the mechanics of this process are quite complicated, we will explain them in some detail to allow you to understand the rest of the theory.
The soul is actually an astral body, made up of a special form of matter.
This matter is composed of subatomic particles like ordinary matter, but with different properties. Let us call this special form of matter astral matter, and the ordinary form physical matter.
The subatomic particles that compose astral matter have different properties from the particles that compose physical matter.
Physicists on Earth have named and described some of these properties, such as mass, spin, and electrical charge. You also have terms like “charm” in your vocabulary for properties the scientific community apparently understands much less clearly.

The principal difference between astral matter and physical matter is that all astral subatomic particles possess much less mass than equivalent particles of physical matter. The charges and the mass ratios of the particles of astral atoms are about the same as those of physical atoms. In other words, the particles that compose the nucleus
of an atom of astral matter have a positive or neutral electrical charge and their mass is greater than that of the negatively charged particles that revolve around the nucleus. However, the astral subatomic particles equivalent to physical protons and neutrons are much less massive than physical electrons.

Since physicists often describe physical electrons as having “negligible mass” compared with physical protons and neutrons, this means that the total mass of astral atoms is extremely small.
Q. How can astral matter exist in the presence of physical matter? Why don’t the tiny astral atoms simply get sucked in by the gravitational attraction of the physical atoms and end up orbiting them the way electrons do?
A. Astral subatomic particles have a different characteristic that determines gravitational attraction. They are attracted by gravity to each other but not to particles of physical matter. In fact, the astral atoms and molecules that make up the soul occupy the same space as the physical matter that makes up the body. Both kinds of matter are mostly empty space between particles anyway, and since there is no gravitational attraction between the two kinds of matter, the molecules simply slip by one another. This also explains people’s inability to see astral matter or detect it with physical laboratory
instruments.

Energy also exists in two different forms, physical energy and astral energy. The photons that make up the two types again have different characteristics. Under most ircumstances, astral photons do not react with physical subatomic particles. Nor do physical photons
react with astral particles. However, the exception is important.

You’re saying that light and other electromagnetic energy do not affect astral matter. Does this mean that psychic energy is not in the electromagnetic spectrum at all, but in a different one?
Yes. Advanced civilizations possess a unified field theory that describes the relationship between the two, but we can’t describe it to you right now. What’s important in this discussion is that psychic or astral energy normally works only on astral matter. It does
not produce physical or chemical changes in physical matter. The reverse is also true.How does psychokinesis work then, or does it exist at all?

A. It exists, but it’s nothing like what you now think. In fact, your whole concept of the nature of psychic powers is a jumble of oversimplifications and errors. Psychokinesis does not move or change physical matter directly, but can do so by working through the
links between physical and astral matter. These links are the “Secret of Life.”
The difference between living and non-living matter is that living matter is linked to astral matter but non-living matter is not. Complex organic molecules of physical matter can form a chemical bond with similarly constructed molecules of astral matter, and the resulting structure shows the characteristics of life: irritability and the ability to eproduce.
This process is very complicated, and your knowledge of physics is not adequate to understand all it completely. Here’s an attempt to explain why astral matter can react chemically with physical matter only within living molecules and not within simpler molecules. It has to do with the vibrational frequencies of photons produced when electrons of both physical and astral matter change energy levels within complex
organic molecules. These frequencies are the same allowing physical photons to convert to astral and vice-versa.

This happens only in certain kinds of molecules, not in all. These energy conversions allow a sort of chemical bonding to occur if the two molecules are similar enough.
Q. Does this mean that astral matter – in other words, the soul – plays a part in cell division?

A. Yes, in the whole genetic process: it affects the reduplication of DNA. It also affects many different aspects of cell metabolism. And the breaking of the molecular bonds between physical molecules and astral molecules causes the phenomenon commonly called “death”.

Q. How does this tie in with the idea that the body supplies the energy to nourish the soul?

A. Some of the electromagnetic energy generated chemically by the cell’s metabolic processes is converted into astral energy by the links between the physical and astral molecules. This energy flows into the astral matter that composes the soul, powering its various functions and providing the raw material for regeneration of its astral matter. In other words, some electro-magnetic energy is converted into astral energy, passed into the soul, and converted into astral matter there to perform cellular growth and repairs.
The astral plane is actually higher on an ecological energy chain than the Earth plane, which means it receives less total usable energy.
Plants convert solar energy into chemical energy. When animals eat the plants, they absorb this energy and use most of it in growth, repair of tissues, moving around, and other activities. However, some of it is also converted into astral energy and passed into the soul.
Since each of these energy conversion processes is less than completely efficient, each link in the energy chain has access to less total energy than the one below it.

The impression of the human soul I get from this is that it’s exactly the same size and shape as the body, linked to it cell-by-cell and molecule-by-molecule. This is very different from my previous concept, which was that it is attached to the body at only one point through the traditional “silver cord.” Please explain.

A. Human beings actually have two souls, not one. So do all other animals; but plants have only one. The soul we’ve been talking about so far is a primitive structure, an astral body that is merely an analog of the physical body. It is alive in the sense that it is made up of molecules of living astral matter, but it is not sentient. It has a nervous system but
not a mind. The true soul, the one you were just talking about, is a separate structure of astral matter.

Using the term “somatic soul” for the primitive soul linked cell-by-cell to the body and “astral soul” for the other will make it easier to discuss this subject. The astral soul is a body of astral matter linked to the somatic soul’s nervous system by what you call the silver cord. This is structured like a segment of plant root with feeder roots at both ends.
The feeders at one end tap into the somatic soul’s nervous system;
those at the other end tap into the astral soul’s nervous system. Energy flows into the astral soul from the somatic soul and indirectly from the body through this cord. Energy flowing through the silver cord is the astral soul’s only truly efficient source of
nourishment.
This makes sense. I take it, then, that the silver cord breaks when the body dies, leaving the astral soul free. Correct. Remember, though, that the astral soul loses its best source of energy when it separates from the body. By contrast, when the body dies, the somatic soul does not also separate and live on independently. It simply decomposes when the body decomposes. Remember, it’s very closely linked to the body with chemical
bonds.
Q. I conclude from this that a new somatic soul is created during the embryological development of every new human being.
Correct. In fact, a cell of living physical matter can’t divide unless the astral cell linked to it also divides. Living cells and molecules can exist only in pairs, one physical, and one astral. This is why many complex organic molecules undergo chemical reactions differently in living cells from the way they do in a test tube.
Q. I assume, then, that reincarnation occurs when an existing astral soul attaches itself to the developing somatic soul of a fetus. You’ve also given a reason why the astral soul needs to reincarnate:
to link itself to a source of vital energy and nourishment. Where in the process of embryological development does this occur?
There are two very different reincarnation processes. The commonest occurs even before conception. Sexual activity often attracts a nearby spirit and causes a temporary attachment to a woman’s somatic soul at the genital chakra. (The same attachment can happen to a man, but it generally lasts only a few minutes, because the attachment
point in a male’s somatic soul is vestigial, whereas the female’s is fully functional.)

The attachment can last up to about twenty-four hours; and if conception occurs during this time, some of the hormonal secretions that accompany the process cause the woman’s

nervous system to send energy to her somatic soul that keeps the attachment intact
through the entire pregnancy. Late in pregnancy, when the somatic soul of the fetus becomes sufficiently developed, another hormonal change causes the mother’s genital chakra to reject the link to the attached soul, which then remains attached only to the fetus.
Q. I think this information might also explain why students of sex magic in both the East and the West have written so much about the relationship between the female menstrual cycle and various psychic and spiritual phenomena. Most of them have noticed that
kundalini energies vary significantly in both quantity and nature at various points
during the cycle, and that there is also a connection to mediumship and even possession.

A. Yes, this information can help magicians work out better theoretical explanations for the mechanisms of such phenomena. At present, the theories they use to explain their observed data are among the most complex and mystical hypotheses you’ll find in occult books.
This same concept should also be useful to people trying to explain some of the phenomena described by Whitley Strieber in Communion: women experiencing phantom pregnancies after “UFO abduction” experiences, etc.
To get back to our discussion of the mechanisms of reincarnation, the primitive, involuntary form of reincarnation occurs in many of the more intelligent types of “lower animals,” and it happens spontaneously to any human soul at a relatively low state of psychic development who happens to come close to a couple having intercourse. Although it allows the soul to survive death, it has serious disadvantages for both
mother and child.
All during her pregnancy the mother suffers serious psychic energy imbalances, which can cause her both mental and physical illness.
These are usually more uncomfortable than they are dangerous, but the damage suffered by the attached astral soul is often much more serious. Signals intended for the mother’s astral soul are also transmitted into the attached soul, and they usually scramble the
contents of its astral mind quite badly. For this reason, few people who reincarnate by this method show the typical characteristics of the twice born: past-life memories,
precocious intellectual or psychic development, etc.
Q. What happens if an existing astral soul doesn’t link to the mother’s somatic soul? Does this cause an early miscarriage? Recent medical evidence shows that about half of all pregnancies terminate spontaneously within a week or two after conception; since an
early miscarriage of this type closely resembles normal menstruation, the woman isn’t aware she was ever pregnant.A. This has nothing to do with reincarnation, but has purely physical causes. Every human being has to have an astral soul. If an existing astral soul is not already attached to the mother, the fetus starts generating an astral soul of its own late in pregnancy. At this point, two things can happen. Either a late reincarnation can occur, or the baby is born with a completely new soul, spontaneously created during its embryonic development.

The people the Hindus call “twice born” are those in which an astral soul at a reasonably high state of development has incarnated shortly before or after birth, a process that keeps the infant from developing its own new soul. On the average, people with twice-born souls have a head start over those with new souls or souls received through early
reincarnation. The astral soul of a twice-born person transfers memories into the physical mind during infancy and childhood that “teach it how to learn.” This is equivalent to raising the person’s effective intelligence and creativity.
Energy to nourish the soul flows from the body through the somatic soul to the astral soul, but there are smaller energy flows both ways that convey information.
The astral souls of the twice born give them a head start by feeding valuable information into the physical mind.
Why do the Theocrats refuse to reincarnate?
Remember Satan in Milton’s “Paradise Lost” saying, “Better to reign in Hell than serve in Heaven”? The Theocrats are spirits with great knowledge and psychic power. They are a sort of ruling class on the astral plane, and they don’t want to give up their power and
privilege by reincarnating. Highly advanced souls who aren’t Theocrats reincarnate
and take the chance that their soul can properly educate their new mind, and that their next reincarnation will be a pleasant and valuable one.
But it still involves taking a chance: the body might have hidden flaws that they don’t detect before incarnating, or the child’s earthly environment can take an unforeseen turn for the worse.
Also, the late reincarnation process itself is as traumatic as the physical ordeals of giving birth or being born. This trauma erases many of the memories stored in the astral soul and damages the programming that governs the astral soul’s functioning.
The Theocrats are too selfish and egotistical to take these chances, even though the alternative is extremely immoral.

Another reason why Theocrats don’t want to reincarnate is that human beings have two minds as well as two souls. One mind is in the physical body’s brain, the other is in the astral soul, and both have separate consciousness. Normally, the astral mind is conscious
while the body sleeps and unconscious while the physical mind is awake.
The two are conscious simultaneously only during certain states of altered consciousness. This “time-sharing” is humiliating for the astral mind’s ego, which considers itself superior to that of the physical mind.
Theocrats want total consciousness for their astral ego, in addition to power over other spirits.
This brings us to one of the most important things we have to tell you in this whole series of communications.
The nourishment that disembodied spirits receive from living people as radiant psychic energy is not enough to sustain them by itself. This is why all non-Theocratic spirits reincarnate within ten to fifty years after physical death: if they don’t, the astral soul starts to degenerate because of a sort of malnutrition. The astral matter that makes up its tissues can’t regenerate itself properly and reverse the effects of entropy. So the choice is reincarnation or illness, insanity, and death.
The Theocrats have found an alternative to this, but it is an evil one:
cannibalism. They use their telepathic powers to hypnotize spirits less highly developed than they are; then they attach the silver cord to them just as if the other astral soul were the somatic soul of an infant.
They can draw out enough energy this way to sustain themselves on the astral plane indefinitely, but the process destroys the other spirit.
Q. This is very frightening. Can they do this to just any other spirit, and can they do it to an astral soul incarnated in a body?
Fortunately, no to both. If they could, neither you nor we would be here talking about it. The Theocrats would have eaten up all of us just to get rid of us. They claim to be gods, but their powers are actually quite limited. Some of them are both more knowledgeable and psychically more powerful than most of the rest of us, living and disembodied, but
they are far from omnipotent.
They can’t damage an embodied soul or override its conscious will, and they usually can’t capture and devour disembodied souls who resist them, except for the weak and untrained ones that mediums call “lost souls.” And even the majority of lost souls are capable of
random psychokinetic bursts that allow them to flee the Theocrats when threatened.

The Theocrats obtain victims by posing as gods and persuading religious believers to enter their bands by promising them “eternal bliss in Heaven.”
Theocratic Bands
Please tell me more about the Theocrats and how they operate. For example, who were they when they lived on Earth?

A. Many notorious tyrants, conquerors, evil religious leaders, black magicians, and criminals have become Theocrats after death, but so have some people whom history calls saints or benign geniuses.
Power corrupts, and the prospect of achieving immortality corrupts even more.
Many people with highly developed souls whose earthly lives were lived quite ethically chose to become Theocrats after death.
This has been especially true of people who were religiously devout, then found out the horrible truth about their gods after death. If they were too powerful for the Theocrats to enslave and devour, some became members of the Invisible College and fought Theocracy; but others became Theocrats themselves. The temptation is very strong,
because the Theocrats as a class have ruled both the Earth and its astral plane throughout most of human history. For example, most of the medieval Popes and other religious leaders notorious for being cynical and power-hungry are now Theocrats. So are many famous occult leaders, from Cagliostro down to Aliester Crowley.
Q. I’ve learned a lot from Crowley’s writings and from members of occult
organizations he founded or influenced, but I’ve always also felt a deep emotional revulsion for him.
A. While he was alive, Crowley was very similar to a double agent in espionage. Sometimes he helped us in our battles against the Theocrats, but at other times he worked for them. Of course, we were always aware that no matter which side he said he was on, his only real loyalties were to himself. This kind of egotism is a typical Theocratic
personality-type, and proves that Crowley had been a Theocratic spirit between lives many times before.
Right now, he’s working with various Theocrats of an occultist persuasion, trying to turn some of the occult groups he founded into cults based on his worship. He talked frequently about doing this during his life, and now he’s in a position to put it into practice.
Q. This makes the War in Heaven sound more like the Allies against the Nazis than the forces of good against the forces of evil.
A. It’s all just politics. Both sides are working in their own interests. The important thing is that the self-interest of the Invisible College and of living people is the same. We acknowledge that we are part of the same human race as you. become literally superhuman.
Q. Are you implying, then, that the time-honored goal of so many occultists – that of becoming or merging with a god-like being – is evil?
That trying to do this turns people into Theocratic spirits who literally eat souls?

A. This question doesn’t have a yes-or-no answer, and before we can answer it all, we’ll have to give you a lot more background information.
The question isn’t really a matter of morality so much as one of dealing realistically with natural law. For example, it is a serious violation of natural law for a disembodied astral soul to take on large amounts of energy by draining it from another spirit, because there is no template for determining how the energy is assimilated, as there is when the
astral soul is attached to a body. In the latter case, the somatic soul acts as such a template. When the somatic soul transmits energy through the silver cord to nourish the astral soul, the pulses of energy are arranged in patterns that keep the growth of astral
tissues in proper balance.
By contrast, when Theocrats absorb energy from other spirits, there is no such template, so the growth-pattern is random and may put the functioning of the astral soul out of balance. Because imbalances in the astral nervous system can cause irrational thinking and behavior, most of the Theocrats are insane. And the bigger and older they are, very
often the crazier they are. Many Theocrats do irrational and self-destructive things, and
most of them eventually become so insane that other Theocrats destroy them.
Q. This means the Theocrats aren’t really immortal?
A. Most of them aren’t. They have the potential to be, but only by properly controlling the energies they assimilate, and few of them have the knowledge to do this. There are some very large, old, and stable Theocrats on the astral plane who do seem to have this
knowledge, but they don’t cause much trouble. They feed themselves by stealing spirits
from other Theocrats and don’t work directly with living people, so we don’t worry about them much.
It’s the younger Theocrats that cause the most trouble, both for the Invisible College and for living people.
Q. Why do the Theocrats maintain bands of spirit followers, and what are these bands like?
A. The Theocrats enslave other spirits to provide psychic energy, as slaves or employees on Earth provide physical labor. Individual Theocratic bands can contain from a couple of dozen spirits to several thousand, with the average in the low hundreds. The paintings
and poems that describe a Heaven containing millions of souls are inaccurate.
The daily activities of a Fundamentalist Theocratic band organized as Heaven are similar to a church service as such sects hold them on Earth, except that they go on perpetually. The Theocrat in charge poses as the Lord God Jehovah, and subordinate Theocrats pose as Christ, various Angels and Apostles, and so forth. God quotes the same Biblical passages and preaches the same sermons as preachers in the same sect do on Earth, and the congregation joins in singing the same hymns.
Dead Fundamentalists in Heaven find out they even still have to confess their sins and receive divine forgiveness, because they are still capable of thinking “rebellious and impure thoughts.” Of course, since they are in constant, direct telepathic contact with their God, the process is simple and automatic. Christians in Heaven are kept in a perpetual state of religious ecstasy, which activates their psychic powers under
the control of their God.
The Theocratic leaders of the band then channel this collective psychic energy to perform whatever functions they consider necessary. Most of the activities have to do with the survival of the band, and especially of the Theocratic dictator posing as God. The band
recruits new members from among the recently deceased, steals souls from other bands, fights to keep spirits like us from liberating members of the band, and so on.
Q. I still don’t have a clear picture of how the Theocratic bands on the astral plane relate to living people.
A. Each Theocratic band has to have a working relationship with a group of living eople, often a religious congregation. Occult and political groups are also used; and now more and more Theocratic bands are controlling groups of people whose common interest is popular music, sports, or something else centered around the electronic media.
Traditionally, the majority of Theocrats hung around places of worship, but now you can find them almost any place that crowds gather.
Q. Please clarify this. You talk about spirits being on the astral plane as if it’s a place, but you also say, “hang around places of worship.” Just where is the astral plane? Is it on Earth, in another dimension, or what? A. The astral plane is a condition, not a place. A spirit, meaning an astral soul, on the astral plane is in the condition of not being bound to
physical matter through the silver cord. The Earth plane is the surface of the planet Earth as you perceive it with your physical senses. The astral plane is that same place as we perceive it with our psychic senses.
We and the Theocrats and all spirits live on the same world you do.
Spirits are present around you all the time, and if you enter the correct state of consciousness to put your psychic senses under conscious control, you can perceive them directly.

But point-of-death experiences are accidents, and there isn’t much that the Theocrats can do to prevent them.

Q. When people see the spirits of dead relatives waiting to greet then during point-of-death experiences, are these fakes like the Theocrats pretending to be Jesus, or are the other spirits really their relatives?

A. Quite often, they really are. Theocratic bands often contain many members of one family. There are several reasons for this.
Frequently, whole families belong to the same church congregation and are recruited, after death, into the Theocratic band that controls it. Even if not, ties of family affection are also used to recruit spirits after death.
One of the most important activities of every Theocratic band is obtaining new members to replace the souls the band devours.
Maintaining a relationship with an organized group of living people also allows the Theocrats to maintain a social and political system here on Earth working in their interest. Theocratic bands maintain their relationships with the living by using religious mind control, which should be described in a separate chapter.
Let us end this chapter by pointing out that every single one of the ideas at the core of traditional deistic doctrine is a lie.
“Only God (under various specific names in different sects) is good: people are basically evil and are incapable of improving themselves morally by their own efforts.” This is a lie.
“Only God is naturally immortal, but people can gain immortality by doing proper service for the Deity.” This is a lie.
“Human beings can receive forgiveness for their sins, and divine strength to prop up their various weaknesses, by ‘Letting God into their hearts’ i.e., by creating a powerful psychic bond between themselves and the deity.” This is also a lie.

Q. From what I’ve learned so far, the biggest lie of all is that the “gods” worshiped by organized religions are “archetypes of virtue.” We humans are bad enough, but the Theocrats are obviously many times worse than the worst of us. And it’s not Satan who’s the real “Father of Lies.” It’s God.
The key to the whole religious mind-control technique is putting people into a state of consciousness best called the “religious trance.” It is essentially a mild hypnotic trance in which the conscious will is awake but passive, as opposed to deep trances, in which it is
completely inactive. People in a religious trance are completely aware of what is going on around them, and are recording these events in their memories exactly as they would in a normal waking state.

They are also capable of thinking and acting voluntarily, but can only do so within certain very definite limits without breaking out of the religious trance and assuming normal consciousness.
Q. It’s fairly common to describe someone who’s concentrating intently on reading, listening to music, or watching television, as “hypnotized.” You’re saying that this is literally true?
A. Yes, but remember, it’s a rather light trance. If the material being presented begins to contradict the person’s existing opinions or knowledge, identification breaks down. He or she assumes full normal consciousness and thinks, “I don’t agree with this,” or “I
don’t understand this,” or “This is wrong.” However, identification with sensory input can make people accept things they would reject if they were fully conscious, as long as the input isn’t controversial or unfamiliar enough to break their concentration.Once the conscious will becomes passive, the flow of character, assuming a level closer to that during sleep than that during normal wakefulness. In a person fully trained to enter
the religious trance, electrical activity in the physical nervous system becomes stable at exactly the right level to allow an equal flow of energy into and out of the astral soul. This allows the astral will to awaken partially, and creates a direct, two-way link between
the physical mind and the astral mind.
As long as the religious trance lasts, information can pass reasonably freely between the physical mind and the astral mind and vice versa.
Also, the physical mind can receive impressions from the psychic senses of the astral soul more or less directly.

Q. How does this compare to the trance state I’m in to receive this communication? Is it the same?

A. No. You are in a “psychic trance,” which is not the same as a “religious trance.” It’s a much less passive state of consciousness, and involves much larger flows of energy into and out of the astral soul. Both the physical will and the astral will act in concert control the psychic trance. The religious trance is controlled by outside sensory
input into both the physical and astral minds. The psychic trance is an active state of consciousness that leaves you free to ask questions and make comments using your full creative powers. The religious trance is a passive state used to control and brainwash people.

The purpose of a psychic trance is for an individual to take conscious control of his/her psychic powers and use them to receive messages by telepathy or perform some other psychic working. What happens during the religious trance is not quite the same. Once people are completely in the religious trance, they are able to receive telepathic
messages from everyone around them and from any disembodied spirits present;
but the process is not nearly as conscious as what you’re doing right now in a psychic trance.The actual religious mind-control process, the technique that provides telepathic emotional reinforcement to help program people’s minds, is a sort of “psychic chain-reaction” that occurs while a group of people are in the religious trance together. In other words, the telepathic messages sent out by every member of the congregation influence the emotions and thinking of every other member, like a box of matches catching fire
or an atomic chain reaction.

This process creates a “religious group mind”: the telepathic transmissions of the entire congregation mutually reinforce one another until everyone present is thinking and feeling the same thing very, very strongly. People in such a state can feel extremely strong emotions, as strong as those that accompany the most powerful physical
sensations such as sexual orgasm or extreme pain. Within certain limitations, this is an extremely powerful method for controlling people’s motivations and future behavior. One of its worst features is that the people being controlled enjoy it more than anything else in life. You might call it the ultimate “high.” And it’s more addictive than any chemical drug.Q. The religious mind-control process resembles some of the direct electronic mind control described in anti-utopian fiction. George 0rwell exaggerated when he thought the state described in his novel 1984 would arise out of modern Democracy and Socialism, but he missed something much more important. His totalitarian state with its
mind-control has always existed. It’s as close as your local Fundamentalist church.

A. That’s one of the most important things we’re trying to tell you. People have always been “property” and “cattle” just as Charles Fort speculated, but it’s not on the physical level. What has been enslaved is the mind during life and the soul after death.
This is what Lovecraft was really hinting at in his Cthulhu mythos, isn’t it? And it also explains Shaver’s Deros and hundreds of other references in fiction and serious speculation. Very few of the people who wrote these references knew much about
Theocracy as we’re describing it here. All that really happened is that we were able to transmit a few words or some visual images to them telepathically.
Sometimes these were received in conscious “flashes” of vision or inspiration; but more often they sank directly into the subconscious, and were later called up and considered original creations of the imagination.
Q. One example that comes to mind is the material about the Devil eating souls in The Screwtape Letters by C.S. Lewis. He must have picked up a glimpse of the truth about Theocracy, but he was so deeply brainwashed that it didn’t liberate him. His conscious
intellect just twisted the information around to support his Christian belief system.The last thing the Theocrats want is for religious believers to stop sinning. That is why they made sexual pleasure a sin, and why Christianity and most other organized religions teach the obvious fallacy that women are inferior to men.
Q. In other words, when the Theocrats made up religious doctrine, they included deliberate lies in it so that people would never be able to be completely virtuous.
A. No. It’s worse than that. Fallible human beings can never be completely virtuous in the sense of being able to obey the absolute letter of any rigid ethical code. However, falling short of perfection in obeying most ethical codes provides reinforcement for modifying
behavior in positive ways: the more people are punished for disobedience or rewarded for obedience, the closer their average behavior gets to the code.

The “better” they behave, the more positive reinforcement and less negative reinforcement they get. Even though they never reach perfection, they tend to feel the code is constructive because progress is rewarded and retrogression is punished.
Q. This is easy enough to understand, but how does it apply to a moral code that says sex is sinful?
A. That’s the point we’re trying to make. This kind of logic doesn’t apply to such a code. Sexual desire originates on the biochemical level and cannot be extinguished by manipulating the programming of the mind. People can be conditioned to hate and fear In this context, we are defining “mind” as “The information stored in the brain, plus the software for retrieving and processing that information.”
Do you now understand the full magnitude of the problem that a completely false item of religious doctrine causes people? It’s an inherently frustrating situation. The subjugation of women makes life much less pleasant for both genders. It turns women into
slaves, forever unable to live full lives. And it does just as much harm to men when it
turns them into oppressors and exploiters.

This creates a no-win situation, because Fundamentalists still receive negative reinforcement even if they obey their moral code perfectly. For example, trying to live up to Christian ideals of chastity is always going to create guilt feelings and internal conflict, because believing that sexual feelings are wrong does not extinguish them, even though it
might repress or sublimate them.

And living within a sexist family structure always creates interpersonal conflicts.
Q. I see now why you say this process is similar to drug addiction. The
Fundamentalist moral code contains elements that can’t help making people feel frustrated or guilty, which creates an artificial need for “divine forgiveness of sins.”
A. There’s a significant difference between a humanistic ethical code and the moral codes of Theocratic religion. The former are designed to meet people’s needs, the latter to meet the Theocrats’ needs.
Even though most humanistic ethical codes are too idealistic to follow rigidly, “human nature” itself regulates reinforcement in response to them in ways that prevent excessive guilt and frustration.
In other words, committing murder or assault is severely punished, cursing and screaming at people less so, but the social environment of most societies does not punish people for merely feeling anger but not expressing it in word or deed. However, the negative emotions themselves are a form of negative reinforcement. Notice that this process is self-limiting: serious offenses receive severe punishment, whereas minor ones receive light punishment. This is not true of violations of religious morality based on absolutes.

You and your readers should also be constantly aware that the Theocrats do not confine their activities to religion and occultism, but corrupt and control human beings through all activities that produce certain states of altered consciousness. For example, when people use the electronic media for passive
recreational purposes – listening to popular music over the radio or on
recordings, watching televised sports events and game shows, and
playing the simpler computer games – they often enter a trance
state that renders them vulnerable to telepathic mind-control by
Theocratic spirits.

We must first give more background information about the nature of
spiritual beings and psychic powers in general.Chapter 13:
Soul, Mind, and Consciousness
Q. Even though you’ve explained how the Theocrats indoctrinate people who attend religious services by conditioning them with a mixture of sensory and telepathic reinforcement, I still find it hard to understand this in terms of what I know about psychology. For example, how can the whole human race be so brainwashed that they don’t even speculate consciously about certain aspects of spiritual reality? The idea that evil spirits might pose as gods and exploit people through organized religion is an obvious one, yet almost no one ever talks or writes about it. The whole subject is literally “unthinkable.”
Also, if religious mind control puts people into conflict with their own human nature, as happens when they are taught that sexual feelings are morally wrong, why doesn’t this negative reinforcement cancel out the positive reinforcement of religious ecstasy? And even more important, most Americans right now aren’t Fundamentalists.
The majority don’t even go to churches regularly at all; and many of those who do, go to liberal churches that don’t practice religious mind control as you describe it.

Since this is so, why aren’t all the facts about Theocracy and religious mind control common knowledge?
A. The answer to all these questions is the same: the Theocrats simply know a lot more about psychology than people do. An electronic computer analogy applies here. People on Earth right now are like the users of a computer system: they can in-put and retrieve data, and they can run the existing programs to process the data in set ways.
Many of them have enough programming skills to modify some of the programs slightly, but they don’t understand the basic design of the software very well. On the other hand, the Theocrats not only understand the software far more completely, but also have
much easier access to the special “command mode” used to modify it. This command mode is the telepathic chain-reaction used in religious mind control.

Of course trained human psychics also have access to it, and so do spirits in the Invisible College; but it is still extremely difficult to free people from Theocratic control. The mind of the average person on Earth right now is run by software designed by the Theocrats to keep people from consciously finding out they exist.

And there’s no use just telling people the truth: they simply can’t understand or believe it, because the mental programs they use for understanding and believing things were designed by the Theocrats.
Q. Almost all religious and occult literature, and the majority of modern
speculative writing that comes close to discussing Theocracy, assume that “gods,” “demons,” etc., have the power to kill humans who discover “forbidden knowledge,” or at the very least, to over-ride the conscious will and keep humans from remembering such things or pursuing such lines of enquiry further. What are the facts on this?
Especially, are the Theocrats aware of telepathic conversations like this one, and
what can they do about it?
A. Obviously, the Theocrats don’t have the psychic power to kill people or analyze their conscious minds, or you wouldn’t have survived to write this. They operate through the subconscious, and they keep people from finding out about them by making it difficult to
understand certain kinds of spiritual information or draw rational conclusions from it.

An explanation of how they do this is quite complex. Like the answers to your first set of questions, it depends on a more complete knowledge of the nature of the mind and the soul than you now have, and this is going to be difficult to explain. Keep in mind, throughout what follows, that much of the terminology from psychology and computer
science is going to be misused. We have to use the words in your vocabulary that
are closest to the meanings we need to convey, but they aren’t always too close.The first thing we need to clarify is the comparison between the human brain and a computer, and between the mind and the software and data in a computer. The only similarity between the human brain and present electronic computers on Earth is that both store and process data. The methods for doing so are quite different. This is where most
of the books about biocomputers and psychocybernetics go wrong. They take the
analogy between the brain and the computer, and between the mind and computer software, much too literally.
The best example is that the electronic computer deals in absolute or “hard” values, whereas the brain deals in comparative or “soft” values. If you create a new file in a computer and enter data into it, the information stays there exactly as entered, and you can retrieve it in its complete original form just by entering the correct access code. If you want to delete something, you can “kill” it instantly and completely by using the correct commands. Everything you know about the human memory and learning process makes it obvious the human mind doesn’t work this way.
Memory storage and retrieval in the human mind is a cumulative rather than an absolute process. If a person’s senses receive a particular set of data only once, fewer of the individual details are recorded in memory than if it is received repeatedly. Also, information may be automatically forgotten if not periodically retrieved, a phenomenon that behaviorists call extinction. These two processes are almost impossible to
analyze using a computer analogy.
The electronic computer is an artificial construction, designed to do exactly what the human operator tells it to do. It’s also basically binary: a circuit is either open or closed, giving a series of “yes” and “no” answers. Computer software is designed exactly the same way, to match the hardware. The internal data-processing functions of the
computer can be very complex, but this complexity is always built up out of these simple binary building blocks.
Neither the brain nor the mind works this way.
Q. Doesn’t the biological principle of “irritability” put a binary base under the behavior of living organisms? For example, some microorganisms show positive or negative phototropism: they approach a source of light, or they move away from it.
A. This analogy doesn’t hold up very well, because even microorganisms often show much more complex behavior than this. Biological behavior is based not on simple “yes” and “no,” but on increasing or decreasing orders of probability that an organism will
respond in a given way to a given stimulus. The probability that an organism will show a given response is determined by the quantity and quality of reinforcement it receives for
performing that response. The behavior of the computer is based on “either A or B.” The behavior of the biological organism is based on “degrees of A or B” with the quantitative values of the probabilities being determined by environmental reinforcement of many different kinds

subconscious
The computer model of the mind is still useful, though, because it’s the only way even to begin to discuss the subject in the English language right now, poorly as the available terminology fits the realities. For example, it is much easier to understand the concept of the “subconscious” if you think of the mind as the total data and programs stored in an electronic computer, with many different kinds of files, each kind having different access codes.

In other words, what people call “normal consciousness” is like a computer menu, which gives access to certain files and allows them to perform certain operations. Various “altered” states of consciousness give access to entirely different menus. Since the Theocrats have some degree of direct access to the “control mode” for modifying
these programs in both the physical and astral mind, they have redesigned many of them to serve their selfish purposes for exploiting human beings both on Earth and after death.
mind control is practiced in many different places besides religious services. The Theocrats often practice it on the crowds:
1 attending sporting events
2 in gambling casinos
3 at political rallies
4 during musical concerts of many types
5 in a number of other places.
Whenever many people enter an intense emotional state at the same time and have their collective attention focused on a common objective, Theocratic spirits can use subconscious telepathic manipulation to put them into a religious trance and reprogram their minds with religious mind control.The important thing is to get as many of the facts as possible out into the open and let people decide for themselves. And it’s finally beginning to happen. References to the truth about Theocracy are beginning to appear in the writings of hundreds of different authors. But the information is still mostly just isolated fragments, and it’s also obvious
that most of the people who write them down don’t really know what they are, or even that they’re very important.
Even though most of the individual facts that make up the model of spiritual reality being presented in this book are already available to the public, very few people are capable of assembling them into a coherent theory, as you are doing here. This is because the mental
programs they use to draw conclusions from information on spiritual subjects were
deliberately designed by the Theocrats to be illogical and irrational. (designed enviroment)
Q. I’ve wondered about this for a long time, because empirical thinking appears to be the natural way for the mind to operate if you assume that the functioning of the thought-process is determined by positive and negative reinforcement.
A. Correct. As a general rule, assuming that the truth is true will bring positive reinforcement; assuming that it is false, or that something other than the truth is true, will bring negative reinforcement.
There are exceptions to this rule, but it does operate with reasonable consistency, enough to program people with roughly empirical methods of thinking.
This is what most people mean by “common sense”: drawing conclusions from the available observed information, and being willing to modify those conclusions if they are contradicted by further information when put into practice.

Of course, this can get extremely complicated, especially when one is dealing with other people. Since the individual usually has rather incomplete information on a given subject, everyone makes a lot of mistakes. Also, people all tend to be conservative in making
decisions:
it’s easier to keep on doing something the way you’ve done it before than it is to change just because the circumstances indicate it might be a good idea.
Both of these exceptions are important, but you should realize they are also self-limiting. The more information you receive that contradicts your present conclusion, the more likely you are to change it.
Also, your basic conservatism or inertia about changing opinions tends to give way when circumstances put enough pressure on you. When you start receiving significant negative reinforcement for behaving in a given way, it gradually becomes obvious that you should find an alternative.
This is the way the mind operates in decision-making most of the time, especially in dealing with the physical world. But this kind of natural empirical reasoning is used much less often than one might expect in dealing with other people, and hardly at all in dealing with psychic and spiritual matters. The Theocrats are responsible for this.

The key to Theocratic power is the nature of what the behaviorists call reinforcement. As materialists, they think of it as something concrete;
but it also has a subjective component, and the Theocrats are able to make use of this fact to manipulate the kind of reinforcement that people receive in response to their behavior.
Q. By “a subjective component in reinforcement,” do you mean that a concept like “pain” or “pleasure” is subjective in the sense of being subject to interpretation by the person receiving the sensory impulses?
A. No. That part of it is objective: the neural impulses we call pain are not the same as the ones we call pleasure; they have different electrical characteristics and travel over different circuits within the nervous system.
Yes, that’s verified by what I know of scientific conclusions on the subject. Where, then, is the “subjective component”?
A. The best name for it in English is “the emotional reaction to sensory stimulus.” As sensory stimuli are received by the mind of a person in a normal state of consciousness, they cause the retrieval of ideas and emotions from memory. This component is subjective because it comes out of memory storage rather than from the outside
environment, and in many cases it has more effect on decision-making than the
sensory input alone.
Let’s try a specific example. Suppose a racially prejudiced white man takes a job where many of his co-workers are blacks. Initially, he tends to interpret everything they say and do in ways that reinforce his existing prejudice: if they are confident and assertive, they
are acting “above their station in life.” If they’re friendly, they’re being presumptuous and impertinent. If they sense his prejudice and keep their distance from him or act hostile, this is proof that people of different races are not meant to work together. And so on. His experience should be teaching him that, on the average, black people are no different from white people; but his own subjective reactions to sensory intake tend to prevent him from learning.
The behaviorist literature describes these kinds of reactions, of course, because they are very common, but the psychologists don’t even speculate that a deliberate conspiracy is responsible for those elements of human behavior that are irrational or self-destructive.
Instead, they take a Darwinian approach.
For example, in the case cited above, they’d say that the prejudiced man learned his prejudice in an environment where he had little personal contact with black people: he received positive reinforcement from the prejudiced whites around him for showing negative emotional reactions when blacks were mentioned, so he became prejudiced. When he enters an environment where he comes in contact with black people, these prejudices continue to function until they are extinguished.
This is a process very similar to random mutation and natural selection.
This process does account for a lot of human behavior. However, mental programming from Theocratic spirits has to be added into this equation. The Theocrats don’t want people to learn from experience or adjust to new situations in their environment, so they
encourage emotionalism over rationality. When people make decisions rationally, they are harder for the Theocrats to control.
Religious mind control is a delicate process, because the religious trance is a rather shallow one. If people in a religious trance perform rituals that are unfamiliar, or hear preaching that seriously contradicts their existing beliefs, they return to a normal state of
consciousness.
Effective religious mind control can be practiced during rituals only when those rituals remain relatively stable.
This is also one of the principal reasons why Theocratic religion is socially and politically conservative or reactionary.
Q. I still don’t see how the Theocrats can program the minds of the entire human race so thoroughly that the truth about Theocracy has never become common knowledge.
A. A few people throughout history have, in fact, learned various elements of the truth about Theocracy and written them down in religious and occult literature. However, these elements were always fragmentary; and more important, neither the people who found
them nor the rest of the human race were capable of fully understanding them.
Especially, no one was able to design experiments to discover further elements of this knowledge and work towards a unified theory to explain the whole thing.Q. Why should the entire human race find it so hard to make the same breakthrough that I’m making, which enables me to discover and accept this kind of information? I understand, at least partially, how religious mind control works on believers, but why should the minds of everyone else be similarly affected?
A. This comes back to the basic behaviorist theory that human personality is conditioned into people by their physical environment – this includes the mental programs that they use to evaluate data and decide what is true and what is false. Even if you leave direct telepathic programming during religious mind control out of the picture, people still
receive their programming from both their physical and social environments.
Reptilian brain dominating our live an dthe mamale brain which has to develop at the backstage.
Programming from the physical environment usually favors empirical thinking, but that from the social environment favors acceptance of doctrine on faith.
A large part of the customs and beliefs and instinctive emotional reactions that make up this social environment were created by Theocratic religion. The further back you go into human history, the greater the percentage of people who were devout believers in Theocratic religion and were subjected to religious mind control to a significant degree throughout their lives.
Q. This definitely appears to be true when we look at Western history over the last thousand years, but I can see gaps further back.
For example, it doesn’t seem as if either the Romans or the Greeks were very devout during important periods of their civilizations.
A. On the contrary-the vast majority of the population in both civilizations were devout believers in Pagan religions that practiced effective religious mind control. However, there were periodic weakenings of religious belief among certain segments of the
population, which allowed important occult, philosophical, political, and scientific works to be written, works based on some degree of empirical thinking. Remember, the Greek and Roman philosophers were just a tiny elitist group of intellectuals. The majority viewpoint then was not that of Socrates, but that of the people who condemned him to
death.

The hold of Theocratic religion on most of Earth’s living population did not begin to weaken until the Modern Era, from about the 1300’s down to the present. And even today, the greater part of the population is still subject to religious mind control.
Modern civilization does program people with personality structures that resist religious mind control, but the Theocrats have been able to counter our efforts along these lines by resorting to electronic mind control.
Q. My research into secret societies and the forces manipulating human civilization has given me the impression that the Invisible College also makes use of both religious and electronic mind control.

Chapter 14:
Electronic Mind Control
A. Electronic mind control works on two different levels, just as religious mind control does.
We described in some detail in Chapter Twelve how religious services put people into an altered state of consciousness similar to a light hypnotic trance, and how the thinking and behavior of people in such a religious trance can be influenced by what they experience
through the physical senses during the service. In other words, they often learn to believe and act on the preacher’s words as people, learn to react to post-hypnotic suggestions during regular hypnosis.
Electronic mind control does exactly the same thing, and often to an even greater degree. It is also even more addictive than religious mind control. Like religious mind control, electronic mind control works on two different levels, one physical and one psychic

We will next discuss the physical level, which can be directly observed with the physical senses and analyzed with the conscious intellect.
There are many, many books in existence that describe this process, including detailed instructions for spotting subliminals by analyzing movies or TV shows in extreme slow-motion, along with explanations by psychologists for determining what specific effects the subliminal messages will have on the viewer. Similar information has also been
published describing how sensory mind-control is performed through popular music, radio talk shows, and other auditory media, though this subject has not been treated as extensively as mind-control through the visual media.

Electronic or media mind-control has a psychic component just as religious mind control does, but this employs completely different mechanisms, and your readers should be careful not to get confused reading the two sets of technical details in one book. They
don’t contradict one another, but they might seem to if not completely understood.
Everything we said in Chapter Twelve about religious mind-control is based on the postulate that psychic phenomena are broadcast-propagation phenomena like light or radio waves, and that they obey the inverse-square law.
In other words, the strength of a telepathic signal varies inversely with the square of the distance between transmitter and receiver, so psychic workings function most efficiently when the people or spirits involved are spatially close to one another. This is one reason why we continually stress the fact that the astral plane is a condition, not a place, and that
spirits are present in the same space that living people occupy.
However, there is a second, non-broadcast system for transmitting and receiving psychic energies between human souls, which we haven’t mentioned yet. Do you remember the old Greek Myth about the “Threads of Destiny” woven by the goddesses called the Fates?
These threads actually exist, but they aren’t woven by superhuman beings.
They are “transmission lines” of astral matter that connect one soul to another, and they allow telepathic communications over greater distances and with greater power than can be accomplished by ordinary “broadcast” telepathy.
These threads are created spontaneously when astral souls come into contact with one another while generating large amounts of psychic energy. Whenever the astral mind is in the correct state of consciousness, generating these threads is just as natural and
automatic as the process that spiders use to leave a silk strand behind them when they travel.
Some of the more ambitious TV evangelists have also directly linked large numbers of ordinary members of Theocratic congregations – and hundreds of thousands of new converts as well – into their electronic mind control networks by periodically holding huge, live revival meetings.
(They are often held in major sports stadiums, which, as we will see in a moment, are especially appropriate.)
This is also why several of the major evangelists have started colleges, and why one TV ministry even built its own imitation of Disneyland.
Q. Sometimes the little details are more biting than the big, mind-boggling horror stories. Think of it: a theme park where families can get enslaved to both electronic and religious mind-control while they take their vacation!
People don’t have to be watching a sermon or listening to a hymn to receive subconscious telepathic messages from the very same spirits who control fundamentalist religion; they only have to be in the correct state of altered consciousness (which TV and radio produces automatically in all members of the audience who haven’t learned specific techniques for preventing it), and they have to have the transmission lines of astral matter implanted in the right part of their soul, linking them into the network.Q. In other words, the football widow’s husband absorbs just as much Theocratic media mind-control from his weekend glued to the tube as does the Fundamentalist who watches the same amount of religious programming?

A. Yes. Live sports events and casino gambling serve the same function in this network as church services and revival meetings do in the electronic religious mind control networks. Compulsive gambling, especially on sports events through an enormous (and mostly illegal) electronic bookmaking network, plays the same part as does the cycle
of sin/guilt/forgiveness in Theocratic religion.
I knew that both sports fanaticism and gambling were addictive and could sometimes seriously harm a susceptible person, but I also knew that virtually anything could cause a harmful addiction if a person has the right pattern of character defects. However, I also felt very strong background “vibes” in the counterculture that said, “Stay away from
spectator sports and big-time gambling.”

Consciousness
The answer to the first is technical and almost impossible to describe in English, but we’ll try. Since you, and probably a significant number of your readers, are familiar with electronic computers, we will use computer terminology for our explanation.

First, you have to realize that a normal state of consciousness is comparable to a computer program that’s already running in an input or output mode instead of a command mode. In an input mode, you can enter data into the files of the computer to be stored or processed. In an output mode, you can retrieve information that’s already been
processed, and print it out or make some other use of it. On most modern computers, you can switch between these two modes very easily, and this analogy seems to apply to the mind as well.
The input mode of normal consciousness consists of receiving information through the senses and entering it into the memory, where it is processed in various ways and is available for later retrieval. The output mode consists of making use of data that the mind has already processed to feel emotions, think, speak, listen, move the body, and perform a wide variety of other activities. The whole thing is much more complex and sophisticated than anything conceivable for electronic computers, even in theory, but the analogy should be clear.

However, you can’t modify the program that’s running on an electronic computer set to an input or output mode. In order to do that, you’d have to enter some kind of command mode.
Q. As an example, before I typed this paragraph, I entered the command mode of this word processing program and changed the margins for this one paragraph. But now I’m back in the input mode to write this.

A. When this analogy is applied to states of consciousness in the human mind, you have to realize that the situation is very complex. On one level, you feel that you have a great deal of free will, a large measure of control over what you think and do and even over
how you react emotionally. This is simply because you are aware of a large number of different alternative courses of action open to you at any given time.
You are much less aware of those alternatives that are not open to you. For example, large areas of your total memory are not available to conscious access at any particular time. Like many electronic computers, the human mind arranges memories in banks, and you normally have access to only a few of these at any one time.
You can change banks by an act of conscious will, but this often loses you access to information you could recall easily before, from the other memory bank. In addition, there’s the subconscious, which contains memories that are very rarely available for conscious access.

Q. It also appears to me that normal consciousness includes at least limited command functions: for example, deliberately “putting yourself in a mood” to do a particular thing that you couldn’t do without advance concentration and preparation. This may be analogous to certain capabilities on this word processing program: for example, I
don’t have to leave the input mode to PRINT IN ALL CAPS or to underline.
A. Yes, but you can’t change the line-length except by going into a command mode, as you did above. Now the point we’re trying to make here is that LSD and related psychedelic drugs create a state of consciousness that is similar to putting a computer into a command mode and making changes in the program that is being run.

Q. This brings us back to my original objections to your advocacy of indiscriminate use of powerful psychedelics during the Sixties. Going into a command mode on a computer is useless, and usually detrimental to finishing the job at hand, unless you know exactly what you’re doing. For example, the command mode I entered to change the margins could also have been used to delete the whole file I’m working on, and that could have been done by pushing only two keys.
A. Fortunately, the very complexity of the human mind makes it much less vulnerable than that. What actually happened when the average person in the Sixties Psychedelics Movement took LSD wasn’t the same as the limited work with entering a “command mode” and doing deliberate mental reprogramming that Western occultists have
traditionally done when they used psychedelics.
It operated on a level unknown to the occultists.
In other words, you yourself, and all the people you considered serious occultists, underwent the same involuntary mental changes as the “street hippies” did because of taking LSD. You accomplished your limited psychic training goals, while they did nothing but “sit and groove”; but the drug itself was doing something much more
fundamental to every one of you, every time you took it.
Q. I’d already guessed most of this, but it’s still a little disturbing to see it put into words. Exactly what changes are you talking about, and how do they relate to the analogy about command modes?
A. Well, the computer you are using to write this book has several different levels of command modes, doesn’t it?Q. Yes. For example, the lowest level is the one I used to change the margins. Beyond that is another level at which I could enter another application entirely, such as creating and sorting data in an address file. Beyond that, I could write a program in Basic or Assembly Language and create a word-processing file similar to this one, but with whatever modifications we desired. And beyond that, I could write or install a
Machine Language program that would change the computer’s capabilities for writing new programs, including teaching it an entirely different computer language.

A. OK. By this analogy, the traditional use of psychedelics by occultists is on the level of writing a Basic program. That’s how people learn to use telepathy and other psychic powers: they actually write a new program, but to do so, they use capabilities already
present in their mind all along, as your computer has the Basic programming language
among its files.

Q. This explains why psychedelics are not essential to psychic training. They can speed up the process under the right circumstances, but they don’t seem to be able to give a specific psychic talent to just anybody.
There are large numbers of otherwise intelligent and creative people who simply can’t learn to become telepaths or mediums, for example, with or without taking drugs.
On the other hand, a lot of experienced occult teachers who dislike drugs assert that they can accomplish exactly the same degree of psychic training for a given person without using drugs as could be accomplished with them; it would just take longer. I tend to
agree with them in general, though I still fall into the “pro” rather than the “anti”
camp of occultists when it comes to psychedelic drugs as a psychic training aid.
A. The real reason we advocated widespread use of LSD in the Sixties had nothing to do with the short-term effects of the drug, or with conscious use of those effects for psychic training. To get back to the computer-language analogy we’ve been using, the “mind-
expansion through LSD” that we were advocating involved a Machine Language program, not merely a Basic program.
Repeated use of LSD over several years makes fundamental changes in people’s mental programming, and we used LSD plus direct telepathic conditioning techniques to significantly reprogram the minds of several million Americans. We also used environmental conditioning through the general emotional climate of the Sixties counterculture itself, as expressed in its art, music, slogans, etc.
Q. To tell the truth, I found all that stuff about “Peace and Love and Flower Children and Dropping Out and Everything Should Be Free” to be naive and impractical at best, and at worst to be self-destructive.
A. You felt this way because you already had high ideals and were concerned mostly with trying to put them into practice. We created the emotional atmosphere you find naive and self-destructive simply to teach a certain amount of idealism to young people who had been raised in average Fifties American homes that almost completely lacked
it. Throughout their childhoods, they had been taught to value various shallow forms of material success more than anything else. We were trying to push them in the right direction, and advocating widespread use of the powerful psychedelics was our principal means of doing so.

Q. How did the reprogramming that you carried out through the Sixties counterculture and psychedelics movement compare in effectiveness with that accomplished through religious mind control by Theocratic religious groups?

A. There is a tremendous difference, roughly that between doing something using a high level of technology and doing it by human muscle power, with the psychedelic drug being analogous to the machinery. We did more reprogramming in a few years on more
people than the traditional religious Theocrats do in the same number of decades. Unfortunately, the Fifth-stage Theocrats now have access to mental reprogramming techniques just as effective as those we used in the Sixties; but this is a subject we’ll discuss later.

Jung

C.G. Jung, the great doctor of the soul and one of the most inspired psychologists of
the twentieth century, had incredible insight into what is currently playing out, both
individually and collectively, in our modern-day world.
He writes,
“If, for a moment, we look at mankind as one individual, we see that it is like a man carried away by unconscious powers.” We are a species carried away – “possessed” by – and acting out, the unconscious.
Jung elaborates,
“Possession, though old-fashioned, has by no means become obsolete; only the name has changed. Formerly they spoke of ‘evil spirits,’ now we call them ‘neurosis’ or ‘unconscious
complexes.'” To condescendingly think that we, as modern-day, rational people, are too
sophisticated to believe in something as primitive as demons is to have fallen under the
spell of the very evil spirits we are imagining are nonexistent.
What the ancients call demons are a psychic phenomena that compel us to act out
behaviors contrary to our best intentions.
To quote Jung,
“…the psychic conditions which breed demons are as actively at work as ever. The demons have not really disappeared but have merely taken on another form: they have become unconscious psychic forces.”
“Possession,” according to Jung is “a primordial psychic phenomenon” that, “denotes a peculiar state of mind characterized by the fact that certain psychic contents, the so-called complexes, take over the control of the total personality in place of the ego, at least
temporarily, to such a degree that the free will of the ego is suspended.” Though the possessed might imagine they have free will, their freedom is an illusion.
They are unwittingly being used as an instrument for some “other” energy or force to
incarnate and express itself through them. Having complexes is not necessarily
pathological, as everyone has them.
What is pathological, however, is thinking we don’t have complexes, which is the
precondition that makes us most vulnerable to possession.
Jung clarifies,
“Everyone knows nowadays that people ‘have complexes.’ What is not so well known, though far more important theoretically, is that complexes can have us.”
The more complexes we have, the more we are possessed. We don’t need to get rid of our complexes, rather, we need to become consciously aware of them. What is important is what we do with our complexes. Complexes are the psychic agencies, which flavor and determine our psychological view of the world.
To quote Jung,
“The via regia [royal road] to the unconscious, however, is not the dream… but the complex, which is the author of dreams and of symptoms.” Thematically organized (such as the power-complex, savior-complex, mother-complex, inferiority complex, etc.), the complexes are the vehicles that flesh out the rich repository of contents of the underlying archetypes, giving the formless archetypes a specifically human face.
Complexes are the living elemental units of the psyche, acting like the focal or nodal
points of psychic life, in which the energy charge of the various archetypes of the
collective unconscious are concentrated.
An emotionally-charged complex acts like the epicenter of a magnetic field, attracting
and potentially assimilating into itself everything that has any resonance, relevance or
is related to itself in any way.
This inner process can be seen as it en-acts itself in the outer world when we come in
contact with someone who has an activated complex and we find ourselves drafted into
their process, picking up a role in their psyche. This is an outer reflection of how a
complex can attract, co-opt and subsume other parts of the environment, both inner
and outer, into itself.
Complexes, when split-off from consciousness, can potentially engulf and possess the
whole personality.
“Possession” is an interesting word. It conjures up immediate associations of the Devil,
who, mythologically speaking, is the one who “possesses” us, in the demonic sense of
the word.
Jung, however, differentiates his meaning of the word “possession” from the meaning
associated with the Catholic Church, for example, when he writes, “The Church’s idea of possession, therefore, is limited to extremely rare cases, whereas I would use it in a much wider sense as designating a frequently occurring psychic phenomenon.” Possession, psychologically speaking, is to identify with a complex of the unconscious, and become taken over by it such that we act it out in, as and through our lives.
Who among us hasn’t done this? Who among us shall cast the first stone?
Synchronistically, as I write this article, multiple examples of people becoming
possessed by and en-acting their unconscious on the world stage happened for
everyone to see.
Tennis star Serena Williams “losing it” when she fell into a rage at the U.S. Open,
Republican congressman Joe Wilson’s unrestrained outburst, yelling “You lie,” during
President Obama’s speech in front of congress, and rapper Kanye West melting down
and rudely interrupting and ruining country singer Taylor Swift’s acceptance speech at the MTV Video Music Awards all illustrate exactly what I am pointing at.
They were all “taken over by something.”
Jung writes,
“since the world began, mankind has been possessed.” Possession is synonymous with bondage. Jung comments that in states of possession it comes down to,
“the same age-old experience: something objectively psychic and strange to us, not under our control, is fixedly opposed to the sovereignty of our will.”
Possession means being supplanted by something stronger, being taken over and “owned” by something other than ourselves.
Jung says,
“Wherever we are still attached, we are still possessed; and when we are possessed, there is one stronger than us who possesses us.” We’ve all had moments where we’ve been possessed by something, where we’ve felt “not ourselves,” where we are no longer identical with ourselves.
Some of us spend our whole lives living someone else’s life instead of our own. We’ve
all had moments where “something” has gotten into us, where we feel out of sorts,
beside ourselves.
When deeper, primordial archetypes seize us, Jung writes, “They easily catch hold of you and you are possessed as if they were lions or bears, say – primitive forces which are quite definitely stronger than you.”
At any moment any one of us can become “possessed” by the unconscious in a way
such that a more powerful energy than our conscious ego moves and animates us.
To quote Jung,
“…it easily happens to any one of us that we do not act through our own volition. Then I cannot say I do, but it is done through me;
something takes possession of me, the very action can take possession of me.” When we have fallen into our unconscious and compulsively en-act an unconscious complex, we become manipulated by more powerful forces than ourselves. In Jung’s words, a person then becomes “the devil’s marionette.
This could happen only because he believed he had abolished the demons by declaring
them to be superstition.
He overlooked the fact that they were, at bottom, the products of certain factors in the
human psyche.” In dismissing the demons as being mere illusions without realizing
their psychological reality, we unwittingly become possessed by them. The demons
are ultimately split-off, rejected, and disowned parts of the psyche that are experienced
as alien and other than who we imagine ourselves to be (see “Meeting the Other
Within”).
The demons, psychologically speaking, are very real, in that they alter our experience
of ourselves. Jung says, “As a rule there is a marked unconsciousness of any complexes,
and this naturally guarantees them all the more freedom of action.
In such cases their powers of assimilation become especially pronounced, since unconsciousness helps the complex to assimilate even the ego, the result being a momentary and unconscious alteration of personality known as identification with the complex. In the Middle Ages it went by another name; it was called possession.”
We, as “modern” people, to the extent we are acting out our unconscious, are as much
“plagued” by possession as people in the Middle Ages.

Jung comments,
“…in all cases identification with the unconscious [complex] brings a weakening of consciousness, and herein lies the danger. You do not ‘make’ an identification, you do not ‘identify yourself,’ but you experience your identity with the archetype in an unconscious
way and so are possessed by it.” Anything we are unconsciously identical with we are possessed by, and hence, compelled to act out in our life without understanding why.
Though we have dismissed the idea of demons on the altar of our rationality, to quote
Jung, “…man himself has taken over their role without knowing it and does the devilish work of destruction with far more effective tools than the spirits did. In the olden days men were brutal, now they are dehumanized and possessed to a degree that even the blackest Middle Ages did not know.”
More than ever, current-day humanity is certainly acting as if it’s a species possessed.
Eminent theologian and 9/11 Truth Activist David Ray Griffin writes,
“It does seem that we are possessed by some demonic power that is leading us, trancelike, into self-destruction.”
Jung comments,
“…an unknown ‘something’ has taken possession of a smaller or greater portion of the psyche and asserts its hateful and harmful existence undeterred by all our insight, reason, and energy, thereby proclaiming the power of the unconscious over the conscious mind,
the sovereign power of possession.” When we are possessed we are not free, we are not masters in our own house.
When we are possessed by the unconscious, we become dissociated from ourselves
such that, as Jung writes, there is, “a tearing loose of part of one’s nature; it is the
disappearance and emancipation of a complex, which thereupon becomes a
tyrannical usurper of consciousness, oppressing the whole man. It throws
him off course and drives him to actions whose blind one-sidedness inevitably
leads to self-destruction.”AUTONOMOUS COMPLEXES

“Autonomous complexes” are parts of the psyche which have split-off due to shock,
trauma, or breach of our boundaries, and have developed a seemingly autonomous life
and apparently independent will of their own.
Though we are unconsciously identified with them, autonomous complexes are subjectively experienced as other than ourselves. Apart from their inherent obscurity
and strangeness, our unconscious identification with autonomous complexes is the
essential reason why it is so hard to get a handle on them.
Autonomous complexes act upon us, they feel like our most intimate self, eventually
need to be owned, but paradoxically, don’t belong to us. The seeming autonomy of the
archetypes and complexes is what gives rise to the idea of supernatural beings.
Endowed with a numinous energy, autonomous complexes are what our ancestors
used to call “demons.”

Demons

Autonomous complexes are a psychological name for the demons in the archetypal
process of addiction that animate us to compulsively act out our addictive behavior. A demon or autonomous complex, to quote Jung, “behaves like an animated foreign body in the sphere of consciousness. The complex can usually be suppressed, with an effort of will, but not argued out of existence, and at the first suitable opportunity it reappears in all its original strength.”
Due to their lack of association with the conscious ego, autonomous complexes are
typically not open to being influenced, educated, nor corrected by “reality.”
An intruder from the unconscious and a disturber of the peace, an autonomous
complex, Jung points out, “behaves exactly like a goblin that is always eluding our
grasp.” If left un-reflected upon, these demons or autonomous complexes wreak havoc for everyone within their sphere of influence.
Jung writes,
“…any autonomous complex not subject to the conscious will exerts a possessive effect on consciousness proportional to its strength and limits the latter’s freedom.” As it takes over and becomes in charge of a person, a complex incorporates a seemingly autonomous regime within the greater body politic of the psyche.
Writing about autonomous complexes, Jung says, “…the complex forms something like a shadow government of the ego,” in that the complex dictates to the ego.
When we are taken over by and in internal conflict with and because of an autonomous
complex, it is as if we, as natural rulers of our own psychic landscape, have been deposed, and are living in an occupied country.
We are allowed our seeming freedom as long as it doesn’t threaten the sovereignty and
dominance of the ruling power.
Jung comments,
“…a man does not notice it when he is governed by a demon; he puts all his skill and cunning at the service of his unconscious master, thereby heightening its power a thousand fold.” Being nonlocal, this inner, psychological situation can manifest both within our psyche and out in the world at the same time.
Demons or autonomous complexes have a possessive and obsessive effect on
consciousness. Interestingly, the word “obsession” originally meant to be under the
influence of an evil “possession.” Obsession refers to certain ideas that have taken
possession of the person.
We can become possessed by unshakable ideas of the way things should be or who
we think we are, oppressing and tyrannizing both ourselves and others who hold a
different viewpoint in the process.
Jung writes,
“The idea is like an autonomous being that wants a body so much that it even incarnates in the body; one begins to play, to perform the idea, and then people say one is completely mad. The idea has taken possession of one till it is as if one were out of one’s
mind.”
Millions of our species have killed and been killed over a fixed idea.
Commandeering and colonizing our psyche, a split-off, autonomous complex is,
potentially, like a “vampiric virus,” in that it is fundamentally “dead” matter; it is only in
a living being that it acquires a quasi-life. Just like a vampire re-vitalizes itself by
sucking our life-force, when we unconsciously identify with an activated autonomous
complex, we are literally animating and en-livening the undead.
Complicit in our own victimization, we then unwittingly give away our freedom, power,
and life-force in the process.
Like cancer cells ravaging the body, dis-associated, autonomous complexes are like
“splinter psyches” that can become overly swollen with psychic energy, and then will
propagate and metastasize themselves within the psyche, consuming, devouring, and
cannibalizing the healthy aspects of the psyche.
Drawing and attracting all of the wholesome parts of the psyche into itself, an
autonomous complex can potentially warp and destroy the psyche of the person (or
nation) so afflicted, non-locally infecting and spreading by psychic contagion its
malaise to the surrounding field in the process.
An autonomous complex can’t stand to be seen, however, in much the same way that
a vampire detests the light. A demon or autonomous complex will shape-shift and do
everything in its power to resist being illumined, for once it is seen, its autonomy and

omnipotence are taken away.
Anchored, connected and related to consciousness, the demon or autonomous complex can then no longer vaporize back into the unconscious, which is to say it is no longer able to possess us from behind and beneath our conscious awareness so as to compel us to unwittingly act it out and do its bidding (see “Shedding Light on Evil”).

FINDING THE NAME

When we “see” a demon, we know its name, which helps us to get a “handle” on it.
Naming is exorcistic, as it dis-spells the demon’s power over us.
Jung says that, “The act of naming is, like baptism, extremely important as regards
the creation of personality, for a magical power has been attributed to the name since time immemorial. To know the secret name of a person [or a demon] is to have power over him.” Elsewhere, Jung writes, “For mankind it was always like a deliverance from a nightmare when the new name was found.” Finding the name is an act of power.
Jung comments,
“The moment you can designate the lived archetype by its symbol, you feel relieved, that is a good and positive moment even if it is horrible… Therefore old Egyptian medicine consisted in giving the thing the right name… A new name always produces an extraordinary effect; we cannot rationalize these things, they cast a spell, they are symbols, they really do influence the unconscious as the unconscious influences
us.” It is very important for us to re-introduce the words “demon” and “possession” back into our vocabulary, minus the fear that we will be seen as being primitive, crazy or even
possessed ourselves if we use such words.
We need to expand our psycho-spiritual fluency to enable us to navigate the living waters of our inner and outer landscapes.
Being “possessed by demons” – taken over by unconscious, psychic forces – is something that happens to all of us, and it is to our great advantage to be able to properly name our experience. Finding the name empowers us to creatively engage with these parts of ourselves that are emerging from the shadows “in the name of healing.”
How do we make a word? We “spell” it. In finding the words for our experience, we are
casting a “positive spell” whose nonlocal orbit and influence is liberating.
We are then able to consciously language and give voice to our experience, which is to
step into and access the creative spirit. In learning new, creative ways to express
ourselves, we are dis-spelling the curse we were under of not being able to symbolize
our experience. In learning to consciously spell-cast, the world is no longer written in
stone, with us as its passive victims, as we realize and tap into the creative and
transformative power of the Word, the Logos. As it says in the Bible, “And first was the word. And the word was with God. And the
word was God.”

Creating a new language so as to re-create ourselves anew, we
step into the archetypal figures of the “Wounded Healer” (read Part 1 and Part 2), and
the “Creative Artist.”
In animating these archetypal figures, we actively and creatively participate in our own
evolutionary process, expanding and refining the ways we tel-empathically commune
and telepathically communicate with each other, as well as with ourselves.
In addition, part of re-establishing the words “demon” and “possession” as meaning-
filled is to complement these words with the idea that if we have a reaction and become
“triggered” by these words, the figure within us who is being triggered might be the very
demon who is possessing us (see “Triggered by Evil”).
I’ve coined the name “NonLocal Demon” (“NLD” for short) to “capture” this elusive,
mercurial and nonlocal demon that “haunts” our world.
Like minting a coin, when we coin a phrase and find the name, we create currency in
the realm of mind with which to engage in commerce with each other, as well as with
ourselves.
This is to generate consciousness, which is something of genuine value. Once we see how the NLD clandestinely operates throughout the underlying field of consciousness by hiding and obfuscating itself through our unconscious, hooking and insinuating itself into our blind spots, we have simultaneously taken away its power and empowered ourselves, creating a wealth of new ways for us to creatively respond that were previously unavailable.
Being nonlocal, one of the ways the NLD incarnates itself is through our internal,
unconscious re-actions to encountering the myriad and ever shape-shifting forms and
guises of the NLD in the outer world. The way to most effectively deal with a demon is to courageously turn our attention upon what it triggers inside of us.
The Gnostic text “The Gospel of Philip” says, So long as the root of wickedness is hidden, it is strong. But when it is recognized, it is dissolved… When it is revealed, it
perishes… As for ourselves, let us each dig down after the root of evil which is within each of us, and produces its fruit in our hearts. It masters us. We are its slaves.
It takes us captive, to make us do what we do not want, and what we do want, we do not do. It is powerful because we have not recognized it.
(II, 3, 83.5-30)The source of the demons lies within ourselves. As compared to existing “by virtue” of something, demons can only live by the “lack of virtue” of our own obscured and
unexamined minds. The above Gnostic quote brings to mind Paul’s famous passage
from the New Testament, “That which I would do, I do not, and that which I would not
do, I do”, (Romans 7:15 King James version)…which is a clear and simple expression of our human proclivity for possession if there ever was one.
An un-illumined and unrecognized autonomous complex diabolically compels us to act
out contrary to our best intentions, as any of us who’ve struggled with any form of
addictive behavior knows from our own experience. Being possessed by demons is a problem as old as humanity. We are all potential shamans and healers, for as we metabolize the darkness and assimilate our own demons, we add light to and nonlocally
“lighten-up” the collective shadow for everyone (see “We are all Shamans-in-Training”).
If the demons are not integrated, neither is the human soul, which is to say that
embracing and integrating our demons is critical to the evolution of the soul.
Jung ponders,
“How can evil be integrated? There is only one possibility: to assimilate it, that is to say, raise it to the level of consciousness.” Raising the demons to the level of consciousness takes away their autonomous existence, as they rejoin the profound unity of the psyche.
Jung comments,
“Then the opus magnum [the ‘great work’ of alchemy] is finished; the human soul is completely integrated.” To quote noted psychologist Rollo May, the daemonic is, “any natural function which has the power to take over the whole person [or whole nation]… the daemonic can be either creative or destructive [i.e., demonic]… violence is the daemonic gone awry… ages [such as ours] tend to be times when the daemonic is expressed in its most destructive form.” The daemonic is not an objectively existing metaphysical entity in the Christian sense, but is an archetypal function of human experience, a psychic as well as an existential reality in which we all participate.

The daemonic is an archetypal energy which can take over a person, group or a nation.

Jung writes,
“We know that an archetype can break with shattering force into an individual human life and into the life of a nation.” Archetypes are living, dynamic entities, psychological
instincts or informational fields of influence that provide the underlying template which patterns human behavior, perception and experience.
The daemonic announces itself by drafting people into its service, enlisting human
beings as instruments of its full-bodied revelation of itself.
Jung comments,
“One does not realize yet that when an archetype is unconsciously constellated and not consciously understood, one is possessed by it and forced to its fatal goal.”
The daemonic expresses itself by conscripting us to its cause and compelling us to
unconsciously act it out so as to give living form to itself in the third dimension.
The word daemonic is related to “the devil,” which in turn is related to the word diabolic,
whose inner meaning is to divide, separate, and dis-integrate.
Being divisive, the diabolic splits us into multiple fragmented and compartmentalized pieces.
Jung comments,
“Possession by the unconscious means being torn apart into many people and things, a disiunctio. That is why, according to Origen [an early Christian theologian], the aim of the Christian is to become an inwardly united human being.” Becoming a true follower of Christ, who is symbolic of the wholly integrated Self, is to transform the diabolical nature of the disiunctio into a sacred coniunctio, where all the parts of the psyche are connected and the opposites unite.
This is why the greatest protection against demons is to be in touch with our intrinsic
wholeness, which is to be “self-possessed,” – in possession of the part of ourselves
that is not possess-able, which is the Self, the wholeness of our beingThe antonym of diabolic is the word symbolic, which, in addition to being the language
of dreams, means to unite, bring together and integrate. The daemonic is a quantum phenomenon, in that it contains both the symbolic and diabolic encoded within it in a superposed state, which is to say that hidden within the daemonic is the creative seeds of its own transformation.
Both constructive and destructive forces are fully present in the daemonic simultaneously, and either energy can potentially manifest, depending upon how an
observing consciousness interacts with it.
To quote Jung,
“…the daemon of the inner voice is at once our greatest danger and an indispensable help.” Hidden in the daemonic is our inner voice, our guiding spirit, our angel, and our genius. Jung refers to the daemonic as the “not yet realized creative,” which is to say it is
creativity not yet “made real” or actualized by the ego.
Developing a healthy and strong ego is crucially important in entering into relationship with and creatively expressing the daemonic energies within us. One of the most destructive things in the human psyche is unrealized creativity.
If the daemonic is not honored and treated religiously (i.e., carefully considered with
reverence and a sense of the sacred), however, it constellates negatively and turns truly
“demonic,” in the destructive sense of the word. Jung comments,
“Generally speaking the daemonic is that moment when an unconscious content of seemingly overwhelming power appears on the threshold of consciousness. It can cross this threshold and seize hold of the personality. Then it is possession.”
Before an archetype can be consciously integrated, it will always manifest itself
physically, because, in Jung’s words, “…it forces the subject into its own form.”
In its negative form, which is a truly virulent form of madness, we, because of our
unconsciousness, become a living conduit for the incarnation of an inhuman,
malevolent, predatory, rapacious energy that only cares about feeding its own
insatiable narcissism, ultimately victimizing, consuming, and cannibalizing both
ourselves and others in the process.
Describing this moment of being possessed, Jung elaborates, “The beast of prey seizes hold of him and soon makes him forget that he is a human being.
His animal affects hamper any reflection that might stand in the way of his infantile wish-fulfillments, filling him instead with a feeling of a new-won right to existence and intoxicating him with the lust for booty and blood.”This in-toxic-ating energy, which is the narcissistic ego running wild as it entrances itself, is the fuel which animates any form of addiction. “Intoxication,” to quote Jung, is “that most direct and dangerous form
of possession,” …as unless it is reflected upon, and therefore illuminated and transformed by the light of consciousness, it inevitably leads to self-destruction.Jung reminds us that,
“Insanity is possession by an unconscious content that, as such, is not assimilated to consciousness, nor can it be assimilated since the very existence of such conditions is denied.” We then fall into the infinite regression and self-perpetuating feedback loop of denying we are in denial, a self-created strain of madness that I have given the name “malignant egophrenia,” or “ME disease” for short.
This is a form of self-deception, dissociation and psychic blindness in which we are
ultimately lying to and hiding from ourselves. At a certain point this process entrenches
itself within the psyche such that it develops sufficient momentum to seemingly
become its own self-generating, autonomous entity. We’ve then become a “problem” to ourselves, creating our own Frankenstein monster in the process, and it is us.
We can then be said to be the incarnation of ME disease in the flesh, its revelation in
human form. Similar to being possessed by a demon, being taken over by ME disease
is simultaneously its own self-revelation; encoded within the apparent pathology is its
own medicine.
One of the main ways that demons become empowered within us is when we are
unconscious of our shadow. Jung says,
“Anyone who is unaware of his shadow is too wonderful, too good, he has a wrong idea of himself, and to that extent such a person is possessed.” The extent to which we are unconscious of our shadow is the extent to which we are unaware of our potential to unwittingly enact our unconscious in a way, which could be hurtful.
Jung writes,
“If we don’t see the negative side of what we do, what we are, we are possessed… Only through understanding of unconscious aspects, as a rule, can we liberate ourselves from possession.” Understanding “unconscious aspects” is to shed light on darker, asleep parts of ourselves – “the negative side of what we do” – which is essentially the act of becoming conscious. The demons act themselves out through our psychic blind-spots.
Jung comments,
“…the demon that is always with you is the shadow following after you, and it is always where your eyes are not.” The places where we are possessed by our unconscious are the
places in ourselves where we are not able to see, where “our eyes are not,” where
we are unable to self-reflectively speculate. Symbolically, this is like a vampire who casts no reflection in the mirror.
Jung writes,
“Since nobody is capable of recognizing just where and how much he himself is possessed and unconscious, he simply projects his own condition upon his neighbor, and thus it becomes a sacred duty to have the biggest guns and the most poisonous gas.”
Interestingly, Jung simply refers to “shadow projection,” a process in which we project
our own un-embraced aspects (our “own condition”) onto our neighbor, as “the lie.”
One of the meanings of the word “devil” is “the liar.” (see “Shadow Projection: The Fuel
of War,” and “Shadow Projection is its Own Medicine”). Projecting our shadow onto others is an activity which is itself an expression of the devil who is hiding within us, lurking behind the projection. Speaking about how easy it is for the “demons” to find a new victim,
Jung comments,
“…that won’t be difficult. Every man who loses his shadow, every nation that falls into self-righteousness, is their prey.” Jung comments on the state of being possessed by an archetype such as the daemonic when he writes, “For an archetype has a life of its own; the life that is proper and peculiar to the archetype shows its autonomy by the fact that
it can swallow one’s own life. It is so strong that one can be swallowed up into it and be nothing but that archetype. Of course, one does not know it.” The formless, invisible archetype has in-formed itself and made itself visible through the person, group or nation which it seizes.

They can be said to be the living incarnation of the archetype, as they are its full-blown
revelation in form. An essential quality of being possessed by the unconscious is that
we don’t know we’re possessed, for if we knew, we wouldn’t be possessed.
To quote Jung,
“When you are just at one with a thing you are completely identical – you cannot comprehend it, you cannot discriminate, you cannot recognize it.”
When we are identical with something, we are not able to differentiate ourselves from it,
which is to say, we have no freedom of choice relative to that with which we are
unconsciously identified.
When we identify with and act out the unconscious, we are truly unconscious.
Jung conjectures, “suppose I am identical with an archetype; I don’t know it and
the archetype of course won’t tell me, because I am already possessed and inundated by the archetype…
Just as I pay no attention to the hammer I use; I use it and afterwards I throw it away. It is not a personal hammer. That is the way the archetype uses man, simply as an instrument, as a tool of a most transitory kind.” Even though an archetype expresses itself through individuals, an archetype is impersonal. Archetypes enlist us for their purposes, taking
possession of us like a piece of property, and drop us when we are no longer of use.
Jung continues,
“But the man is of course in an awful situation. He is possessed, and he cannot defend himself, for he doesn’t even know that he is possessed, and that is a wonderful opportunity for the unconscious.” Not knowing we are possessed by the unconscious, it is as if the parents aren’t home, creating an opportunity for the kids (the unconscious) to act
out without restraint.
Jung says,
“The forces that burst out of the collective psyche have a confusing and blinding effect.”
The emergence of unconscious forces out of the collective unconscious typically evokes confusion and blindness, i.e., unconsciousness.
Jung continues,
“…as the influence of the collective unconscious increases, so the conscious mind loses its power of leadership. Imperceptibly it becomes the led, while an unconscious and impersonal process gradually takes control. Thus, without noticing it, the conscious personality is pushed about like a figure on a chess-board by an invisible player. It is
this player who decides the game of fate, not the conscious mind and its plans.”
It is as if an invisible coup has taken place within the psyche.
Falling into self-deception, the conscious mind is under the illusion that it is deciding,
that it is in control, while it is actually being led and manipulated like a puppet. To quote W.H. Auden, “We are lived by Powers we pretend to understand.”
Jung says,
“The devil is the aping shadow of God.” When we are possessed by the unconscious, a more powerful, archetypal energy shape-shifts and takes on our seeming form, which we absorb into, identify with and believe to be who we are.
Bamboozled and hoodwinked by the slick “salesmanship” of this imposter of ourselves,
we “buy” into its version of who we are. We then live a simulation of ourselves, miming ourselves, becoming a master copy, a duplicate of our original selves. To the extent we are unconsciously possessed by the daemon, it is as if a psychic parasite has taken over our brain and tricked us, its host, into thinking we are feeding and empowering ourselves while we are actually nourishing the parasite.
It is as if our soul has become hijacked by a deeper, archetypal force, and has been
replaced with a pale imitation of ourselves, and, to the extent we are taken over, we
don’t even realize it.
Archetypes, Jung points out, “have the most disagreeable quality of appearing in your own guise.” The spirit of the unconscious impersonates us, fooling even ourselves, as it cloaks itself in our form.
This mercurial spirit has “put us on” as a disguise, appearing as ourselves, or at least
who we imagine ourselves to be.
FORFEITING HUMANITY (extremism)
Describing the experience of being led and taken over by the unconscious, Jung continues, “whenever a powerful content emerges from the unconscious, which
we cannot yet grasp with our consciousness, there is a danger that the whole ego-consciousness will be pulled down into the unconscious and dissolved…
Consciousness is completely emptied, because its contents are attracted by the unconscious as by a magnet. This process leads to a complete loss of the ego, so that the person in question becomes a mere automaton.
Such a person is actually no longer there.” How many people do we know, including at times even ourselves, who zombie-like, compulsively and mechanically enact their habitual patterns with no spontaneity or creativity, like a programmed robot?
Jung says,
“One can only alter one’s attitude and thus save oneself from naively falling into an archetype and being forced to act a part at the expense of one’s humanity.
Possession by an archetype turns a man into a flat collective figure, a mask behind which he can no longer develop as a human being, but becomes increasingly stunted.” When we are possessed by an archetype, it’s as if we are frozen back in time, akin to what happens in trauma, where we become fixated in a rigidified and self-reinforcing point of view.
Unconsciously identified with the “persona,” the façade personality that we’ve created
for protection and present to the world, we have no real depth, and stop growing and evolving.
“Altering” our attitude would be to step out of our “alter-personality,” which is to stop
compulsively and ritualistically worshipping at the “altar” of the false self, and step into
our authentic self.
Jung elaborates on the process of falling under the spell of an activated archetype when
he writes, “…an archetype is mobilized within him which affects him like a narcotic.
That is typical; when you get into a situation where an archetype becomes constellated, you will undergo this peculiar hypnotic effect; you fall asleep rather suddenly.
It has a peculiar fascination which makes you unconscious.”The image of Dorothy and friends falling asleep in the poppy field as they approach the Emerald City in the movie “The Wizard of Oz” symbolically expresses this arche-typical situation of falling under a spell as we approach the sacred.
Jung points out that,
“The potentialities of the archetype, for good and evil alike, transcend our human capacities many times, and a man can appropriate its power only by identifying with the daemon, by letting himself be possessed by it, thus forfeiting his own humanity.”
In unconsciously identifying with and becoming possessed by the daemon, on the
personal, human level we forfeit our humanity and become an empty shell.
At the same time, however, we access, become channels for and are inflated by a
evolving.
“Altering” our attitude would be to step out of our “alter-personality,” which is to stop
compulsively and ritualistically worshipping at the “altar” of the false self, and step into
our authentic self.
Jung elaborates on the process of falling under the spell of an activated archetype when
he writes, “…an archetype is mobilized within him which affects him like a narcotic.
That is typical; when you get into a situation where an archetype becomes constellated, you will undergo this peculiar hypnotic effect; you fall asleep rather suddenly.
It has a peculiar fascination which makes you unconscious.”The image of Dorothy and friends falling asleep in the poppy field as they approach the Emerald City in the movie “The Wizard of Oz” symbolically expresses this arche-typical situation of falling under a spell as we approach the sacred.
Jung points out that,
“The potentialities of the archetype, for good and evil alike, transcend our human capacities many times, and a man can appropriate its power only by identifying with the daemon, by letting himself be possessed by it, thus forfeiting his own humanity.”
In unconsciously identifying with and becoming possessed by the daemon, on the
personal, human level we forfeit our humanity and become an empty shell.
At the same time, however, we access, become channels for and are inflated by a
more powerful, archetypal, and nonhuman energy to come through us. When we are
possessed by an archetype, we are a paradoxical juxtaposition of subhuman and
superhuman qualities at the same time.
Jung continues,
“…anyone possessed by an archetype cannot help having all the symptoms of an inflation. For the archetype is nothing human; no archetype is properly human. The archetype itself is an exaggeration and it reaches beyond the confines of humanity… So anybody possessed by an archetype develops inhuman qualities.” When we become taken over by an archetype we become inflated, unconsciously identifying with God-like powers while simultaneously forgetting our humanity.
Jung clarifies,
“…we see the characteristic effect of the archetype: it seizes hold of the psyche with a kind of primeval force and compels it to transgress the bounds of humanity. It causes exaggeration, a puffed-up attitude (inflation), loss of free will, delusion, and enthusiasm in good and evil alike.”
Interestingly, one of the meanings of the word “evil,” etymologically speaking, is to
transgress boundaries. Continuing his description of the state of being possessed by
an archetype, Jung says, “…when a person has an unconscious content – say a certain
archetype is constellated – then his conscious, not realizing what the matter is, will be filled with the emanation or radiation of that activated archetype.
And then he behaves unconsciously as if he were that archetype, but
he expresses the identity in terms of his ego personality… For he unconsciously plays a role and tries to represent something which he has taken to be his own self.”
Behaving as if he, as an ego, were that archetype, he plays a mythical, archetypal role
and unconsciously identifies with it (“which he has taken to be his own self”), fooling
himself, and potentially others, in the process.
Jung continues,
“You see, the unconscious activated archetype is like a rising sun, a source of energy or warmth which warms up the ego personality from within, and then the ego personality begins to radiate as if it were God-knows-what.”
The formless archetype takes on and expresses itself through the limited and particular
form of the ego personality. The activated archetype transfigures the ego from within so
as to suit its purposes.
Jung continues,
“It is a psychological fact that an archetype can seize hold of the ego and even compel it to act as it – the archetype – wills. A man can then take on archetypal dimensions and exercise corresponding effects.”
INFLUENCING THE FIELD

Conflated with and inflated by the hypnotically fascinating psychic force-field of the
archetype, people so possessed become mouthpieces and amplifiers for the archetype
to transmit and non-locally extend and incarnate itself throughout the field of
consciousness.
Jung writes,
“people who constellate an archetype have such a hypnotic effect.” People who are gripped by an archetype have a gripping effect on others; when we are under the fascination of an archetype, we unwittingly have a fascinating influence on
others.
Jung makes the point that, “identification with an archetypal figure lend almost
superhuman force to the ordinary man.” People who are possessed by their unconscious have a very magnetic, charismatic and “possessive” effect upon others’ unconscious.
The part of them that is bewitched evokes the corresponding suggestible and bedeviled
part of others’ psyche and hooks it, spell-binding it and entraining it into its archetypal
spin. In other words, when someone is possessed by an archetype, they are literally the
channel through which that archetype, both locally and non-locally, is materializing in
the field, which is to say they wield great energetic influence on their surroundings.
Jung says, “But the power of the archetype is not controlled by us; we ourselves are at its mercy to an unsuspected degree… because everyone is in some degree ‘possessed’ by his specifically human pre-formation, he is held fast and fascinated by it and exercises the same influence on others without being conscious of what he is doing.
The danger is just this unconscious identification with the archetype.” To the extent we are identified with and hence possessed by the archetype, is the extent to which we are not conscious of the corresponding influence we have on others’ unconscious.
This is a dangerous situation because it is unconsciously being en-acted in such a way
that guarantees that we will abuse our unresolved power issues to the extent that we
stay unconscious.
Jung gets right to the point when he writes, “When someone is able to perform the art of touching on the archetypal, he can play on the souls of people like on the strings of a
piano.” Connecting with the archetypal is like plucking a higher-dimensional chord of our being, which immediately activates a resonance in the collective unconscious in whoever
hears it. Just like the pendulum with the strongest swing entrains all the other pendulums into its swing, the person who is channeling the living power of the deeper, archetypal force can potentially en-train and en-trance others. This power can be used for the highest
good – helping people to awaken – or it can be used for the deepest evil so as to manipulate, dis-empower and enslave other people.
Being archetypal, this energy is fundamentally neither good nor bad, but can potentially
manifest either way depending upon our intent.
Speaking of the hypnotic power of the archetype, Jung writes, “It gets you below the belt and not in your mind, your brain just counts for nothing, your sympathetic system is gripped. It is a power that fascinates people from within, it is the collective unconscious which is activated, it is an archetype which is common to them all that has come to life.”
When an archetype is constellated, rational logic and facts have no effect.
The deep emotion which is characteristic of an activated archetype ensures that, to
quote Jung, “…the possibility of reason’s having any effect ceases and its place is
taken by slogans and chimerical wish-fantasies. That is to say, a sort of collective possession results which rapidly develops into a psychic epidemic.”
Being unconsciously identified with an archetype is extremely dangerous, in that it is at
the root of both individual and collective psychoses. Our tendency to unknowingly fall into the grip of an archetype is animating what is being acted out in the world theater, which is to say that the origin of world events is the unconscious of humanity (see “It’s All in the Psyche”).
Jung writes,
“Nobody can realize an archetype without having been identified with it first.”
Speaking of our initial tendency to identify with and become hooked by activated
archetypes, Jung continues, “…you cannot realize them without having been thoroughly
caught by them.” No one can realize their daemon without first having been unconsciously identified with it, which is to say, caught by it, and hence, possessed by it.
In the process of integration, we have to learn to experience our archetypal daemon from the outside as well as from the inside.
Experiencing the archetype from the outside means to experience it objectively, as
other than ourselves, which is to separate ourselves from it, for an archetype, in Jung’s
words, “…can be truly understood only if experienced as an autonomous entity.”
Ultimately, we have to eventually both see the archetype as an object outside of
ourselves as well as experience what it’s like relative to us, which is an experience
within ourselves.Maybe there’s a hidden reason in the deeper plan of things why
we, as a species, have a tendency to be taken over by our unconscious.
Jung points out that,
“…autonomous complexes are among the normal phenomena of life and that they make up the structure of the unconscious psyche.” Having autonomous complexes, or having a spare demon or two in our closet, is a “normal” human phenomenon, something we all

possess at the same time that it possesses us.
Identifying with our unconscious such that we act it out, i.e., being possessed, seems
to be a natural expression of the human experience. Might there be a hidden evolutionary potential, an underlying teleology, a mysterious purpose or goal, which is possessing us to act as we do?
Perhaps we are being dreamed up to be the very instruments and midwives through
which the archetypes transform themselves, the world, and ourselves as well.
Becoming possessed by the unconscious is, paradoxically, the way we learn how not
to be possessed, which we clearly haven’t learned yet, or we wouldn’t be possessed.
By differentiating ourselves from the archetype, we make it conscious, while creating
ourselves relative to it. In relating to the archetype consciously, we do not fall under the
thrall of the archetype, but are able to mediate, humanize and channel its transpersonal
energies and contents in a constructive, creative and life-enhancing way.
As we connect with each other through our lucidity, we can potentially become a
vehicle through which the archetypes themselves transform and evolve, which
instantaneously, and non-locally, has a transformative and evolutionary effect
throughout the entire collective field of consciousness.
Mythologically speaking, the figure of the “would-be-hero,” which is all of us in
potential, is always inhabited by a daemon. Having a daemon taking up residence
inside of us is the very thing that “makes” us a hero. Our heroic fight against the paralyzing grip of the daemon is initiatory, in that it calls forth our latent, creative powers. In coming to terms and wrestling with our daemon, which is to say ourselves, we create ourselves.
The daemon is the source of all creativity. It takes genuine courage to do battle with
these internal forces and wrest from them the mythic “treasure hard to attain,” which is
none other than our soul-filled selves.
Jung comments,
“As the result of the political situation and the frightful, not to say diabolic, triumphs of science, we are shaken by secret shudders and dark forebodings; but we know no way out, and very few persons indeed draw the conclusion that this time the issue is the
long-since-forgotten soul of man.”When we realize an archetype such as the daemonic, we are able, from the inside out, to channel its transpersonal power into a creative, soul-full, life-giving spirit that comes from a source beyond our ego.
Encoded in the daemonic is everything we need for our healing and self-realization, as if
the daemonic is a compensation of the deeper unified and unifying field of
consciousness, offering us exactly what is required for us to wake up. The demons are
like psychic nautilus machines that we are dreaming up to help us develop our muscles
of realization.
Alchemically transmuting on the spot the potential destructiveness of the demonic into
stimulators of our own creative lucidity, we give birth to our daemon, our guiding spirit.
Or rather, in that moment our daemon gives birth to us. Realizing an archetype such as the daemonic is to realize ourselves as an active, participatory agent in the creation of our experience of ourselves relative to the world.

This realization comes with great responsibility. We are offered a choice: either we
continue to destroy ourselves, or we learn together how to create a new world.
Everything depends upon our recognizing what is being revealed to us as we act our
unconscious out in the world. The emergence of the daemonic in our world is both potentially and actually the doorway into and revelation of the light.
Being a function of our consciousness, how the daemonic materializes – as the
deepest, destructive evil, or as creative genius, depends upon nothing other than how
we dream it.
Jung comments,
“The archetype is spirit or anti-spirit: what it ultimately proves to be depends on the attitude of the human mind.”When we become possessed by the unconscious, we become
unconsciously taken over by our primal, animal-like instincts in such a way that we regress, devolve and fall into our lower nature.
Jung elaborates,
“Only the animal man can be possessed…It is easier to talk or to argue with a dog or a cow than with someone possessed by such a figure. For nothing that one says permeates, it is impossible to pierce the wall they put up, it is a wall of unconscious beliefs, and
people behind the wall cannot be reached.

They are totally inaccessible.

There is no access because the human being is degraded to the state of an animal, and the thing that seems to function is not a divine being, it is a ghost.”I imagine we all know people like this, people who are under a spell such that there is really no talking with them, as they perversely take in and interpret whatever reflection is being offered of their unconsciousness as evidence of the rightness of their deluded point of view.
Psychologically speaking, they are possessed, as if an “entity” has taken them over,
they are no longer there, and they have no idea, literally, of their situation.
When a group of people in this condition enter into agreement about the “truth,” and
become card-carrying members of a dogmatic “ism,” a collective psychosis is being
brewed in the cauldron of the collective unconscious.
COLLECTIVE PSYCHOSIS
Jung never tired of warning that the greatest danger that faces humanity is to
unwittingly fall into our unconscious en masse such that we become instruments for a
psychic epidemic to wreak havoc in the world, just like we see today (see “Diagnosis:
Psychic Epidemic”).
Jung writes that psychic epidemics “…are infinitely more devastating than the worst of natural catastrophes. The supreme danger which threatens individuals as well as whole nations is a psychic danger.” We are in the midst of a collective psychosis that has become so normalized that very few people are even talking about it, which is itself an
expression of our collective madness. (see “Why Don’t We See our Collective Madness”?)
Jung writes,
“…collective psychoses are based on a constellated archetype, though of course this fact is not taken into account at all. In this respect our attitude is still characterized by a prodigious unconsciousness.” Once these archetypal contents become activated in the
unconscious, Jung elaborates, it is like, “they have taken possession of certain individuals, irresistibly draw them together by mutual attraction and knit them into smaller or larger groups which may easily swell into an avalanche.” People who have fallen into their unconscious naturally attract and connect with each other, as they reciprocally reinforce each other’s madness.
An impenetrable bubble of shared, rigid beliefs gets conjured up around them which
deflects and resists any self-reflection which threatens their fixed worldview. Anyone
who reflects back their unconscious state is demonized and seen as a heretic,
blasphemer and enemy. Though using individuals as its instruments, evil needs the
unconscious masses for its genesis and proliferation on the world stage. Masses are
always breeding grounds of psychic epidemics. In a collective psychosis there is a herd
mentality, where people stop thinking for themselves and let others think for them,
like sheep (“sheeple”) who just follow wherever they are being led.
Jung writes that whoever buys into the collectively agreed upon group-think, “is infected with the leprosy of collective thinking and has become an inmate of that insalubrious stud-farm called the totalitarian State.”
When we give away our power, there is always someone bearing the authority of the
State who is more than happy to accept our offering, feeding the insatiable will-to-power
of the shadow.
Jung comments,
“The shepherd’s staff soon becomes a rod of iron, and the shepherds turn into wolves.”
Being archetypal, the reciprocal process of people giving away their power to others
who abuse it simply because they can has continually re-created itself all throughout
history. Jung warns us that, “The most dangerous things in the world are immense
accumulations of human beings who are manipulated by only a few heads.”
In a collective psychosis, the many are manipulated by the few who are attracted to
holding power over others.
Jung points out that, “Whoever prefers power, is therefore, in the Christian view,
possessed by the devil. The psychologist can only agree.” In a psychic epidemic, the masses, led and inspired by the few who are perversely possessed by and addicted to the need for power, collectively collude with, support and mutually rein-force each others’ irrational beliefs, narcissistic needs, and fears, creating a culture crazy beyond belief.
This culture, or lack thereof, is simultaneously the cause and effect of their madness,
as they collectively incarnate a living, self-fulfilling prophecy. They become the
instruments through which the NLD, the nonlocal demon, reproduces itself, like a multi-
headed hydra, in, as, and through the field.BLESSINGS IN DRAG

Jung writes,
“This state of possession shows itself almost without exception in the fact that the possessed identify themselves with the archetypal contents of their unconscious, and because they do not realize that the role which is being thrust upon them is the effect of new contents still to be understood, they exemplify these concretely in their own
lives, thus becoming prophets and reformers [in the negative sense, such as falling into a megalomaniacal inflation]” People who have been swallowed up by the archetype and fallen into the unconscious, instead of shedding light on and integrating the meaning of
the activated unconscious contents within themselves, are unwittingly acting out the
mythic, symbolic dimension of “the role which is being thrust upon them” in concretized,
literal form on the stage of life.
The new contents are understood when we realize that the role, which is coming through us, has its origin in the collective unconscious itself, as if we are playing a role in a cosmic drama. In addition to bestowing upon us a choice of how we want to play
this role, this realization snaps us out of personally identifying with the role as well.
The part of us that has been unconsciously possessed becomes liberated, creating
more consciousness in the process.
When we become taken over by the unconscious, to quote Jung, “…the unconscious in large measure ousts and supplants the function of the conscious mind. The unconscious usurps the reality function and substitutes its own reality. Unconscious thoughts…manifest themselves in senseless, unshakable judgments upheld in the
face of reality.” When we find ourselves ignoring factual evidence and holding a “magical” belief that we rationally know not to be true, we are under a spell, being
“driven” by the unconscious, which is at that point in the driver’s seat.
The psychic factors, which make possession possible, are suggestibility, lack of critical
discernment, unwillingness or inability to self-reflect, fearfulness, propensity to
superstition and prejudice.
The contents that take us over when we are possessed by the unconscious appear as
phobias, exaggerated affects, peculiar convictions, idiosyncrasies, stubborn plans,
compulsions and obsessions, all of which are not open for discussion or correction.
Demons work through our psyche, “managing our perceptions” in a way such that we
aren’t able to see their influence. Demons bedazzle, bewitch, and bedevil
consciousness in such a way that we become blind to our own underlying, assumed
viewpoint.
We fall under their spell when we become entranced by our own version of reality in such a way so as to think the world “objectively” exists as we perceive it, separate
from our own mind.
In other words, we fall under the power of the demons when we become fixated in our
non-negotiable viewpoint and imagine that what we are seeing objectively exists, in
solid form, outside of ourselves, in a way that applies to everyone.
We then draw to ourselves all the evidence we need to prove to ourselves the seeming
truth of our self-evident viewpoint, confirming our delusion that we are separate from and
not participating in helping to create the very situation we find ourselves in, which we
are ultimately creating. I call this “Aparticipatory Delusional Syndrome,” or ADS for
short (see “Delusions of Separation”).
On the other hand, we break the spell of the demons when we realize that every
moment of our experience is inseparable from our own consciousness, which is to
recognize the fluid, non-objective and thus, “dreamlike nature” of reality. Just like
figures in a dream, the demons are, ultimately speaking, our own energy, not separate
from our own mind (see “God the Imagination”).
Just like a dream, the way we observe the world literally evokes the very world we are
observing. This means that it is through our awareness itself that we can intervene in the
underlying matrix of creation and find the leverage point where we can change the waking dream we are having, which is “evolution-in-action.” Interestingly, we wouldn’t have woken up and had this realization without the antagonistic co-operation of the demons, which is to say the demons are secretly allies in disguise, catalysts of consciousness appearing as adversaries, blessings in drag (see “The Light of Darkness”).

NOT THE ONLY ONE

Jung writes,
“The psychological rule says that when an inner situation is not made conscious, it happens outside, as fate.” To the extent that we are not consciously working on
integrating, via the process of individuation, the unconscious contents and conflicts that are activated within us, is the extent to which these psychic contents will manifest
externally and be unconsciously acted out collectively in a literal, concrete way on the world stage.
Jung comments,
“One shouldn’t evade this conflict by escaping into a premature and anticipated state of redemption, otherwise one provokes it in the outside world. And that is of the devil.”
An activated psychic content not realized consciously in the course of individuation
manifests externally, where it gets “dreamed up” in, as, and through the outer world.
To use Jung’s metaphor, the sponsor of this project(ion) is “the devil.”
Jung says,
“The world powers that rule over all mankind, for good or ill, are unconscious psychic factors…We are steeped in a world that was created by our own psyche.” This brings to mind various quotes in the Bible about “powers and principalities” that rule over humanity, which is the metaphysically equivalent expression of our psychological situation.
1 The Gospel of Luke, for example, has the devil say that the kingdoms of the world are under his control (4:5-6).
2 The Gospel of John speaks of the devil as “the ruler of the world.” (14:30, 16:11)
3 The First Letter of John says that “the whole world lies under the power of the evil one.” (5:19)
4 Paul speaks of Satan as “the god of this world.” (Gal. 1:4; Cor. 4:4)
Whether we call it a demon or an unconscious psychic factor, the force that rules over
us is created by and an expression of our own psyche.

Reflecting upon the First World War, Jung says, “When fate, for four whole years, played out a war of monumental frightfulness on the stage of Europe – a war that nobody
wanted – nobody dreamed of asking exactly who or what had caused the war and its continuation.” Similarly, in today’s “war on terror,” a war that nobody, or at least very few people want, we need to dream of asking exactly who or what has caused this
war and its continuation.
Jung continues,
“Nobody realized that European man was possessed by something that robbed him of all free will. And this state of unconscious possession will continue undeterred until we Europeans become scared of our ‘god-almightiness’ [inflation].
Such a change can begin only with individuals, for the masses are blind brutes, as we know to our cost.” The real carrier of life is the individual. Real transformation doesn’t come through mass movements, or new legislation, but via change within the individual.
Speaking about the effects of being identified with, possessed and inflated by the unconscious, Jung writes, “Everything that exceeds a certain human size evokes equally inhuman powers in man’s unconscious. Totalitarian demons are called forth.”
As a result of becoming overly one-sided in a multi-sided universe, “totalitarian demons” are “dreamed up” both within the unconscious, and, synchronistically, out in the world.

Events in the outer world are symbolic reflections of what we are dreaming inside of ourselves (see “Catching the Bug of Synchronicity”). What this means is that the most effective way to change the world is to change us.
Jung writes,
“…the historic events of our time have painted a picture of man’s psychic reality in indelible colors of blood and fire, and given him an object lesson which he will never be able to forget if – and this is the great question – he has today acquired enough consciousness to keep up with the furious pace of the devil within him.” Will we, each one of us, be able to mediate, channel and transform the archetypal, daemonic energy which is flowing through us into creativity such that we can constructively build a new world?
This is the question upon whose answer rests the future survival or destruction of the world as we know it.
Jung says, “Mankind, because of its scientific and technological development, has in increasing measure delivered itself over to the danger of possession… Man’s worst sin is unconsciousness… When shall we… in all seriousness seek ways and means to exorcize him, to rescue him from possession and unconsciousness, and make this the most vital task of civilization?”

When shall we make “the most vital task of civilization” the exorcism of the demons that possess us? In other words, when shall we make our most vital task “waking up?”
Jung saw this present-day manifestation of the daemonic as an archetypal expression of the potentially catastrophic upheavals that accompany the great transitions from one age to the next.
When an archetype like the daemonic appears, both within ourselves and out in the world, things become critical, with possibilities for both good and evil alike. How things actually turn out depends upon how consciousness responds to the situation.
During a collective manifestation of the daemonic, such as we have today, the great danger is a mass movement where millions, or even billions of people fall into their unconscious together, igniting a psychic epidemic which spawns an apocalyptic war that ravages life on earth and destroys the biosphere of the planet (see “Archetypal Dimensions of World Events”).
To quote Jung,
“The unconscious works sometimes with most amazing cunning, arranging certain fatal situations, fatal experiences, which make people wake up.” Catastrophe can only be avoided if enough people wake up to what is being revealed to us as we act out the unconscious, and then connect with each other so as to de-activate, assimilate, and transform the potentially deleterious effects of the activated daemon. We can then, under the guidance of the Self, our intrinsic wholeness, help each other
to usher in a new era of sustainable peace, understanding and mutual co-operation.
Our very continued existence as a species on this beautiful planet depends upon this
realization.
To be pessimistic and think that we can’t change the trajectory of our species’ suicidal,
trance-like behavior is to be under a spell, to have fallen under a “demon’s curse.”
Having fallen under such a spell, we only strengthen and solidify our spell-bound
convict-ion by acting as if there are no other possible outcomes. Pessimism is food for
the demons (see “Our Situation is Dire, and There’s no Need for Pessimism”).
Gods, astral en Roswell.

The Allies of Humanity, a message for Planet Earth.

Content: “Are any of the visitors beneficial to humanity?”

“Will anyone from space come to save humanity?”

“If conquest is not allowed in this region of space, how can an Intervention occur and be successful?”

“What role, if any, do our governments play in assisting the activities of the Intervention?”

“Are any of the world’s governments resisting the Intervention?”

“When will humanity be able to travel outside this solar system?”

“You speak of individual freedom being rare in the universe. Why is this so?”

“The Briefings state that the Intervention is promoting human conflict. How does it do this? Can you give us an example of what you have seen so far?”

“You also indicate that the Intervention is pacifying people. How can it pacify people and yet promote human conflict?”

“Is the Intervention manipulating food production or any other industries here on Earth?”

“If the Intervention is overcome, what should humanity do with all the individuals who are a result of the hybridization program?”

“Inter-dimensional travel seems to be the fastest way to get around in space. Why is it not being used?”

“It appears very likely that we will run out of at least some of our essential resources in the near future. How can human civilization continue if we do not receive technology and assistance from our neighbors in space?”

“Are there many worlds such as ours in space?”

“Many people conclude that the visitors are beneficial because they haven’t already attacked us and taken over.

“How do free races maintain their autonomy and keep races that are not free from interfering?”

“You keep mentioning that Knowledge is the most powerful force in the universe.

SEVENTH BRIEFING: Questions & Answers

We are pleased to be able to respond to these questions, for we know they are important in giving you a greater understanding. You will need this understanding now, for the world is changing and your future and destiny is before you. It is our privilege to share this greater wisdom with you. We can only hope that it can be comprehended correctly and applied correctly, for such things can be misconstrued and grave error can arise from them. Let us begin now.

“How are you different from those forces who are intervening in the world today?”

We represent those free races in your region of space who still value individual freedom and who have stayed out of the larger networks of trade and commerce conducted by nations that, though powerful, do not honor individual freedom and do not recognize the power of Knowledge in the individual as a blessing and as a great resource.

We come here not to intervene but to share our wisdom and perspective that humanity will need now to proceed with greater certainty and greater strength and understanding in its engagement with life in the universe. You cannot give yourself this education. It cannot be taught in your universities or centers of learning. Therefore, it must be given to you by others who value your presence in the universe and do not want to see you fall under the persuasion and domination of foreign powers.

Therefore, our intent is entirely different from that of the Intervention. Our societies are entirely different. Our focus and our wisdom are entirely different. If you can understand that humanity must unite itself and gather its own strength and wisdom without foreign control, then you will understand why we are not intervening in the world, but instead only offering our wisdom, perspective and guidance for you to use or not to use, as you so choose.

“What does the Intervention want here on Earth?”

The Intervention seeks to control this world and the world’s peoples. It does this not only to meet its own goals of wealth and resource acquisition, but to serve larger powers who secretly will use the Intervention to gain control of the world. These larger powers would not dare to enter the world as the Intervention is doing now, but they will use these more unscrupulous forces to achieve their own goals of influence and acquisition.

The Intervention wants a compliant humanity. It does not want a rebellious humanity, for it could not manage that. The Intervention wants humanity to work agreeably—believing in its goals, principles and promises. These, of course, are false and deceiving, and it would be the gravest of errors if humanity were to follow these mandates.

Therefore, understand that you now have competition from the universe—competition for the value and the resources of this world, its strategic position and those things that are secretly hidden here beyond human awareness, which are of immense value to those races in the universe who are aware of them.

From this point forward, you will have to defend your world from intervention and from persuasion, which can be very powerful and very influential. These powers have been exerted in our worlds to the great detriment of our peoples, and we had to fight and struggle to regain our freedom and to ward off these influences and to keep them out of our districts. It is the price in the universe where freedom is rare.

Freedom requires vigilance. Freedom requires great care and great discernment. Humanity must develop these skills and these qualities if it is to survive in a diverse and influential universe, if it is to remain free and self-determined amidst the presence of other powerful forces.

“Are any of the visitors beneficial to humanity?”

No one who is visiting your world now or in recent times is beneficial to humanity. They all represent competing forces vying for power and influence here. They are all part of the Intervention, which is made up of more than one race. If you could understand your situation more thoroughly, then you would recognize that intervention in any form is detrimental to humanity and that such intervention is being carried out for self-interest to gain control and to gain domination.

No true ally of humanity would be in the world trying to manipulate human awareness, trying to control human behavior, trying to steer human destiny to its own ends.

Therefore, you are facing an unequivocal situation. You do not have the burden of trying to tell friend from foe amongst those who are intervening in the world. That would be very difficult for you to do, given the powers of persuasion that are being placed upon humanity at this time.

You have the benefit of facing a clear and unequivocal situation. Those who are visiting your world are here to manipulate and to deceive. They feel that their goals are correct and that they more than you could rule humanity beneficially. But that is according to their values, which does not esteem in any way individual freedom, nor does it value the greater qualities of the human nature and the achievements of humanity.

“Will anyone from space come to save humanity?”

No one will come to save humanity, and those who claim to be here for this purpose represent the Intervention itself. If humanity is ever to become strong and self-determined in the universe, it must save itself. What it needs from other races in the universe is the kind of wisdom and guidance we are providing through these sets of Briefings. This is what any other society in the universe who cares about humanity’s future and freedom could give in a world where a divided humanity is struggling with itself, despoiling its world and undermining the three basic achievements that are necessary for freedom: unity, self-sufficiency and discretion.

Do not think that others will come here to save humanity, for they will come here to save the world for themselves, and humanity will be but a resource they will use to achieve their own goals. Do not be foolish and naïve. Do not think that other races would expend the energy and invest themselves to such a great degree just to assure your freedom, for such an investment must be for their own purposes. This requires careful thought and consideration on your part, a very sober approach and a greater objectivity.

“If conquest is not allowed in this region of space, how can an Intervention occur and be successful?”

Conquest is not allowed in this region of space, so other means are sought through inducements, through the offering of gifts of technology and through persuading a native race that it alone cannot govern itself or assure its own future. It is these same persuasions that humanity places upon itself through its commercial and political persuasions.

Humanity has a greater destiny and a greater potential. Humanity can establish a sustainable use of this world. It can establish this security and stability, but it will have to proceed very differently than it is proceeding now. Otherwise, it will think that others will come to give it gifts, to uplift its science and technology, to show it how to live in peace.

But this is where you are vulnerable and fall easily under foreign persuasion. For such a peace does not exist amongst those who are intervening in the world. And there is no free energy in the universe that is truly free.

They will come to exploit you and to take advantage of your expectations and your naiveté. Therefore, you must be very wary here and very cautious. It is these powers of persuasion and powers of influence in the mental environment that will have such a great impact upon human thinking, human expectations and human emotions.

Here you either make yourself available to such persuasion, or you recognize you must resist it. Here humanity’s approach will make all the difference, for truly a small non-military force could gain ascendancy in the world without the use of force. It could do this through the power of persuasion and by offering the native people things that they think they want. This is how native peoples have been seduced throughout human history by other intervening powers. Now you are facing intervening forces from the universe, whose persuasion is much more sophisticated and much more powerful. If you are in their proximity, they can control your thinking, your feelings and your perception. This is the power they have of influence in the mental environment.

You can withstand this power because of the presence of Knowledge within yourself, the Knowledge that the Creator of all life has placed within you. For it cannot be persuaded. It cannot be deceived. And it cannot be corrupted. You will need to gain access to this greater Knowledge if you are to remain free and to develop wisdom and maturity in the Greater Community.

“What role, if any, do our governments play in assisting the activities of the Intervention?”

Some governments have assisted the Intervention, only to find it is working against them, and that it is deceptive and untrustworthy. Major governments in the world today have had contact in the past and have made certain agreements to allow the Intervention to function here in exchange for certain kinds of technology. But this has given license to a very dangerous intrusion into the human world and into human societies. Its influence is considerable and is directed to those individuals who are deemed to be the most compliant and the most easily persuaded.

But in recent times, there has been a shift to influence those in positions of leadership in commerce, for they are not accountable to the public. They are unelected and go largely unrecognized by the human population. They garner tremendous wealth, and they do not claim to have great scruples, such as your elected officials might proclaim. They can operate in secrecy, with very little accountability to anyone.

There has been a change, therefore, in the Intervention’s emphasis to move towards individuals in positions of leadership in commerce, particularly regarding resource acquisition and distribution. For these individuals hold great power in these arenas and are far more easily persuaded. Your people know not of what is occurring in your midst.

“Are any of the world’s governments resisting the Intervention?”

Yes, the United States and Russia are resisting the Intervention. That is one of the reasons they have ceased their competition that was so destructive over many decades. They are more cooperative now, for they realize they need one another to be successful in offsetting the impacts and the persuasion that is being cast upon humanity.

There are smaller governments assisting now, but primarily it is these two greater powers that hold such great military strength and persuasion in the world. It is they who had fallen under alien deception, and it is they who have now turned against the Intervention. That is why our contact on Earth, Marshall Vian Summers, can receive this information and can receive our Briefings and counsel without fear of government suppression.

He is being watched, we are sure, though we cannot tell to what extent. He is providing a service not only to the peoples of the world, but also to those governments who are aware of the Intervention and who are now opposing its presence and its activities in the world.

“Human scientists say that no one can travel faster than the speed of light. Therefore, how is it possible that the Intervention can come here or even that you could come here?”

This premise is certainly one that limits human understanding. If you could not travel faster than these speeds, you could not travel in space at all, and that perhaps is the assumption of many who still think that this is a barrier that cannot be surpassed.

Even before there were any human civilizations in the world, space travel was underway to a very large and sophisticated extent. You can travel faster than the speed of light and counteract its effect on time and aging, and this has been practiced far longer than any human civilization.

But travel is not as fast as you might think or imagine. It still takes time to travel between solar systems—sometimes, in your estimation and time frame, days and weeks or even months, depending on the distance one has to traverse. This, of course, would be astoundingly fast according to your notion, but you are still crawling along at a slow pace while other nations have been engaged in commerce, trade and travel for hundreds of thousands of your years, even in your region of space.

You do not live in some newly developed part of the universe. There has been a long history in this region, longer even than we can account for—a history of early war, conquest and conflict. This has been surpassed by a greater unity, a great network of trade and a great network of control—which has suppressed war and conflict, but which has also suppressed freedom and self-determination amongst its participating nations.

Therefore, you must consider that this barrier, called the speed of light, is something that humanity, in some distant future, will be able to overcome. Even on its own it will find a way to do this. But surely it cannot hold to such a limit as being defining. For we have come to be near the Earth, and now we are far away from the Earth, and the Intervention has come to intervene in the world, which it is doing now ever so greatly with each passing year. Trade and commerce is going on in many regions inside the galaxy, and we may only assume in other galaxies as well. So never think that technology in the universe is limited by human understanding or accomplishment.

“When will humanity be able to travel outside this solar system?”

Your travel outside this solar system may be possible within the next two centuries, but we say “may be possible” because you will have to face the great environmental change that is occurring in your world, which has the power to undermine human civilization. And you also have to face the consequences of intervention in your world, which could usurp human authority here and place humanity under foreign control and domination. Either of these two events could alter the course of human destiny thoroughly, could stifle and control humanity’s accomplishments and its destiny as a free and self-determined peoples in the universe.

Therefore, there are great dangers facing you now, and that is why our Briefings are so important and why we have been called by greater Spiritual Powers to come to the Earth to deliver our messages to a worthy world and a worthy people.

“You speak of individual freedom being rare in the universe. Why is this so?”

Freedom is difficult to cultivate. It can be unruly and disorganized. It can lead to dangerous individual assertions. It can have disastrous consequences if it is not governed wisely and conscientiously. It is far easier for nations to exert control and to establish authority over their peoples and societies. That is why most nations choose this easier and more expedient path, even though it leads to a far less productive and creative outcome.

Freedom is difficult to cultivate even on an individual level. It requires responsibility. It requires awareness. It requires wise governance and counsel. It requires a wise leadership and a willing and educated population. These things are all very challenging to establish, and that is why many nations choose the alternative route to stability.

We believe, however, that the path of individual freedom leads to a stronger nation and to greater creativity and accomplishments amongst its citizens for the benefit of all. We believe that repressive societies, though they may be common in the universe, do not have this creativity and cannot benefit from the wisdom and the greater purpose that each person carries. Thus, their achievements are limited, and they tend to copy one another, for they are not creative. New technology, new wisdom and new ways of creative social governance are not established in these nations. They are conservative, and they resist progressive thinking and progressive accomplishments.

Here humanity must see that it has one of two pathways to follow in establishing greater security and stability in the world. It will either create a repressive regime that will enforce order and stifle the creativity and freedom of individuals. Or it will choose the more difficult path of establishing a freer, more creative and more productive society.

It is our hope and wish that humanity will choose the path of freedom and build the freedom that it has already established in many parts of the world. It has, of course, a long way to go in doing this, and it is not an easy task. But now with the prospect of diminishing resources in the world and the presence of intervening, manipulative forces, humanity faces a great challenge in this regard.

You can never take your freedom for granted in the universe. Freedom is a privilege and not merely a right. It must be built with strength and wisdom, and it must be protected with vigilance, always.

“If you were caught by the Intervention, what would happen to you and would there be consequences for your own worlds?”

If we were to be caught by the intervening forces, we would be tortured and exposed to cruel punishment to extract from us any information that we might have. Our home worlds would be discerned, and great external pressure would be brought to bear upon the leaders of our nations regarding our presence and influence here in the world. For our worlds have established agreements of non-interference in regions outside of our own, and this is what gives us our autonomy, an autonomy that is always fragile and under scrutiny for the possibility of revision.

According to our agreements, we are not allowed to be in the vicinity of your world giving such counsel, even if we are not directly intervening. But we are nearby, and our purpose is noble and worthy and guided by a greater Source. So certainly we would be tortured and destroyed, those of us who are gathered for this purpose. And our worlds would come under greater scrutiny and tremendous pressure, and our contracts guaranteeing our autonomy would be threatened and challenged.

This would be grave for our leadership. Therefore, we act with the greatest secrecy. That is why we do not describe our appearance. That is why we do not give our names, describe our worlds or tell you where our worlds reside. It is of the utmost importance to us that these things remain secret. We have not even revealed them to our contact here on Earth. Nor would we do so. For any human mind can be interfered with, and its understanding can be extracted by those intervening forces in the world now.

Therefore, you must understand the importance of discretion. That is why it is one of the three requirements for establishing and maintaining freedom in the universe: unity, self-sufficiency and discretion. You are only at the beginning of learning about the power of the mental environment. You are only beginning to learn how other races can gain access to human wisdom and understanding. You are only beginning to realize how much your freedom will have to be guarded and protected if it is to be sustained in a universe where freedom is rare.

“The Briefings state that the Intervention is promoting human conflict. How does it do this? Can you give us an example of what you have seen so far?”

You have but to promote religious extremism and nationalism and to convince the leaders and persuasive individuals that other peoples represent their enemy and a threat. You have only to project the images of spiritual saints and emissaries proclaiming the need to overcome adversaries. This is how the Intervention can promote conflict in the world. The United States’ engagement and its war in the nation of Iraq is a very good example of leaders being persuaded to do something that is utterly foolish, to engage in an intractable conflict with no certain outcome, committing so much of its resources, even risking world opinion to engage in this manner. Other nations, particularly nations that are powerful and influential, will be engaged in this way through persuasion by the Intervention—to diminish their power, to diminish their influence, to diminish the morale of their own peoples and to diminish their economies. For the Intervention needs humanity to decline in order to present itself as truly beneficial to human destiny.

Therefore, the Intervention will seek to weaken the strongest powers to degrade their influence in the world and to create an overall situation where the Intervention will be deemed truly valuable, and its counsel and its guidance will be attended to and followed.

“You also indicate that the Intervention is pacifying people. How can it pacify people and yet promote human conflict?”

The Intervention is pacifying certain populations—the young people, the educated, those who are spiritually inclined, those who could not be encouraged to wage war or conflict against others. Those who could be the greatest emissaries for the Intervention will be pacified and directed. They will believe in the new leadership. They will believe that the Intervention is here to save a struggling and declining humanity.

Those who cannot be pacified can be encouraged to engage in their ancient animosities and their distrust of their neighbors, and to fortify their resistance and hostility towards their historic enemies. Lands can be contested. Resources will be contested increasingly. Even within nations, there will be groups who will arise, who will seek to destabilize and overtake those nations. Many groups will be governed by religious ideology, governed not only by the defaults of human nature, but also by the influence and guidance exerted by the Intervention itself.

“Is the Intervention manipulating food production or any other industries here on Earth?”

The Intervention does not need to manipulate food production, as it is declining as a result of humanity’s impact on your own environment. Other industries, such as the military industries—industries that supply and support military efforts and military adventures—these are certainly being encouraged. There are forces encouraging human conflict. This represents the impact of the Intervention. While there is an incentive for peace, there is also an incentive for conquest. That is why many nations are building their military capacity. At least they were when we were last in the vicinity of your world, and we must assume that this is continuing.

This is not only the result of human mistrust and human fear. It also represents the impact of the Intervention. The Intervention is not threatened by your weapons. Only nuclear power and nuclear weapons threaten its existence here. And these things cannot be used without great consequence to the welfare and to the future of humanity.

The Intervention is using power in the mental environment—the powers of persuasion, powers which humanity is only beginning to discern and to understand. Humanity still thinks that military power will determine its fate and its future, but in a universe of greater skill and greater influence, this will not prove to be effective. This represents a new threshold of learning and accomplishment for the human family.

“Can you reveal where the Intervention bases on Earth are so that we can shut them down?”

We do not have full knowledge of this. Certainly, the first bases were established in the oceans and shallow waters, away from the presence of human military forces—in the Arctic regions and in areas where there is no military establishment. Bases underground, which are far more difficult to establish, have been built in mountain regions. Transmitters have been established in mountain regions, which have cities at their base—transmitters to affect the mental environment and pacify the public. This represents one of the efforts of the Intervention.

We do not know where all of these transmitters have been placed, but we do know they are being used. We do not know where all the bases have been established, particularly on land. We were never near enough to the surface of the Earth to be able to witness these things ourselves and can only understand their existence by deciphering the transmissions of the Intervention. Yet it is enough for you to know that such bases exist here and that there is a significant alien presence in the world. It is not a military presence. It represents the skillful use of commercial forces by those who have gained power and influence in the mental environment.

You will have to change your understanding of the use of power to realize how strong an influence this is and how much more effective it is towards establishing your goals and priorities than the exertion of military power. The exertion of military power is restrained in your world, and it is greatly suppressed in this part of the galaxy.

“If the Intervention is overcome, what should humanity do with all the individuals who are a result of the hybridization program?”

If the Intervention can be overcome, you will face future interventions. But regarding the presence of such individuals, you will have to reincorporate them into the human society, and that will require a great investment of time and energy. These individuals will actually be able to be beneficial participants in society, but their understanding and the influences upon them will have to change remarkably.

Some could become wise seers. But it is their allegiance to humanity that will have to be fully established, and they will have to learn to shield themselves from the effects of the Intervention, which can influence them even if the Intervention is not present in the world. For in space, influence in the mental environment can accrue over vast distances. Once influence has been established, this can take place.

This will be a challenge. These individuals can become beneficial to humanity if their allegiance can be placed here and if persuasions upon them can be minimized or eliminated.

“Inter-dimensional travel seems to be the fastest way to get around in space. Why is it not being used?”

Inter-dimensional travel, though greatly promising, has proven to be disastrous, for you cannot control your reentry, and even if you could find one of the portals, which are constantly in motion, you would not be able to ascertain where you would emerge—into what kind of physical environment or physical condition you would find yourself. That is why so many craft that have attempted this transference have never returned.

The portals remain a mystery. Inter-dimensional travel remains a hypothesis. We know that certain races have been able to bridge the gulf between dimensions. They have been able to communicate from the other dimension, but they were not able to return, and contact with them was short lived, leading to an uncertain outcome.

Humanity hopes and believes that such things will be available to it so that it can travel anywhere it wants, to move across the galaxy in an instant, to emerge in any environment. But the reality of the Greater Community will change these notions, will temper your ambitions and will show you a very different reality than the one that you imagine for yourself.

Even if you could emerge through such travel, you would end up in the vicinity of foreign worlds with whom you do not have relations or in physical environments that are entirely hazardous. You would have no way of charting a corridor route there unless you had allies existing in that region. And such alliances would be very difficult to establish, for no race wants to be intruded upon by races from afar in this manner. This would be a challenge to their security and to their network of local trade. They would be greatly threatened by the appearance of a foreign race with whom they had no history or relations.

You have but to think of these things more carefully, more objectively, to see and to understand what we are conveying to you. This requires a serious consideration. Otherwise, you will continue to indulge in fantasies of high technology and instantaneous space travel. But you will have to face a very different reality as you emerge into a Greater Community of life.

“Many people here on Earth would love to travel to other worlds and meet other races there, yet you indicate that this would be very limited. Why is this the case?”

Most nations do not welcome visitation unless it is from those who are its longstanding trading partners, and even here visitation will be limited, for societies do not want to be influenced by other societies. Certainly any free nation would not be welcome to visit a nation that is not free.

Then there is the problem of biological contamination. We can think of no world where humanity would be welcome at all given the biological reality of your world and the tremendous threat it could impose upon a foreign world. They are not prepared to deal with the innumerable biological agents and influences that exist here, and to receive an emissary from Earth would be a very challenging prospect for them.

If they were not a free society, they would not be interested in your individual expressions. They would be threatened by your music and your art. They would not want these influences to be exerted upon their cultures. They would not want their own populations to witness you or to understand you, for in this, you would be a great threat to them and to all they have invested in establishing their highly controlled societies.

You would not be able to reach other nations because you would have to cross territories owned by others. You would have to use trade routes governed by trading authorities. You would have to make agreements and compromises. You would have to come to terms with many other powers just to travel freely in this region of space. If you traveled outside these established routes, you would always face the danger of piracy. You would also face the danger of becoming lost.

Even amongst our worlds, we would not welcome human visitation at this time, for you are not yet wise enough, united enough or discerning enough for us to establish active relations with you. That is why no one should be intervening in the world. No one should be attempting to establish relations with the human family, and those that do are here for their own purposes, to establish their own quest for power and domination.

You, who are naïve and do not understand the realities of life and travel in the universe, have yet to see these things clearly. But if you think carefully about this, you will understand. There are nations even within your own world that you could not visit freely at this moment because they are not free, because they would not welcome your influence and your presence in their midst. Though such nations are few, their examples serve to illustrate what we are saying.

The universe is far more diverse, and its societies are far more different from one another than anything you have established here on Earth. Races are far more different from each other. And trust in relations can take a very long time to establish and is always maintained with great scrutiny and care. This represents the reality that you will face as you emerge into this larger arena of life.

“It appears very likely that we will run out of at least some of our essential resources in the near future. How can human civilization continue if we do not receive technology and assistance from our neighbors in space?”

If you seek to gain technology and assistance, you will be drawn into the persuasions, requirements and the commercial trade networks of other nations. They will limit your freedom. They will limit what you can do here on Earth. They will influence the kind of societies you will create in the future and will greatly limit the freedom allowed your citizens. You would give up so much for this technology and assistance. You do not yet realize what a great loss this would be and how much humanity would lose in the exchange.

You have enough here on Earth if humanity will govern itself wisely and if nations will cooperate sufficiently to preserve the resources of the world and to use them in a sustainable manner. You will need to build new technology, but even more than technology, you will need the will and the cooperation to do this.

Over time, humanity will have to find beneficial and humane ways of limiting its population and limiting its consumption. It would be a very different world than the world you live in today, which is based upon the desire and the expectation of endless growth and expansion.

To be self-sufficient is one of the requirements for freedom. For humanity to be self-sufficient in this world would require a very different creation of society and a very different set of priorities for your leaders and your citizens.

What will bring about this great change but necessity itself? You are facing great change in the world—great environmental change, great change that all advancing technological societies have had to face or will have to face inevitably in their evolution. It is how you recognize and prepare for this, how you respond to this and what kind of society you build, whether it be free or repressive, that will determine the future of human existence in this world.

“Are there many worlds such as ours in space?”

There are many worlds that have been stripped of their natural resources and have become barren as a result. Certainly, terrestrial worlds such as yours are rare, maybe one out of five or six thousand planets contain the biological diversity that you enjoy and take for granted here in your world. That still accounts for many planets in the universe. But such planets are always occupied, are always valued and the native races always have to defend their rights, their privileges and their stewardship as they begin to emerge into the Greater Community.

Terrestrial planets create biological hazards for visitors. And that is why colonization is usually attempted once the native race has either established a usable network that the visitors can use, such as is the case here on Earth, or have destroyed themselves through conflict and war, leaving an open door for intervention to occur, even military intervention. Military intervention is allowed in this region of space under such conditions. This represents part of the ethics of contact that are assumed and are practiced by many nations in this part of the Greater Community.

“Many people conclude that the visitors are beneficial because they haven’t already attacked us and taken over. What would you say to this?”

The Intervention is not here to attack humanity but to persuade humanity. The Intervention needs a compliant humanity to work for it and to engage with it to become part of its Collective. This assumption that humanity would be attacked and overtaken is entirely wrong. It is how you view gaining access to new lands and new resources.

But even in your modern world, economic, more than military, forces are used to gain acquisition to resources, and this is what is happening to the world regarding its relations in space. You are encountering small, economic Collectives who are here to begin the process of acquisition that larger nations can assume later on, if the Intervention is successful in establishing its presence and its power in your world.

To think that you would be attacked is wrong, and to think that because you have not been attacked that the forces that are here are beneficial is wrong. Both are based upon false assumptions. Therefore, the conclusions are incorrect.

Humanity, living so long in isolation and being so warlike yourselves, is certainly likely to make such assumptions and to continue to believe in them and to uphold them. It is human ignorance that gives rise to such things, and human arrogance as well. For you may be preeminent in your own world, but you have no preeminence in the Greater Community, and you are not looked upon favorably by your nearest neighbors because of your warlike tendencies and destructive use of your environment.

Those neighbors who are not free will look upon the freedoms that you have cultivated thus far with great anxiety and with great concern, not wanting these influences to be exerted within their own worlds. You have no idea what your music and your dance could evoke in such worlds and why they are viewed as a threat to those controlling powers that dominate them.

“How do free races maintain their autonomy and keep races that are not free from interfering?”

Ah, this is the challenge! This is the challenge that awaits you if you are able to offset the Intervention that is occurring in the world today. The interest in your world will not cease, and attempts to influence you will continue. How would you keep such influences at bay? For free races living in larger neighborhoods of worlds that are not free, often this requires the signing of non-interference contracts, which stipulate generally that the free nations will not participate beyond their boundaries and areas or regions of influence. They will not try to exert or promote their freedom abroad. In exchange for this, other nations agree to stay out of their areas of influence and to not contact them directly.

So various kinds of contracts like this are often made in highly inhabited regions of space, but such contracts are subject to change and reevaluation, and that is why the free nations do not travel beyond their districts or seek to promote freedom abroad. For that would violate their own autonomy and their own insulation from the Greater Community itself.

In areas where there is not a large concentration of nations, free nations will have to maintain their security through military means, aggressively challenging anyone who would come into their vicinity. This is less desirable, of course, but in sparsely populated regions in uncharted territories, this is definitely required. Everyone in the universe is looking for resources. Many in the universe want to have influence over other nations. Even in largely inhabited regions such as this, these desires and these needs continue.

Therefore, it is a tenuous balance that a free nation or a group of free nations must establish in order to keep the Greater Community out of their territories and to prevent the kind of intervention that is occurring in the world today.

Humanity still thinks the universe is a great empty place awaiting exploration, awaiting colonization, with infinite resources there for the taking, if only humanity can establish a sufficient technology to gain access to them. Yet these assumptions all stem from your isolation and your profound ignorance about the nature of life, commerce and interactions in the Greater Community.

We understand this, and we do not condemn you for it, for we too had many of the same assumptions before contact with the Greater Community began for us, before intervention was attempted in our worlds. Since then, we have established greater autonomy, but it must be guarded carefully, both in the physical environment and in the mental environment.

Other nations employ seers who try to see into our worlds, to see what kind of technology we are producing and to see where our power and our weakness reside. We must offset these intrusions in the mental environment with seers of our own, who are guided by Knowledge, who would obstruct this kind of intervention in the mental environment.

This is all a new frontier to you and to human science and to human religion. Power in the mental environment in many ways can be equivalent to power in the physical environment, and the dangers and defenses that must be established here are significant. This is the price of freedom in the universe—constant vigilance, constant care and great responsibility.

“You keep mentioning that Knowledge is the most powerful force in the universe. How can that be true when there are so many other powerful forces to deal with?”

Knowledge represents the power to see, to know and to act with certainty. It also represents the power to resist persuasion, deception and influence in the mental environment. The individual or the nation that has this strength has the power to resist intervention and to comprehend the intentions and the activities of other nations who might be threatening to its freedom or existence.

It is the ultimate form of intelligence, you see, and seers who are guided by Knowledge are more powerful than seers who are not. Here you are able to discern the future and future events before they happen, with varying degrees of accuracy. Here you are able to discern the intentions of others and the capabilities of others without the use of technology. Here you can pretend to be weak when in fact you are really strong. Here you can appear to be non-aggressive when in fact you can be incisive in your inquiries. Here you can be well protected and well defended without requiring a great military force or infrastructure. Here you can make wise decisions regarding your relations with other nations even if their intentions are questionable or uncertain. Here you can engage in diplomacy with other nations with far more certainty than you would have otherwise.

It is this power and this Knowledge that humanity will need if it is to gain the strength and commitment to establish greater unity amongst its nations and the wise and sustaining use of the world. This will overcome greed and avarice. This will overcome competition, conflict and war. This will overcome grievance and hatred and inequality.

That is why Knowledge is the greatest power in the universe. It is a power that the Intervention is not using, or it would not be here engaged in the activities it is undertaking. This is the power that will give humanity the power to offset intervention and to prevent future interventions. This is the power to give humanity the stability to establish a new world with far greater equanimity and equality, justice and freedom.

Think upon these things.

The Allies of Humanity, Book Two

By Marshall Vian Summers

SECOND COMMENTARY:Effects of the Pacification Program

It is easy to ask questions. It is more difficult to find the real answers. People are hungry for answers, but they do not have the awareness yet. So when considering the message in The Allies Briefings, people must begin to develop a Greater Community awareness and sensitivity. Just getting answers to questions does not develop this awareness or sensitivity. And indeed, even if you have the right answer, if you cannot experience it, if you cannot recognize it, if you cannot see its application, well, what good is it? It is lost on the person who is asking.

Therefore, it always comes back to developing the awareness and sensitivity and the ability to know. People want proof, and so they go to whoever they think is the expert, and the expert gives their opinions, and people say, “Ah! This must be the proof because the expert said so.” But it is all opinions. Without Knowledge, everything is just opinions in the mind. And these opinions are developed by people’s conditioning, by their attitudes and by their temperament. People can experience something and make conclusions and evaluations but be completely wrong in their estimation.

However, we are talking about higher consciousness here. We are not talking about having answers. Answers, without this higher consciousness, will not be enough, and their application will not be understood. Ultimately, you must gain this higher consciousness. This consciousness transcends human culture, human conditioning and even your biological identity. It is an awareness of life as it is moving all around you and through everything else. You need this higher consciousness to understand the plants and the animals, the weather and the movement of the world. You need this to understand the presence of negative forces in the mental environment and the presence of the Angelic Forces, which are here to serve you. And certainly, you must have this consciousness to be aware of the Greater Community forces in the world, to recognize their manifestations, their intentions and their methods. You need this higher awareness to tell friend from foe.

So when people ask a lot of questions, the real answer is the development of higher consciousness. This leads you into the mystery, where you may not be willing to go, but this is where you must go if you are going to understand. This is the mystery of your life—the mystery of what you know, the mystery of who you are, the mystery of why you are here and the mystery of what you must respond to. You are not here simply to fill your mind with more answers that cannot be recognized or understood.

This, then, moves things in the right direction. Yet of course there are people who cannot tolerate the mystery and must have answers, thinking answers will resolve their inquiry. These people will constitute the majority of people who inquire about The Allies Briefings and who will question you about it. You, personally, cannot answer all the questions there are about the Allies—who they are, where they come from, how they got here, their method of propulsion, where they are hiding and how they communicate. How can you possibly answer all these questions?

However, you can be aware of the Allies, and you have the ability to recognize the validity of their message. You have learned enough about life and about nature to understand their point of view and what they emphasize and why it is necessary. This is because of higher consciousness, not because you have answers. The Allies of Humanity Briefings promote questions. The reason they don’t answer every question is because you must develop the higher consciousness. If they told the reader everything about themselves, people would say, “Huh, I don’t believe it! Marshall’s making it all up!” You see, without the higher consciousness, people cannot make a connection.

Already you can see the effects of the Pacification Program that is being generated by the Intervention. There are already many people who have fallen prey to this, either by their own inclinations or by outside influence. Here people are led to believe that they can not really judge anything. “Well, I don’t want to be negative. I’ll be open to it.” Who told them to be open to it? “I’ll be open to whatever happens.” Who told them to be open to whatever happens? People’s critical discernment is being destroyed. So something happens and they say, “Well, you know, I don’t want to judge the situation.” What are you talking about! You need to evaluate what is happening. These people think they cannot be critical. “Well, I can’t really be critical. I don’t want to be negative.” Well, it may be necessary to speak out and say that something is really not appropriate. But these people can’t even do that. People who have been affected by this Pacification Program cannot even make a decision. They cannot look at anything and say, “Well, this is a good thing,” or “This is really not a good thing for me.” So they welcome everything, thinking that is how you must be with life.

That is not how you must be with life. It is true you must be willing to look at everything. But it is not true that you must accept everything, bond with everything, welcome everything. Of course not! Higher consciousness does not mean that you do not make critical evaluations. It simply means you view things from a higher vantage point. This does not mean that everything becomes gray. It means that everything becomes clear. You clearly see what to do and what not to do, what is good and what is not good. If this is not the product of spiritual study, then someone is being disabled.

While it is true you must learn not to judge a situation based upon your conditioning or beliefs, ultimately you must judge a situation based upon Knowledge, the Spiritual Intelligence that lives within you. This is the final arbiter in your discernment.

However, people do not recognize this. They take the first step and they think it is the last step. The first step is where you do not judge. This means you must learn to look and recognize something, which you cannot do if you judge it immediately. This is the first step, but people think it is the last step. The last step is very different from the first step. You do not judge in the moment because you need to see and know and recognize what you are looking at. This is discernment. You cannot be discerning if you judge things outright. Yet beyond this discernment, you must see clearly if something is good or not.

So you may recognize that the Intervention really is not good for humanity. In itself, the Intervention is not a good thing! But if you say, “Oh, I cannot judge the situation,” how will you ever know? You may want to think, “Well, it’s probably good at some other level.” A pacified person will say, “I will see how it is good for us because everything that happens is good for us.” This is not only human ignorance; this demonstrates the effects of the Pacification Program, which encourages people to trust things unwittingly, without discernment.

You can see this everywhere. You can see it in the UFO community. You can see it in spiritual communities. You can see it emerging in people all around you. The Allies Briefings will create a stir because they advocate discernment. They say, “The Intervention is not good for you.” Yet many people say, “Well, I don’t know. It must be good. I mean, it can’t be bad.” They’re befuddled. They don’t know what to think. “Well, I don’t know. I can’t really come to any decisions about it.” What are you talking about? Has your decision making become disabled? And if so, who disabled it? Why are some people thinking they must be open to everything and receptive to everything? Yes, they want to be non-judgmental, but that is only the first step. They don’t take the next step. They don’t exercise discernment. In some cases, their discernment has fallen away.

This is a critical problem. As a result of this Pacification Program, people cannot see and cannot know, and basically, though they are confused and frightened perhaps, they will just go along. “Well, I’ll just go along. I’ll just try to accept what is happening in my life.” People who are pacified can’t resist. They can’t fight against something because they don’t think it’s all right to do that. They think that everything has to be embraced. Where did this come from?

These ideas of unquestioned acceptance are prevalent in much of the spiritual teaching you see today. And people accept these ideas wholeheartedly. They think, “Well, this is the higher truth. We follow the higher truth.” Consider this in the light of the Pacification Program and you will begin to see how pervasive it really is.

People who are being pacified will be led to believe that they are gaining higher consciousness when in fact all of their power is being taken away from them. The Pacification Program is based upon an understanding of human psychology and human tendencies. Here people are conditioned to think that in order to be acceptable to God, they must basically give away what God has given them to use. “Well, to be acceptable to God, I must be meek and mild and non-judgmental and all-embracing of everything. I will look for the good in everything.”

Where did this come from? Is such acquiescence purely a human invention? Is this something that people just concoct for themselves in order to be happy in the moment? Well, in some cases, this is true. But consider the pacification of humanity. How are people pacified? They are told what they want to hear, and they are told they don’t really need to consider anything else. After all, if everything that happens to you is good, then why resist anything? Just embrace it all! This is the Pacification Program at work.

This influence is becoming omnipresent around you. People flock to places where the Intervention is operating, thinking that the “energy” there is so high. They say, “This is such an enlightening place.” Oh, my God! They are jumping into the fire. They are giving themselves away wholeheartedly. They go to these places and they feel the energy there, and they think, “Oh, this is really a powerful place. This is where it is happening!” And the longer they stay, the less they know, and the less they think they can return to their former lives. They become ever more listless and self-involved, and they become ever more dysfunctional.

This disengagement produces an anxiety at a deeper level, a level where you know that your life is not progressing and that you are not going where you need to go. Yet these people will think that this discomfort is part of their fear, or part of their psychology that must be eradicated and exorcised out of themselves. And so they will work hard to ignore the very signs that are telling them that their lives are amiss and that they are losing their lives.

They will say, “All is love. Just be loving. There is only love.” If they knew what they were talking about, actually that would be true. But they think love is simply passivity, happiness and acquiescence because that is the Pacification Program working on them. Now they are extending it to other people and becoming pacifiers themselves. And after awhile, well, they will not know what they know. And if something is really wrong, they will feel discomfort, but they will think it is just part of their psychological problem, and they will try to overlook it or remove it or bury it. And then they will do whatever is told them to do by the Intervention. They will say, “Oh, I got a message. I have to go do this. I am being guided. This is inner guidance for me.”

It will be very hard to awaken people from this. You have to awaken yourself first. People are so immersed in their listlessness and their pursuit of happiness, it’s almost like they are beyond reach. They are so lulled and so conditioned, you would have to drop a bomb in their laps to wake them up!

You can see the effects of the Pacification Program in spiritual communities in many places. Certainly not to all people, but to many people, acquiescence looks like the easy path, the easy way, the way to true happiness. Give up knowing anything, give up evaluating anything, give up resisting anything, and it looks like, “Oh, everything is just happiness from now on. Smooth sailing ahead!”

These nice people, the Intervention will simply lull them into a listless state and then basically they will not be a problem, and they will be receptive to whatever is given them. Their natural knowing will be so removed from their awareness, it will become the enemy now. They will think it is fearfulness. They will think it is negativity. And they will not want any part of it.

This is actually happening now. We are talking about an extreme case, but these extreme cases are growing in scope and magnitude. Many more people are simply falling into this state—even the young people, some of whom are especially prone to this kind of conditioning.

Consider this. True happiness comes from being true to yourself, from developing your own integrity and from living honorably with your integrity. True relationships are based upon sharing real integrity with others, building relationships of integrity, relationships that express your deeper nature and purpose in life.

However, look at the relationships of a pacified person, who says, “Well, we’re together as long as it feels good, as long as it’s okay, and if we’re not together, it’s okay, and whatever we do is okay.” But it’s not okay. And they know it’s not okay, but their natural knowing has been removed from their awareness. As a result, they say, “I will not feel those things. They disrupt my happiness, my peace, my equanimity.” And yet there is no peace or equanimity because there is no integrity, and because there is no integrity, there is no real relationship.

Do you see here how the poison is immersed in the very food that people want to eat? Spiritual food is being poisoned. How many spiritual teachers today are teaching real discernment? How many are promoting real personal integrity? How many are encouraging people to look clearly and see? How many teachers are encouraging their students to respond to the world? There are indeed some, but look around and you will see the Pacification Program being promoted unknowingly.

How perfect this is for the alien agenda. It takes time, but from their perspective, well, the results are worth it. The Intervention will then have a vast network of compliant people through which their agenda can flow. And the people will never know where it is coming from.

In another scenario, the situation becomes more complicated. Here the Intervention begins to show its darker side. Not everyone can be easily pacified. Those who cannot be pacified by the Intervention will be directed by the Intervention to judge those who oppose it. This will be particularly true for people who have extreme religious views and prejudices. These people will be directed to condemn those who do not share their views. Indeed, there are people in some religious communities who will receive messages that all the enemies of Christ must be eradicated if they cannot be saved and that the Second Coming will require the cleansing of the human family.

There are individuals today who are being so directed, and though they do not necessarily represent the leadership of these religious communities, their emphasis will grow as their frustration grows. They are waiting for the great arrival of Jesus, and they think it is not happening because of the sinfulness of the human family, sinfulness that must now be eradicated and not simply resisted. And the Jesus who will come will not be the real Jesus, but will be the Jesus prepared through the Intervention. This will be a false Jesus that they cannot really recognize because they are not developed in Knowledge. This Jesus will not bring peace but a reckoning. This reckoning will be welcomed by the followers because they are full of grievances themselves and believe that their prophecies are not being fulfilled because of the sinfulness of humanity and that this sinfulness must now be removed in order to bring Heaven on Earth.

Can you see for a moment how easy it would be for a Greater Community presence here, the Intervention, so skillful in influencing the mental environment and so aware of human tendencies and frailties, to provide this kind of influence? Can you see how, because of this manipulation, the righteous could begin to wage war against those people who disagree with them and against those who would preserve Knowledge in the world? Can you see how easy it would be for this to be generated?

Even the true believers in Christ would be targeted, for they do not share these grievances, and thus they are not in conformity with those individuals who are being directed by the Intervention. True believers in Christ would emphasize harmony and recognition and tolerance. But those being directed by the Intervention only want revenge for their failed prophecies. They want God’s punishment to be exacted, and they are willing to be the executioners. They are willing to be the judge and the jury to carry out what they believe now is God’s will. How will the Intervention eradicate its opponents? Should it gain enough power, you can see how this can be done.

Where pacification cannot be achieved, the Intervention will influence people to carry out their hostilities upon one another. As the world becomes more difficult, as resources diminish, as populations grow, as competition increases, as tragedy occurs more frequently, people’s sense of tolerance will diminish, and their grievances will be encouraged—not only by the Intervention, but certainly by those people who are ambitious and want to put themselves in positions of power. How perfectly this falls into the alien agenda, which seeks to simplify and restructure human allegiance. The Intervention does not care what religion they use so long as it can achieve these results. That is why a devout Christian, Muslim, Hindu or Buddhist must all learn the Way of Knowledge. Otherwise, how could they tell the difference between a spiritual influence and a Greater Community influence? To the undiscerning, well, it all looks like it’s coming from a higher place, from the Heavens. Who, then, can you trust?

The Intervention can create wonderful spiritual scenarios to activate those individuals who are most prone to be their messengers. It is not difficult for the Intervention to do. They simply stage a drama and put someone in the middle of it, and this person cannot tell the difference. People do not know what a Greater Community presence is. To them, it is all coming from somewhere else, not at their level, but from a higher place. So, in one scenario, an image of Jesus is projected to a zealous person, and the zealous person says, “Jesus has come to me.” And the Jesus says, “You must gather my true followers and you must denounce all others!” And the zealous follower says, “Yes, Master, yes, Master!”

Incredible? Yes. Impossible? No. If the alien agenda is to create a unified and compliant human allegiance, it must eradicate the dissident elements, the non-compliant elements. They will not do this themselves because then everyone will know that there is an Intervention. Instead, they will have human beings do it for them in the name of people’s religious convictions and prejudices. And no one will know what is behind it all. Some people will think it is Satan or Lucifer, but they will not know.

It is humanity’s ignorance that is its greatest weakness. It is humanity’s Knowledge that is its greatest strength. The Greater Community, the inhabited universe in which you live, is a very sophisticated environment of interaction and influence. If human beings are going to follow their prejudices, their hatreds and their grievances and cannot tell the difference between a spiritual and a Greater Community influence, then the Greater Community is an extremely hazardous environment. Someone in the Greater Community will eventually win you over to their Collective or to their cause. How will they do this? They will simply use what you already believe in rather than teaching you something new.

This is why learning the Way of Knowledge is so vitally important because this teaches you about the reality of life and spirituality in the Greater Community. It teaches you about the nature of manipulation and how to safeguard yourself and others. It teaches you how to recognize the effects and the manifestations of the Pacification Program and what you can do today to develop your own immunity to these forces, which are so influential on other people.

This is vitally needed in the world today. Every day men and women of good conscience are falling under persuasion that they cannot discern. It is a gradual process. But eventually they end up not even having a clue about what is happening in their lives and being hostile to any kind of correction.

As you begin to develop this Greater Community awareness yourself and to share the Allies’ message with others, you will see this resistance. You will see people’s inability to respond. It’s like someone has pulled the plug within them and now they just don’t know anything. And if they do respond at some level, they may try to pacify themselves. They will say, “Well, it’s just one point of view, and you know, we have to look for the good in this situation. We really have to embrace this situation. If the visitors are here, then they must be here for a purpose, and we have to open ourselves to this purpose. Maybe some of them are not good, but some of them are, and we have to love them to understand them.”

This is all pacification mentality. This is the easy thing to do. Just give in. And if happiness is the goal of your life, you will give in. You will compromise your integrity. You will deny your own anxieties. You will overlook the signs and the flags and the clues that tell you that something is not right here. You may tell yourself, “Well, it is all just part of the drama of life, and I will be above it all.”

Throughout the world today, the wise are retreating because the Intervention is here. Only a few are in a position to advocate. Marshall is one of those people. Yet he will need others to help him. The world has not been lost. But the risk of it being lost is increasing.

Therefore, you cannot simply retreat and go live the rural pastoral life somewhere, tuning it all out, just being happy every day, going back to nature, carrying the water jugs, planting the corn, cooking the meals and living through the seasons. That is over! If you are going to be conscious, self-determined and have your own integrity, there is no running away now. There is no heading for the woods and pretending it’s not happening.

There is no more constant therapy on oneself. In the end, the only real therapy is to become real with what you know, to stand for what you know, to learn the wisdom necessary to carry what you know and to communicate what you know compassionately and powerfully. This is what any form of real therapy must lead to. Are you going to go back and repair your childhood? Are you going to find the unrequited love that your parents did not give you? People who become too concentrated on these things become disabled. They become wheelchair bound in their own minds. They could all become advocates for the truth, but instead, all they become is advocates for therapy, and not a great deal of therapy done today leads to the truth. There is no running away. There is no fulfilling yourself personally at the expense of establishing your own integrity, knowing the truth and standing for the truth.

Humanity must become united, or it will be dominated in the Greater Community. This is so obvious when you think about it. If other forces beyond your world want your planet, its resources and human allegiance, well, if the human family is divided, you are really inviting others to move in on you. “Sure, come on! There is plenty of room for everyone!”

Those who resist the Intervention will be accused of being unenlightened and fearful. Some will be accused of resisting the Intervention to protect their special interests. And there are some people who will resist the Intervention for these interests. However, there are those who will resist the Intervention because it is an Intervention. But with the Pacification Program, who can even call it for what it is? Who can say, “This is what it is!” without incurring resistance and condemnation? This is a real problem today.

We encourage the development of people’s discernment, discretion and the application of their critical faculties. What we encourage here is not based upon personal prejudice or social conditioning, but upon Knowledge. Knowledge is the part of you that knows. It is the greater mind within you that the Creator has given to you to meet the challenges and opportunities of your life. It is the voice of conscience within you. People compare their belief systems and judge each other, but this is not what we are talking about.

We are talking about rescuing humanity from a situation which would enslave it. We are talking about preserving human freedom and self-determination and encouraging human integrity in the midst of forces from the Greater Community who are intervening in your world. Is achieving this impossible? Well, in a way, the truth always looks impossible. The promotion and preservation of the truth always looks like it’s facing insurmountable odds. But that is only because the truth is not valued, recognized and felt deeply by enough people. What will get humanity out of this predicament is the same thing that will get humanity out of every predicament. It is facing the truth and doing what needs to be done.

There are many people in the world today who are very uncomfortable because they know that something really wrong is happening. Perhaps they think that their discomfort is just their own psychological problem. Perhaps they think it is a political, economic or environmental problem alone. If they do not have a Greater Community awareness, then they have to focus their attention on something else and look for some other kind of cause. But they know that something is not right about what is happening today. Things don’t feel right. Things are moving in a direction that they should not be moving in. Something is going on that is going to change things, but not in a good way. And the people who feel this are uncomfortable. They wake up with this discomfort; they go to bed with this discomfort. It’s just there. They feel it when they are out in the world. Something is not right.

Where does this discomfort come from? Why is it there? You can meditate. You can go on vacation. You can have nice food. And you can have moments of delight. But then you return to the discomfort. Something is amiss. It’s not simply because there is poverty or war or deprivation in the world. These have always been with you. Something else is going on here. Something else is really not right.

Yet you look around and most people are oblivious. They don’t know it. They don’t feel it. And they don’t care. Or they have good excuses. “Well, you know. It’s just human nature,” or “You know, it’s people’s fear. They just need to be more loving.” And you hear really lame excuses for something that is tremendous.

Your awareness needs to grow. Your fire needs to grow and become stronger—the fire of truth, the fire of Knowledge. Otherwise, your fire is always snuffed out, extinguished by personal ambivalence, personal fear, personal preference or the kind of listlessness that is the product of the Pacification Program.

The light of truth must become strong because there are greater forces of darkness here now. The deception is deep and complex. The denial is pervasive, and the acquiescence is pervasive and growing more so every day. Only Knowledge within you can penetrate it.

Humanity is losing its freedom, slowly but surely, and in such a way that this loss will be very complete because of the cleverness of the agenda behind it. This can happen because of the predispositions of so many people today. This can happen because of the effects of the Pacification Program, which is so well established now in many parts of the world.

Therefore, it will take courage and a strong advocacy to activate those people who already feel the discomfort, who already feel the problem but cannot identify it or its source. And it will take a strong advocacy to reach those people who have begun to acquiesce but whose sense of integrity is intact enough that they know that there is a problem within them and around them and who are struggling to maintain their clarity of mind as the fog descends.

For those who have acquiesced completely, there may be no answer. They may be beyond your reach. It would take a Greater Power, the Angelic Presence, to reach them. But even here, it is quite difficult because the pacification can become so complete that people will think that the very hand of Grace that is trying to rescue them is the very thing they must avoid.

You can only reach those who are uncomfortable, who have a sense of knowing that their integrity is being violated and who have begun to feel the persuasion of the Intervention but have not acquiesced to it. There are many people in this camp. You are not speaking to a minority. This advocacy will take time. It is not something that can be done in a few weeks, months or years. It is something that must be continuous.

Humanity’s emergence into the Greater Community will be quite difficult because of the Intervention. It will require that a higher consciousness be cultivated, protected and maintained in enough people. It is going to require a greater level of discernment and discretion, greater care about who you associate with and what you communicate. It is going to require a greater awareness and sensitivity to the world and to those forces who are in the world now casting an influence over humanity.

Developing this awareness and this sensitivity and establishing one’s personal integrity and relationships that represent this integrity are absolutely fundamental for success. This is what will keep Knowledge alive in the world. This is what will build freedom and keep it alive in the world. This is what will keep humanity intact. For once you lose your integrity and your freedom, it is very difficult to regain them. Very difficult. Even when people have sacrificed their integrity for relationships or for money or for advantage, even under these more normal circumstances, it is very difficult to regain it. You have to mount tremendous effort and take risks. It is easier, then, to stay out of trouble than it is to get out. You do not want to become a prisoner in your own world. You do not want to become a prisoner in your own mind. You do not want to become a prisoner to anyone or anything else.

If you could have a Greater Community perspective in these matters, you would recognize that though humanity has great difficulties and serious weaknesses, it is still relatively free in the universe. Of course, living on the surface of your world in isolation, you cannot see this because you do not have the perspective. That is why The Allies Briefings are so valuable, because they give you a perspective that you yourself could not otherwise have. How could you compare yourself to the rest of life in the universe? How could you understand the value of your freedom if you could not see that freedom like this is rare and must be protected well in the Greater Community?

This is why the Allies provide a greater perspective. Yet some people will complain, “Well, they do not give us answers. They do not tell us dates and facts and figures and locations.” That is not what is important. It is the understanding, the perspective, the higher consciousness that are critically important. Who cares where the Allies come from? The names of their worlds would be meaningless to you. You are not going to be able to go there for so long! Certainly not in your lifetime. The Allies are providing what is important for you to know about the Greater Community and about the Intervention. They are telling you who is here, why they are here and what they are doing. They are pointing the way to what must be done to counteract this Intervention, which includes the development of Greater Community awareness and a higher consciousness.

This development must be emphasized always. It is so vitally important, or people will miss the whole point. They will just assume that this is merely some phenomenal thing that probably isn’t true anyway. Some will say, “These Allies don’t even tell us their names or how they got here.” This is stupidity! If God sends an emissary, do you deny the emissary because he does not answer trivial questions? God has sent the Allies here to help educate humanity and to warn humanity of the grave risks that it faces at this time. Is this going to be denied because some trivial information is not provided?

This is why the development of Greater Community awareness is vitally important now. This is why higher consciousness must be promoted and preserved. This is why you keep Knowledge alive in the world. It is this that must be supported and honored at this great turning point.

Honor this material. Recognize it as being a gift of Grace. Respond to it. Have the courage to do this. Resist the pacification. Resist the influence to become listless and unresponsive to your own Knowledge. Resist the temptation to devote yourself to your own happiness above and beyond everything else. Resist the temptation to attack people of other faiths, cultures or nations. Resist the Intervention through awareness, through advocacy, through understanding. Promote human cooperation, unity and integrity.

First Commentary – The Problem of Human Denial

Third Commentary – Understanding the Intervention

Dangerous viruses can be created by leaky vaccines that do not prevent infection

link https://youtu.be/EoMH2R0vVxM


Nearly Half of All U.S. COVID Cases Are This New Variant

Analysis by Dr. Joseph Mercola

Could Living With Less Make You Happier and Wealthier?

CPR Can Do More Harm Than Good Without a Defibrillator

https://articles.mercola.com/themes/blogs/mercola/VideoPanel.aspx?PostID=1362120&v=20240109&CacheVideo=1

STORY AT-A-GLANCE

  • The latest SARS-CoV-2 variant, JN.1, was first detected in the U.S. in September 2023. By mid-December, it accounted for about half of all COVID cases in the country
  • According to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the rapid spread of JN.1 suggests it may be more transmissible and/or has greater immune-evading abilities
  • A vaccinology concept called “immune refocusing” explains how more dangerous viruses can be created by leaky vaccines that do not prevent infection
  • By continuing with boosters, we accelerate immune escape. Over time, variants will get better and better at evading our immune responses, and those who keep taking boosters will be the most vulnerable to infection of all
  • Because of the mutations seen in JN.1, vaccinologist Geert Vanden Bossche, Ph.D., predicts we will “very soon” see variants that are more virulent but less infectious. If this happens, healthy unjabbed individuals are unlikely to be affected because their first line of defense — their innate immune system — still works as it should. The jabbed, on the other hand, whose innate immune systems have not been trained, and whose adaptive immune systems have become increasingly useless, will be at very high risk of severe complications and death

The latest SARS-CoV-2 variant, JN.1, was first detected in the U.S. in September 2023. By mid-December, it accounted for about half of all COVID cases in the country,1 and calls to get the latest “updated” COVID shot resumed. Cases associated with this variant are also on the rise in the U.K., China and India.2

According to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the rapid spread of JN.1 suggests it may be more transmissible and/or has greater immune-evading abilities:3

“JN.1 is similar to BA.2.86 but has an additional mutation (L455S) in the spike protein. JN.1 continues to cause an increasing share of infections and is now the most widely circulating variant in the United States.

For the two weeks ending on December 23, 2023, JN.1 is expected to account for 39-50% of all SARS-CoV-2 variants. That’s an increase from the projected prevalence two weeks ago of 15-29%.

We’re also seeing an increasing share of infections caused by JN.1 in travelers, wastewater, and most regions around the globe. JN.1’s continued growth suggests that the variant is either more transmissible or better at evading our immune systems than other circulating variants.”

JN.1 Is Not Associated With More Severe Disease

The CDC does, however, stress that JN.1 does not appear to cause more severe disease than any of the other variants we’ve seen in the last couple of years, most of which have caused nothing more than common cold symptoms. The New York Times even noted:4

“As far as experts can tell, JN.1 does not seem to be causing severe illness in most other people, though even a mild case can still make you feel ‘quite miserable for three or four days,’ Dr. [William] Schaffner [infectious disease specialist at Vanderbilt University Medical Center] said.

The symptoms of a JN.1 infection are similar to those caused by previous COVID variants, including a cough, fever, body aches and fatigue … JN.1 will most likely remain the dominant version of the coronavirus through spring, Dr. Schaffner said.”

According to data from the British Office for National Statistics, the most commonly reported symptoms among COVID-19 patients in December 2023 included:5,6

Runny nose (31.1%)Cough (22.9%)
Headache (20.1%)Weakness or tiredness (19.6%)
Muscle ache (15.8%)Sore throat (13.2%)
Trouble sleeping (10.8%)Worry or anxiety (10.5%)

Of these, the only symptoms that can be considered “novel” are problems sleeping and worry/anxiety, which could easily be the natural outgrowth of having spent the last four years bombarded with fear-based propaganda about COVID.

Mass Vaccinating During Active Pandemic Is a Disaster

Despite three years of evidence to the contrary, the CDC still insists that existing vaccines are the best way to protect yourself against JN.1. In the video above, vaccinologist Geert Vanden Bossche, Ph.D., discusses the challenges of controlling transmission with vaccines, as even with mRNA technology we’re still chasing the virus.

His resume includes work with GSK Biologicals, Novartis Vaccines, Solvay Biologicals and the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation. As some of you may recall, in 2021, Vanden Bossche7 published an open letter8 to the World Health Organization in which he warned that implementing a global mass vaccination campaign during the height of the pandemic could create an “uncontrollable monster” where evolutionary pressure will force the emergence of new and potentially more dangerous mutations.

“There can be no doubt that continued mass vaccination campaigns will enable new, more infectious viral variants to become increasingly dominant and ultimately result in a dramatic incline in new cases despite enhanced vaccine coverage rates. There can be no doubt either that this situation will soon lead to complete resistance of circulating variants to the current vaccines,” Vanden Bossche wrote.9

His warning fell on deaf ears, but evidence clearly shows that he was on the right track. Increasingly, variants have mutated to evade both natural and injection-based immunity, with those having received the COVID shots now being at higher risk of infection than their unjabbed peers.

Download this Article Before it Disappears

Download PDF

The COVID Jabs Are Driving Potentially Hazardous Mutations

As explained by Vanden Bossche, the COVID jabs, from the beginning, have produced the wrong immune response, which inevitably leads to immune escape. In summary, when you vaccinate against one variant, in this case the original Wuhan strain, your immune system will produce antibodies against that strain.

When your immune system is then hit with a second variant — as is the case when the vaccine is a step behind — it will be overly focused on the original strain, which allows the second strain to pass through its defenses.

Vanden Bossche’s concern now is the possibility of variants capable of causing more severe symptoms. We haven’t seen that yet, but as he notes in this interview, the mutations are no longer limited to conserved domains shared by many variants, but are also found in other viral proteins, some of which may enhance infection.

He goes on to explain a vaccinology concept called “immune refocusing,” which is how more dangerous viruses can be created. Immune refocusing happens when you have a vaccine breakthrough infection, meaning the vaccine did not result in enough neutralizing antibodies to block the virus. This is also known as a “leaky vaccine.”

The breakthrough infection boosts production of previously induced antibodies, giving you very high titers. And, while they have very low neutralizing capacity, the sheer number of them can still have some neutralizing, albeit short-lived, effect on the virus.

During the time the antibodies have this neutralizing effect, they bind to the dominant epitopes (an epitope is the part of the antigen that is recognized by your immune system), and by doing so, the subdominant epitopes that normally are outcompeted by the dominant ones can now be recognized by your immune system.

By continuing with boosters, we accelerate immune escape. Over time, variants will get better and better at evading our immune responses, and those who keep taking boosters will be the most vulnerable to infection of all.

The problem is that once these antibodies begin to lose their neutralizing capacity, they become sub-neutralizing, which allows for the propagation of more infectious variants. The mRNA jabs make immune refocusing all the more likely because they induce antibodies with low affinity to the immunodominant epitopes from the start, and automatically prioritize subdominant epitopes. This, Vanden Bossche explains, is why:

“… after the second dose of mRNA vaccine, we have seen cross-neutralizing antibodies against several different variants. Of course the manufacturers and the WHO were saying, ‘Oh wow, this is great … We are now broadening the immune response.’

[But] they have not taken into account that they [are] generating low-affinity antibodies and that is why they … very rapidly evolve toward sub-neutralization, suboptimal titers that … drive immune escape.”

The key take-home from all of this is that our immune response will never get any better if we continue this way. In fact, by continuing with boosters, all we’re doing is accelerating immune escape, Vanden Bossche warns. Over time, the variants will get better and better at evading our immune responses, and those who keep taking boosters will be the most vulnerable to infection of all.

This is the exact opposite of what vaccination is all about, and could result in an absolute public health disaster, especially should variants also begin to mutate into strains that cause more serious symptoms.

What Concerns Vanden Bossche About JN.1

While JN.1 does not appear to be any more troublesome than previous variants, Vanden Bossche worries about what this particular variant tells us about the immune pressures that gave rise to it in the first place.

The neutralizing domains of the spike protein have completely changed from the original. They’re even completely different from BA.2, from which JN.1 arose, as shown in a November 2023 study in the journal Vaccine.10

The problem, Vanden Bossche explains, is that while vaccine developers point to high titers of neutralizing antibodies against various variants (including JN.1) at two weeks post-jab, they’re ignoring (or hiding) the fact that these are not true neutralizing antibodies. Vanden Bossche refers to them as pseudo-neutralizing, because:

“… they have no specificity for the monovalent epitope. They can only interact with the multimeric presentation of the spike on a viral particle, or on viral aggregates, and therefore their neutralizing effect is very much limited in time, and that is … what JN.1 tells us.

JN.1 is fine in its own right, but it tells us something which is extremely worrisome. It tells us, basically, that the highly vaccinated populations have … progressed their antibodies to stabilizing aggregates that are now primarily taken up by antigen-presenting cells and are driving mitigation of infection, because even vaccinees [vaccine recipients] who are regularly exposed have no severe symptoms …

The vast majority of regularly exposed have, still, relatively mild symptoms, so mitigation of the disease is now explained by the cytotoxic T cells that will abrogate infection, or kill cells that have been infected … That is another way of mitigating the infection, which is driving … more infectious variants like JN.1 …

We see that JN.1 spreads like wildfire. It has outpaced all of the co-circulating variants globally in no time … Secondarily, we see a very clear surge in cases of hospitalization, severe disease and death … in several European countries …

But the most interesting thing, when you look at the changes in JN.1 … there is something extremely spectacular. For the first time, the mutations are no longer limited to conserved domains … those that are shared among several different variants. The mutations seen in JN.1 … are very uncommon.

We are also seeing a number of mutations that aren’t even spike specific anymore. They are located in other viral proteins, and these mutations have an infection-enhancing effect … They are, for example, promoting the efficiency of viral protein synthesis, or they are promoting the efficacy of intracellular viral replication …

What I see is that JN.1 is the result of immune pressure on the virus. An immune pressure that … moved away very clearly from targeting common epitopes that are shared among several different variants … and it moved away from targeting epitopes that are within the spike …

When you put all these things together, you can now clearly confirm that … we have been shifting the immune focusing from the humoral response to a cellular response … This immune refocusing is driven by antibodies of lower and lower affinity … What this means is … none of the updated vaccines will work …

Remember, every single time you have vaccine breakthrough infection, you boost [the pseudo-neutralizing antibodies], but … if this boosting effect no longer takes place, or is diminishing … then you will see a decline in those antibodies …

When the concentration diminishes … infection-enhancing antibodies are a disaster, because these infection-enhancing antibodies are also responsible for inhibiting the virulence of the virus … So now you are going to put suboptimal immune pressure on viral virulence, and that is what’s going on.”

The Jabbed Will Be at Grave Risk if SARS-CoV-2 Becomes More Virulent

Because of the mutations seen in JN.1, Vanden Bossche predicts we will “very soon” see variants that are more virulent, meaning more damaging and deadly. If this happens, healthy unjabbed individuals are unlikely to be affected, according to Vanden Bossche, because their first line of defense — their innate immune system — still works as it should.

As a virus becomes more virulent, it typically has to pay a fitness cost, so it becomes less infectious. In other words, it won’t spread as easily, but when it does infect someone, it causes more severe disease.

Vanden Bossche predicts that since the innate immune systems of the unjabbed have been continuously trained on all these different variants, they are therefore less likely to become infected, and if they do, they will be largely asymptomatic.

The jabbed, on the other hand, whose innate immune systems have not been trained, and whose adaptive immune systems have become increasingly useless thanks to the processes described by Vanden Bossche, will be at very high risk of severe complications and death.

mRNA Jab Causes Off-Target Effects

The latest COVID injections contain a single modified RNA said to correspond to the Omicron variant XBB.1.5., which was the dominant variant in the U.S. for most of 2023, but which has since been replaced by JN.1 and several other variants.

The SARS-CoV-2 virus mutates so quickly, there’s simply no way to keep up, let alone get ahead of it, and as explained above, this catch-up game is ultimately what puts pressure on the virus to mutate, and potentially into a more virulent form.

On top of that, we now also know that the shots are producing off-target proteins in 25% to 30% of recipients, and are contaminated with DNA, both of which have huge potential to cause harm. Until or unless they fix those problems, the risks are simply unacceptable, in my opinion.

But even if these issues were successfully fixed, we’re still facing a situation in which continued boosting will accelerate mutations that could eventually make the virus deadlier again, at least for those who have taken the shots.

It’s basically a death spiral, and the only way to end it is to stop taking boosters. There are no indications that our health authorities will protect the public by withdrawing the COVID shots, so it’s incumbent on each individual person to simply say no.

Got the Jab? Take Action to Safeguard Your Health

If you already got one or more jabs and now have concerns about your health, what can you do? First and foremost, never take another COVID booster, another mRNA gene therapy shot or regular vaccine. You need to end the assault on your system.

If you developed symptoms you didn’t have before your shot, I would encourage you to seek out expert help. At present, the Front Line COVID-19 Critical Care Alliance (FLCCC) seems to have one of the best treatment protocols for post-jab injuries. It’s called I-RECOVER and can be downloaded from covid19criticalcare.com.11

Dr. Pierre Kory, who cofounded the FLCCC, has transitioned to treating the vaccine injured more or less exclusively. For more information, see DrPierreKory.com. Dr. Peter McCullough is also investigating post-jab treatments, which you can find on PeterMcCulloughMD.com.

The World Health Council has also published lists of remedies that can help inhibit, neutralize and eliminate spike protein, which most experts agree is the primary culprit. I covered these in my 2021 article, “World Council for Health Reveals Spike Protein Detox.”

https://articles.mercola.com/sites/mercola/special-content/dynamic-ending-ad-nac-with-milk-thistle-01092024.aspx?cid_medium=email

– Sources and References

Our Spiritual reflections

OUR SPIRIT

R E F L E C T I O N S

Douglas Gabriel

The Demise of AWSNA Woke Waldorf SchoolsOORead More

The woke agenda of the World Economic Forum and Klaus Schwab has infiltrated Waldorf schools around the world.

Are Waldorf woketard indoctrinating your children under the banner of “Waldorf Education”? Get them out of these satanic cess pools before your girls come home wanting to be boys and your boys think being white is evil.

  Douglas GabrielMysteries of Ascension RevealedOORead More

Dr. Gabriel gives a lecture on Whitsun, also known as Pentecost, and its relevance to the process of spiritual ascension.

  Douglas GabrielRudolf Steiner on the Nature of DemonsOORead More

Demonic possession, exorcisms, Luciferic egotism, Satan worship, and obsession with evil seems to arise in the news everyday and yet there is little understanding of what the nature of those beings and forces are, or what their intent and mission is in relationship to the evolution of the human spirit. Dr. Rudolf Steiner tells us more about these issues than any other person in modern times. It behooves us to listen closely to his indications on these topics so that we might understand the biography of demons, devils, and fallen angels.

  Douglas GabrielHow Do We Prepare for the Future Sixth Epoch?

Decades ago Jackson Brown wrote a song called “Before the Deluge” that clearly described the longings of his generation to seek peace not war and to “go back to the land” in  true millennialist’s fashion. It was a cry for help to the divine to shed mercy on those who wish to preserve, respect, and cherish Mother Nature.

Their longing for that which “comes down from the sky”, like New Jerusalem, is the mood of soul that arises as an awakened initiate approaches the threshold between the physical and spiritual worlds. These yearnings for the spirit to descend from heaven into the prepared “heart of longing” of each individual is a necessary prerequisite to  properly approach the dweller of the threshold and the unseen world beyond.

Jackson Brown was promoting building a bio-ark with Natura to weather the storm and ride out the deluge that was so clearly coming.

  Douglas GabrielToday’s Whore of BabylonOORead More

The “City of Babylon” has been around since 2000 BC developing a world-wide network of Satanic followers who use the ancient institutions of Babylon to maintain a powerful network of evil social, economic, political, and cultural organizations that have been continuously in control of the physical world for 4000 years. These bankers, tax-collectors, warmongers, and political elite refuse to let their personal aggrandizement be deterred from world domination. They are literally an evil lineage of banking families that are hidden behind most of the world’s worshipers of money, power, and control.

  Douglas GabrielVictory Over the ApocalypseOORead More

The end times is here and the Seventh Angel has released the seventh bowl. These events are happening on a grand scale in these “end times” and we must prepare ourselves to understand the mystery of the Cosmic Christ and then make ourselves ready for the bridegroom. New Jerusalem is descending from heaven, and we must make ready for the wedding feast. We must continue to preach the Eternal Gospel and sing the New Song of the Lamb if we wish to join the wedding party. This alone will ensure the completion of the plan of God to help his prodigal children return to their rightful inheritance upon the throne of God and the Lamb.

  Damascus ExperienceDouglas GabrielThe Apocalypse is Now!

Dr. Gabriel demonstrates that the apocalypse is happening now, especially the judgements found in the Book of Revelations.

  Douglas GabrielNew World Awakening Series with Master Teacher Douglas GabrielOORead More

These insightful videos were published in February and March 2018, but several were censored by YouTube/Big Brother. We are re-posting them – all together – in case you missed any or all of them back in the day. Feel free to save to your own files and mirror on your own channels.

  Douglas GabrielThe LOVE of EVIL – Greatest Threat to Humanity

Rudolf Steiner on the Superhuman Beings of Venus, Mercury, and Vulcan

Did Rudolf Steiner Channel the Masters?

Douglas Gabriel and Joe Visconti are doing a series of discussions on Rudolf Steiner’s lectures, mixed with every day observations from the political and cultural realm.

Materialism and the Task of Anthroposophy

A Picture of Earth-Evolution in the Future

Cosmic Memory, The Earth and Its Future

Theosophy of the Rosicrucians

  Douglas GabrielThe Mysteries of Sleep and DreamsOORead More

Rudolf Steiner, the great spiritual scientist, helps us understand the nature and mechanisms of sleep, dreams, and death. He also gives indications on the psychological, mental, and psycho-kinetic aspects of the stages of dreams. He clearly describes the differences between the sleep and dreams of materialists compared to spiritual scientists (aspirants and initiates). Steiner has given us more information about sleep and dreams than modern science.

  AkashaDouglas GabrielBiography of a Global ExorcistOORead More

After years of producing videos, books, and articles, Douglas Gabriel is ready to share his biography in a series of interviews with his long-time friend John Barnwell.

  Douglas GabrielWhat is cosmology – ancient and future?

https://youtube.com/watch?v=BcUdbeULoz8%3Fversion%3D3%26rel%3D1%26showsearch%3D0%26showinfo%3D1%26iv_load_policy%3D1%26fs%3D1%26hl%3Den%26autohide%3D2%26wmode%3Dtransparent

  Douglas GabrielCosmogenesis of the Ethers

Science of the ethers, the theory of everything, Lucifer, Christ, Ahriman, the and the magic of crystals. An interview with master teacher Douglas Gabriel.

  Douglas GabrielThe Nature of Sorat the Sun DemonOORead More

Can we stop these evil beings from bringing on the apocalypse 6,000 years early? We believe that consciousness is the most powerful tool in this battle. Bringing the true nature of evil to the attention of a few initiates is all that is necessary.

Forty-eight initiates (4 x12) becoming aware of this evil is the antidote to an accelerated time-line of human evolution that leads to destruction of the human “I Am.”

  Douglas GabrielInklings and AnthroposophyOORead More

J. R. R. Tolkien, the modern don of ‘high fantasy’ was a master at creating a living, inhabitable landscape with just a sentence, or a world with a paragraph. Tolkien tells us where his thoughts wondered to after taking up the challenge of his fellow Inklings to write fantasy stories that defy space and time – for him that was the sinking of Atlantis (Numernor). He wrote his first story about time travel after being prompted by fellow Inklings to “do better” than David Lindsay did in his disturbing fantasy The Voyage to Arcturus. This “challenge” to write better novels about conquering space and time in a believable fashion, led to a commitment by numerous Inklings to try their hand at writing fantasy novels that make space and time travel believable.

  Douglas GabrielSophiology and the Children of WisdomOORead More

Lecture and e-book by Dr. Douglas Gabriel, plus white board image inside this post.

  Douglas GabrielMystery of the Three Egos and Group-SoulOORead More

Individual humans began to have free thoughts, independent of the transcendental, divine world. Christ then incarnated on Earth in a physical body, once and only once, to bring to birth the personal ego of every free human being from that time forward. With further spiritual development of the personal ego, each liberated human ego can rise into the astral light (Spirit Self), lower devachan (Life Spirit), and higher devachan (Spirit Man) to reclaim the three higher egos that reside in the three supersensible realms where our older siblings, the Angels, Archangels, and Archai, live and help sustain the human astral, etheric, and physical bodies.

Ultimately, the free human individual, acting freely out of the impulses of Christ’s love, returns to the place whence they have come, but now with the gifts of personality and individualization that make each person a unique facet of the divine.

  AkashaDouglas GabrielThe Nature of ConscienceOORead More

Conscience is often seen as the “highest moral and logical authority” and evaluates information to determine the quality of an action: good or evil, fair, or unfair. Consequently, conscience usually ranks higher than consciousness and, in addition, has the ability and the authority to decide how information will be used, either for good or for ill. Conscience can determine our final decisions for action after evaluating, in a split second, all of the varying parameters. It also seems to be able to predict the outcomes of some actions.

  AkashaDouglas GabrielAngelic ConsciousnessOORead More

Now for the first time we reach the actual Earth evolution. In the next Pralaya which followed the Moon evolution, the Moon fell back into the Sun. As one body they went through Pralaya. When the Earth eventually emerged out of the darkness the whole Sun-mass was united with it. In that epoch the first or Polarian Race began. Then the previous Sun-Men, in accordance with conditions at that time, were able to form this specially favored species, the Sons of the Sun, because the Sun was still united with the Earth.

  Douglas GabrielGuest ContributorPhilosophy of Spiritual Activity is Freedom and LoveOORead More

The Philosophy of Freedom examines the basis for freedom in human thinking, gives an account of the relationship between knowledge and perception, and explores the role and reliability of thinking as a means to knowledge. Steiner analyzes the conditions necessary for human beings to be free, and develops a moral philosophy that he describes as “ethical individualism.”

  Douglas GabrielNature of the ‘I am’OORead More

Douglas Gabriel and John Barnwell explore the Secrets of the Threshold and the true ego.

  Douglas GabrielNightly Astral TravelOORead More

Dr. Douglas Gabriel explains the process of exomatosis, or astral travel, often described by Daskolas.

  Douglas GabrielNeoanthroposophyPre-Christian Deeds of the Cosmic ‘I Am’OORead More

Pre-Christian Deeds of the Cosmic ‘I AM’ . Download the e-book that Douglas has prepared for today’s lecture:

  Douglas GabrielNeoanthroposophyAwakening to the Three Higher EgosOORead More

Douglas Gabriel and John Barnwell discuss the nature of the three higher egos.

  Douglas GabrielRudolf Steiner on BuddhismOORead More

Why are the teachings of reincarnation and of Karma flowing into Christianity today? Because the initiates have learned to understand them in a modern sense, just as Buddha himself after his fashion understood them – and Buddha was the great Teacher of reincarnation.

In the same way we shall attain to an understanding of Skythianos, whose teaching deals not only with the reincarnation of men but with the powers which rule from eternity to eternity. So shall the central Being of the world, the Christ, be ever more and more understood. In this way the teachings of the initiates gradually flow into humanity.

We make a beginning by teaching the elementary truths of our earth evolution, by seeking that which we owe originally to Skythianos, Zarathustra and Buddha and by accepting it as they teach it in our age, in the form they themselves know it, their evolution having progressed to our present age.

We have reached a point in civilization now where the elementary teachings of initiation are beginning to be disclosed.”

  Douglas GabrielThe Eternal Ethers: The Secrets of Creation

https://youtube.com/watch?v=0PR6P0GZqqc%3Fversion%3D3%26rel%3D1%26showsearch%3D0%26showinfo%3D1%26iv_load_policy%3D1%26fs%3D1%26hl%3Den%26autohide%3D2%26wmode%3Dtransparent

The Eternal Ethers: The Secrets of Creation

  Douglas GabrielSuperhuman Beings of Vulcan, Venus, and MercuryOORead More

So much, so inconceivably much, has gone into our becoming what we are. And there is so inconceivably much contained in the Earth evolution that is still to come, and in our passage through the spheres of Jupiter, Venus and Vulcan!

Only little by little does one disentangle oneself from the implications of current thought and approach that which, because it is more spiritual, is more difficult to conceive and is rarely touched on by the habitual thinking of people of today.

  Douglas GabrielCommuning with Angelic HostsOORead More

Enjoy listening to a conversation between two anthroposophy scholars and students who explain how your Angel will give you the strength you need to get through these challenging times.

  Douglas GabrielThe Fairy Tale of the Green Snake and the Beautiful LilyOORead More

We present here a paraphrased summary of two lectures by Dr. Rudolf Steiner about Goethe’s Fairy Tale. Steiner has gone beyond Carlyle’s recommendation and attempted an interpretation of the symbols and characters brought forward from Goethe’s imagination. Steiner was the editor of Goethe’s scientific work and thus has an unparalleled understanding of the inner thoughts of Goethe. We can find through Steiner’s decoding of Goethe’s symbols, the flavor of Rosicrucian-Alchemical ideas for which Steiner himself was well known through his philosophy of Anthroposophy.

  Douglas GabrielRudolf Steiner on the Question of VaccinationsOORead More

Recently, a few articles have arisen from Anthroposophic sources that indicate that Rudolf Steiner was “in favor” of vaccines and therefore a tacit approval for the Covid-19 fake-vaccine is given the authoritative approval of Dr. Steiner.

This is not true and we have pulled together a number of Dr. Steiner’s indication from numerous lecture cycles to demonstrate that his opinion was neither for, nor against vaccines, but rather, depended on many elements including: geographical area, personal history, age, prior conditions, awareness of the true spiritual nature of the illness, fear of the illness, and many other possible factors.

One quote in particular that has been repeatedly highlighted insinuates that Dr. Steiner supported smallpox vaccinations in his day. Once a close examination of all the many references to vaccines and childhood illnesses are examined, it is obvious that Dr. Steiner did not approve of blanket vaccination, especially for young children. And it must be kept in mind that in Dr. Steiner’s time, vaccines were not laced with poisons and carcinogens as they are today.

A comprehensive study of Dr. Steiner’s remarks makes it clear that each individual case must be studied with care and in relation to the bigger picture.

  Douglas GabrielMysteries of Human and Cosmic IntelligenceOORead More

Rudolf Steiner: “America is to have a different form of Anthroposophy, and while it is presently woody and asleep, one should look to Emerson and his friends to understand it.”

Listen to Master Teacher Dr. Douglas Gabriel and John Barnwell discuss the nature of human and cosmic intelligence.

Marie Steiner, “The mission of our age is to bring forth not an ancient wisdom, but a new wisdom, one that points not only to the past but that works prophetically into the future.”

  Douglas GabrielGuest ContributorThe Incarnations of Ahriman and LuciferOORead More

Just as there was an incarnation of Lucifer in the flesh and an incarnation of Christ in the flesh, so, before only a part of the third millennium of the post-Christian era has elapsed, there will be, in the West, an actual incarnation of Ahriman: Ahriman in the flesh. Humanity on earth cannot escape this incarnation of Ahriman. It will come inevitably.

What matters is that people shall find the right vantage point from which to confront it.

  Douglas GabrielThe Mysteries of Meteorites and CometsOORead More

Rudolf Steiner’s relationship to meteorites can be summed up in the phrase: Get meteorites and work with them. Whether the spiritual scientist wishes to follow this injunction and aid the Archangel Michael, the spirit of the Sun, in his battle against the Dragon, Ahriman, or focus his attention on creating medicaments of meteoric iron to enhance the processes of combustion in the human blood, the power of meteorites should be seen as unique, powerful, and helpful to humanity.

In Anthroposophic medicine, meteoric iron is used to strengthen the ability for red blood cells to take up oxygen and enhance the process of respiration through a “slow burning fire”; meteoric iron also can be used for meditation and contemplation on the cosmic workings of our solar system.

  Douglas GabrielCrystals and the Process of AscensionOORead More

In an effort to bring more light on the nature of crystals, we have gathered numerous selections from Steiner’s work to illuminate this topic that has gained so much interest from many quarters. We will not attempt a summary of this information because it might seem far-fetched and filled with fantasy. But, like it or not, crystals have tremendous secrets locked inside of them that can also be found in the human body.

  Douglas GabrielGerman Thinkers and Pre-School TheosophyOORead More

We hope that you will find these vignettes, and the selected passages on Truth, to be helpful in the search for Absolute Truth, the substance of what can be found in Anthroposophy through Rudolf Steiner’s profound insight. It is also of great interest to our study of Anthroposophy to see some of the source documents that Steiner was reading as he developed his comprehensive world view – cosmology. We greatly appreciate being pointed in the direction of these early ‘pre-school theosophists’ so that further insights about Truth could be unearthed.

  Douglas GabrielWhat is Cosmic Intelligence?OORead More

Douglas Gabriel joins John Barnwell is a discussion about Truth, Beauty, and Goodness as they review quotes from Rudolf Steiner on what it takes to discover ultimate truths.

  Douglas GabrielFatima’s Secret Prophecy RevealedOORead More

The Prophecies of Our Lady of Fatima came true when Pope John Paul II was shot and went through the ordeals and challenges that eventually lead to the circumstances of his canonization as a saint. The Fatima Prophecies predicted the whole thing as well as many other details concerning the Roman Catholic Church.

Previous popes had chosen not to give the third and final prophecy to the public because they thought the condemnation of the church, described in great detail in the prophecies, cast a dark shadow over the papacy. It was held back for forty years before it was shared.

  Douglas GabrielThe Gospel of St. John as Mystery WisdomOORead More

To understand the nature of the Word, as referenced by St. John, is to see through physical matter to the spirit of creation and life that stands behind Maya and the delusion of time and space. Traveling the path of the signs, wonders, and miracles that Jesus Christ performed loosens the ties of material delusion. Understanding the stages of initiation displayed in the Gospel of St. John heals those parts of the soul that have been damaged by fallen angels. The antidote to selfishness is shown through the life and ministry of Jesus of Nazareth.

The end goal of this path of spiritual development (initiation) is depicted in the Book of Revelation. Then, adding the personal path of “Lazarus raised”, St. John the Divine, the Beloved of the Lord, we have the path to heaven through the Holy Spirit (the comforter). Christ’s initiation and John’s initiation give us the sign-post and topology of spiritual development.

  Douglas GabrielEvil Foundations of MaterialismOORead More

The Gospel of John contains the spiritual magic to dispel the hypnotic allure of hyper-materialism. Meditating on the “Word”, the “Logos” that is Christ is the key to living thoughts, inspirations, and intuitions.

Developing the direct connection with Christ in the etheric realm helps dissolve the grey shadow-thoughts of materialism that are drowning the etheric realm with darkness and enslavement of human free will.

  Douglas GabrielThe Karma of UntruthfulnessOORead More

We live in the post-truth age manipulated by false-hood politics and media untruthfulness. Without a strong sense of discernment for the truth, all of the lies, misrepresentations, subliminal programming, and propaganda constantly obfuscate, conflate, confabulate, and misguide the person who is not ‘as wise as a serpent.’

Whether its Lucifer, the father of lies, being cast down to the Earth by the Archangel Michael or the serpent whispering lies and falsehoods to Adam and Eve, we can find the battle between good and evil displayed throughout human history.

In today’s world we might say: Find the spiritual truth in your thinking, the beauty of the world in your heart, and add to them good deeds freely accomplished with love. Truth, Beauty, and Goodness, according to the Greeks, will grant you wings to fly into the higher realms of the archetypes where truth resides, pure and un-defiled.

  Douglas GabrielVoyage to ArcturusOORead More

In 1920 a Scottish writer Daivd Lindsay wrote a book ‘Voyage to Arcturus’ that became the central influence on C. S. Lewis’ Space Trilogy and through him on J.R.R. Tolkien. It’s a book that Douglas highly recommends.

  Douglas GabrielSpiritual Initiation in the 21st Century

Douglas gave a lecture at the Embassy of Life Mastery in Mt. Pleasant, Michigan this weekend. We saved an audio version so that you could hear what he had to say about initiation in the 21st Century.

  Douglas GabrielNorthern Leaders of HumanityOORead More

The northern regions were thought to be a land of everlasting life or renewal of life where special beings might be found. In the ancient epochs of the earth there were beings who dwelt in the polar regions who had poorly developed physical bodies but highly developed ether bodies with great clairvoyant faculties.

They could understand the wisdom of the stars and the hierarchies of spiritual beings; they belonged to a “group soul” of an advanced nature. They can be thought of as living in the air in a kind of paradise and were not dependent on the earth.

They were to develop over time into the more advanced human beings of Atlantis.

  Douglas GabrielHave you Encountered the Guardian of the Threshold?OORead More

An aspirant seeking initiation into the mystery wisdom of the ancients attempts to cross the Threshold consciously through transcendent meditation, spiritual practices, and initiation. Initiation is not for the weak-hearted, scared, or lazy person.

The preparations for initiation can be extremely demanding and complicated, and in the end, the aspirant may faint at the Threshold and not be able to resolve the sins the Guardian displays before the quaking consciousness of the aspirant.

Many try and fail.

Sometimes, the aspirant may “loose their mind” in the process of attempting to cross the Threshold before they are ready. And, even if the aspirant makes it across the Threshold it doesn’t mean they have the moral strength to remember what they experienced in the spiritual world while they were there.

Only the selfless desire to gain wisdom for the sake of all other being’s welfare will keep the aspirant conscious in the spiritual world and help the aspirant remember the communion he had with the beings in that world.

  Douglas GabrielScythianos – The Hidden MasterOORead More

There were great Manu beings of the past that were inspired by archangels, but there will also be Manu teachers in the future who have risen to that high rank of development from the human domain. Scythianos is one of the Manus of the future and is consider one of highest human initiates of all time. Scythianos was said to have studied directly with the ancient Manu who led the fifth migration off of Atlantis to the Central Asian mystery initiation center in Western China, near the Gobi Desert. The central Sun mystery initiation center of Manu and the seven Holy Rishis carried the wisdom of Atlantis to a place often referred to as, The City of Manu.

  Douglas GabrielThe Nature of Salt, Mercury and SulphurOORead More

 The three substances of salt, mercury and sulphur are the three forms or modes of action in which the universal primordial will is manifesting itself throughout nature, for all things are a trinity bound together in a unity. Each of these forms of will power is an individual power; nevertheless, they are substantial, for “matter” and “force” are one and originate from the same cause.

The three substances, held together in harmonious proportions, constitute health; their disharmony constitutes disease, and their disruption death.

The medieval alchemist knew that if he did not combat his passions in one incarnation, he would be born with a predisposition for illness in the next one, but that if he purified his passions he would enter life in the next incarnation with a predisposition for health. The process of overcoming through spirituality the forces that lead to decay is microcosmic salt formation.

We can understand how a natural process like this occasioned the most reverent prayer.

  Douglas GabrielEducating Wisdom Children for the New World AwakeningOORead More

Dr. Douglas Gabriel presents an opening lecture on his book The Eternal Curriculum for Wisdom Children – the literature and cultural icons needed by Wisdom Children to integrate the development of humanity into a healthy, living, and meaningful world-view. If you enjoyed Dr. Gabriel’s lecture, you might also enjoy his other lecture series located at the links inside.

  Douglas GabrielEtherization of the BloodOORead More

The heart as central sense organ of the physical and spiritual worlds transforming earthly substance into cosmic food that nourishes self-development.

  Douglas GabrielQuest for Spiritual Pathways: TranshumanismOORead More

Douglas Gabriel gives a lecture at the Rudolf Steiner House in Ann Arbor, Michigan on Transhumanism on September […]

  Douglas GabrielTechnologyCrystals Hold Secrets of the AkashaOORead More

The story of the magical Tibet stones was simply a fantasy until one day I reached down and picked up a stone that was a small globe that was gold, blue, red and white; as I held it – it came alive. Not alive like an opal shimmering with pastel rainbow colors, nor the sheen of tiger’s eye turning from dark to light as you move it back and forth, nor the crystal 5radiant burst of rainbow beams that shoot out from a diamond; no, it was alive. It was a living being like nothing I had ever seen before.

  Douglas GabrielManifesto to Save Human ThinkingOORead More

Machines are devices that devolve humans and separate them from nature and their natural being and are a cheap substitute for true transcendence and unity with the wisdom of the world and the cosmos. Human contemplative thinking calls us back to ourselves in an experience that is qualitatively different from when we are engaged in logical analysis or problem-solving. In contemplative thinking, we enter our own interior sacred space, which is characterized by stillness and receptivity towards an inspiration transcendent of the analyzing, problem-solving mind. No machine can do this.

The true mind is in the heart, and it is only when it takes its place there that we regain our connection with the world and the cosmos. When we center ourselves in that deeper intelligence of the heart, we are also centered in our essential freedom. It is, above all, the inner quality of freedom that should guide us as we go towards a future in which it seems we shall be increasingly hemmed in on all sides by an ever more pervasive machine “intelligence” which, while purporting to serve us, ties us into ever-greater bondage.

  Douglas GabrielThe War in Heaven as the Quest for the GrailOORead More

The fiery spear of Michael is a spiritual tool that is used to hold Lucifer (dragon) at bay so that his evil might be changed to good. This type of outcome makes the spear and sword of Michael into a spiritual weapon that vanquishes evil and leads the battle for the good. But to apply that type of spiritual logic to the spear that pierced the side of Jesus on the cross is difficult for some to understand.

  Douglas GabrielSelected Works of George William Russell (A. E.)OORead More

Enjoy the special selections and images of A. E. compiled by Douglas Gabriel.

  Douglas GabrielThe Secrets of the Ethers – Ernst Marti’s The EthericOORead More

Modern science does not recognize the four elements of fire, air, water, and earth. The solid, liquid, and gaseous forms of matter are not elements. The Greek concept of nature was based on the recognition of the four elements. Somewhat as a fifth, ether was added. Aristotle said of ether: “It is that which is different from earth, water, air, and fire; it is eternal and eternally revolves in a circle.” The elements have their origin in the center, the ethers in the periphery. The former are central, the latter peripheral; the former are point-like, individual; the latter universal, comprehensive. Mathematically speaking, one could say they relate to each other like plus and minus, positive and negative.

  Douglas GabrielChristian Rosenkreutz is Calling His Pupils. Are You One?OORead More

The voice I heard was not the usual voice of conscience that speaks when we need to determine right from wrong or other such situations. It was not the voice of any spiritual being that I had encountered up to that time. It was a real voice outside of myself that produced clearly audible words. It was a man’s voice that was filled with authority and love. I felt the voice was helping me, even though his command didn’t seem reasonable. I had never heard a “discarnate” voice before and it took me by surprise, but yet it was not scary or frightening in any way.

  Douglas GabrielTree of Life and InediaOORead More

Stigmata, revelation (apocalypse), possession, and hauntings have much in common and are simply a matter of whether the person affected is accessing the Tree of Life or the Tree of Knowledge of Good and Evil. There is much confusion regarding these matters because, until now, they have remained a secret of the mystery schools that draws the distinction between Christ and Ahriman.

  Douglas Gabriel